The Modernized Philidor Defense - Sergio Trigo Urquijo

Table of Contents
Title page
Key to Symbols
Bibliography
Preface
Introduction
Chapter 1 – Rare 2nd Moves

Chapter 2 – 2.Nc3
Chapter 3 – 3.Nd2 and 3.Bd3
Chapter 4 – 3.f3
Chapter 5 – Rare 4th Moves
Chapter 6 – 4.f4
Chapter 7 – 4.Nge2
Chapter 8 – 4.dxe5
Chapter 10 – 5.g4
Chapter 12 – Sacrifices on f7
Chapter 13 – Various 7th Moves
Chapter 14 – 7.Re1
Chapter 15 – 7.a4
1
The Modernized Philidor Defense
by
Sergio Trigo Urquijo
Thinkers Publishing 2021
www.thinkerspublishing.com
First edition 2021 by Thinkers Publishing

Copyright © 2021 Sergio Trigo Urquijo
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission from the publisher.
All sales or enquiries should be directed to Thinkers Publishing, 9850 Landegem, Belgium.
Email: info@thinkerspublishing.com
Website: www.thinkerspublishing.com
Managing Editor: Romain Edouard

Assistant Editor: Daniël Vanheirzeele
Typesetting: Mark Haast
Proofreading: Kai Tan
Software: Hub van de Laar
Cover Design: Iwan Kerkhof
Graphic Artist: Philippe Tonnard
Production: BESTinGraphics
ISBN: 9789464201208
D/2021/13730/16
2
Key to Symbols
! a good move
? a weak move
!! an excellent move
?? a blunder
!? an interesting move
?! a dubious move
™ only move
N novelty
‰ lead in development
ʘ zugzwang
= equality
∞ unclear position
© with compensation for the sacrificed material
² White stands slightly better
³ Black stands slightly better
± White has a serious advantage
µ Black has a serious advantage
+– White has a decisive advantage
–+ Black has a decisive advantage
‚ with an attack
ƒ with initiative
„ with counterplay
… with the idea of
¹ better is
≤ worse is
+ check
# mate
3
Bibliography
Books
Winning with the Philidor, Tony Kosten, Batsford 1992

Attacking with 1e4, John Emms, Everyman Chess 2001
Attacking Repertoire for White, Sam Collins, Batsford 2004
Opening for White according to Anand 1.e4 (Vol. 4), Alexander Khalifman, Chess Stars 2005
The Philidor Files, Christian Bauer, Everyman Chess 2007
The Modern Philidor Defence, Vladimir Barsky, Chess Stars 2010
A Universal Weapon 1.d4 d6, Vladimir Barsky, Chess Stars 2011
The King’s Gambit, John Shaw, Quality Chess 2013
1.e4 vs The French, Caro-Kann and Philidor, Parimarjan Negi, Quality Chess 2014
A Cunning Chess Opening for Black: Lure Your Opponent Into the Philidor Swamp, Sergey Kasparov,
New in Chess 2015
Playing 1.e4 - Caro-Kann, 1...e5 and Minor Lines, John Shaw, Quality Chess 2016
Electronic/Periodical
Correspondence Database, ChessBase

Mega Database, ChessBase
Online Database, ChessBase
The Week in Chess, Mark Crowther
Video Series, Chess24
Programs/Engines
ChessBase 14
Houdini 4
Leela Chess Zero
Stockfish 12
4
Preface
But Inigo, how can this be good for Black? It was the first thing I asked my good friend and FIDE Master
Inigo Martin Alvarez after he taught me the queen exchange line (1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5
5.Qxd8+ Kxd8) of the Philidor Defense. I confess I couldn’t believe it. He also insisted that against
6.Bc4, the best response was 6...Be6, allowing pawns to be doubled! I could not get over my astonishment
– a variation in which Black quickly surrendered the possibility of castling and voluntarily doubled (and
isolated) pawns in the center!
I naively thought that the best way to prove to my friend how wrong he was, was to play against him in
that position and to beat him – but I couldn’t. There was no way to break that pawn structure. So, as the
popular saying goes: “If you can’t beat your enemy, join him!”
Since the time when he taught me this defense, at an under-12 Spanish Championship, I have not stopped
playing it. It has always been part of my opening repertoire, even becoming my main weapon for much of
my life, with great results.
But it is one thing to play it and quite another to write a book about it. Me writing a book? Even though
the idea has been in my head for quite some years, I have to say that I didn’t think I would be able to do it
until Grandmaster Romain Edouard offered me the opportunity – I couldn’t refuse it, although it would be
quite a challenge for me.
I had the advantage that there were not many specific books on the market about this defense which, on
the one hand, made my task easier; on the other hand, this placed a considerable responsibility upon me to
write a book that could become the main authoritative reference on the Philidor Defense.
The biggest challenge has been to fight against the engines that, at first glance, don’t credit this defense
with the value it deserves. This is because the engines significantly value the space that White usually has
against the Philidor, but there is one aspect that neither Leela Zero nor Stockfish nor any of the other
engines take into account – and that is the counterattack!
The aim of this book is to provide the reader not only with a complete repertoire for the Philidor Defense,
but especially a repertoire that begins from the very first move – because White has mechanisms at their
disposal to avoid entering into the vast labyrinth that they often perceive when meeting this opening. Why
do I say labyrinth? Because Black can come up with different move orders that make White dizzy – and
the curious thing is that almost all of these ways are acceptable and have good statistics in practical chess.
For example, Black may decide to play with ...c6 and ...a5, with ...c6 and ...b6, with ...c6 and ...Qc7, or
with ...a6 and ...b6 (which I recommend) etc. In short, I think Black has several schemes, and each one is
not very difficult to learn because they have many lines in common.
My goal, as I mentioned before, is to write a book that will become the main reference on this defense and
one that will be of help to all types of players, from club players to Grandmasters. For this reason, it was
my wish (and I hope I have succeeded) to create a very elaborate repertoire with the firm intention that
any player will be able to face an opponent of a higher level, without fear and with clear ideas.
I have tried to include new moves and new ideas against practically all of White’s weapons and I have
aimed to be as exhaustive as possible, so that I can accompany the explanation of the ideas with concrete
moves, to make them easier for the reader to understand.
Clearly 1...d6 and the Philidor Defense in particular, is far from being the refutation of 1.e4 but I have
always tried to look for options for Black that are active in order to equalize or to achieve very real
counterplay.
5
Furthermore, the advantage of studying this book and playing this defense with Black is that the chances
of White finding new ideas are much lower than in other main openings – such as some very critical lines
of the Sicilian, for example, where we constantly see new moves and schemes that quickly land Black in
trouble.
Having said all this, I encourage you to discover (if you haven’t already done so) this great defense. I hope
you enjoy the book and that it will be very useful for your games and hopefully, you will gain many points
with the Philidor.
Sergio Trigo Urquijo

Portugalete, January 2021
6
Introduction
“Pawns are the soul of chess.” We have all heard this phrase more than once in our chess life and we owe
it to the great French player François-André Danican, so-called Philidor, considered one of the best chess
players of the 18th century.
It’s not surprising that with this way of thinking, he revolutionized chess, which until then was almost all
about direct attacks on the king. With this, he also changed the way of understanding and playing
openings, in which he introduced a new concept for the time – that the pawns should be ahead of the
pieces.
Bearing this in mind, the defense he created can be much better understood, in which all these rules are
fulfilled and the importance of the pawn structure is maximal.
At first, his idea was to play this opening in the order of 1.e4 e5 2.Nf3 d6 and it was some time before it
was discovered that the move 3.d4 was the best response, and the one that gave Black the most trouble.
Attempts were made to make 3...Nf6 and 3...Nd7 work but it was concluded, after much praxis, that
Black could not equalize. However, the concept was clear and the defense did not fall into disuse.
From then onwards, this defense had been varying its move orders until it was finally realized that the best
way to play would be 1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5.
The popularity of this opening has changed over the years but it has always lived in the background,
behind the more mainstream openings such as the Spanish, the Sicilian or the French, among others.
However, with the quick development of the field of theory that we have had (and have nowadays) thanks
to engines, the main openings have become filled with an amount of theory that is virtually impossible to
remember. This means that more and more people are deciding to research and play other openings which
are often easier to understand, and the amount of lines required to study is much less. In addition, on many
occasions, these lines are the ones that really surprise our opponents.
Although the Philidor Defense may still be considered a secondary opening, many Grandmasters use it
with some regularity. My initial idea was to name them but there are so many that it is impossible. To give
a little list, this defense has been used by, among many others, Magnus Carlsen, Maxime Vachier-Lagrave,
Fabiano Caruana, Vassily Ivanchuk, Alexander Grischuk, Teimour Radjabov and Pavel Eljanov. They are
just a small example among the ocean of Grandmasters who have played it.
To understand better, as I said before, and beyond knowing the specific moves, I think it is essential to
recognize the pawn structures that are going to be formed. For this reason, I am going to show you here
some standard structures that we are going to see throughout the different chapters:
Symmetrical structure
7
This structure is created when White exchanges their d4-pawn for Black’s e5-pawn. Generally speaking,
and from my experience, this structure usually takes place with all the pieces on the board and with both
kings castled short. Normally, White has a knight on c3 and Black has a knight on d7 – the black knight
stands a little better thanks to the possibility of installing it on c5, from where it attacks the e4-pawn and
can even go, if necessary, to e6, then transferring to d4 or f4. Conversely, the white knight on c3 can only
jump to d5 but Black can easily control that via c6. With this in mind I would say that, notwithstanding the
obvious equality granted by this symmetrical structure, we have potential.
Structure after taking on d4
This structure takes place when Black exchanges the e5-pawn for White’s d4-pawn.
Usually, this is somewhat more comfortable for White to play as long as they can put a piece (generally a
knight) on d5. Why? Because the only way to expel that piece would be with ...c6, which would weaken,
slightly, the pawn on d6. However, not everything looks negative for us. In return for this compromise,
Black can exert strong pressure upon the e4-pawn, usually with a rook from e8 and with a knight from c5.
Besides, having to play ...c6 is not a weakness about which we need to be too overly-concerned, when
8
there are many pieces on the board, together with the dark-squared bishop on f8. In addition, Black can
often open up the center with ...c6 and ...d5 or by taking on e4 with a piece, and then ...d5.
Sämisch structure
This is a structure that is rather typical of the Sämisch Variation of the King’s Indian Defense. I have this
opening in my repertoire against 1.d4 – I am very used to playing this structure and I find it comfortable
for us as Black. Usually Black places a knight on c5 and, once we do that, the plan is to attack on the
kingside by expanding with ...f5. White will try instead to attack on the queenside by advancing the pawns
b3-a3-b4.
Closed center
This is a very similar structure to the previous one but with a very important difference: the white pawn is
on a4. This means that the plan discussed earlier for White no longer exists and it doesn’t look easy for
them to open up the queenside by c3-b4. For this reason, taking advantage of the fact that the pawn is on
c2, White’s plan is usually to place their minor pieces on their weak squares (a bishop on c6 and a knight
9
on b5) and to try to attack Black’s weakest pawn, which is c7. As Black, we will follow the same idea that
we have discussed with the previous structure: we are going to create counterplay on the kingside.
Sicilian structure
This is the typical structure of one of the fashionable lines arising from the Sveshnikov Variation of the
Sicilian Defense: appearing after the moves 1.e4 c5 2.Nf3 Nc6 3.d4 cxd4 4.Nxd4 Nf6 5.Nc3 e5 6.Ndb5
d6 7.Nd5 Nxd5 8.exd5. In that variation, I believe that the structure makes sense for White because the
white pawn on d5 gives them more space and both sides have three minor pieces. However, in the
Philidor, this structure favors Black instead, because it usually occurs after the exchange of one or two
minor pieces which makes life easier for us. Besides, Black’s plan is very simple: expand on the kingside
by ...f5 and this usually gives rise to excellent positions.
Standard structure
Here, we have the structure that will be repeated most often in the book: the structure that is created by the
Hanham Variation of the Philidor. Personally, I like the order ...a6 and ...b6 without touching the c7-pawn.
10
This serves to develop the bishop to b7, quickly attacking the e4-pawn. Then, depending on how White
plays, we’ll play ...c6 or take on d4. If White decides to close with d5, then this forms the structure that
has already been seen above.
Doubled and isolated pawns
I dare say that this is the most characteristic structure of the Philidor Defense that we will see in the book.
I don’t remember any other opening where this structure is reached. Perhaps a version may be seen in the
Exchange Variation of the French Defense, but the pawns there would be doubled and isolated on the d-
file instead.
As I explained in the preface, it was thanks to this structure and how much it surprised me that I was
introduced to the world of this opening. At first glance, they look terrible but they have a great virtue in
that they control all the central squares. This is very important because: if we look at the position from
which this is derived (after 1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6
fxe6), we can see that except for the light-squared bishops, the rest of the minor pieces are on the board,
especially the knights. This means that our e5- and e6-pawns control the white pieces very well and it is
not easy for them to find strong squares. Our opponent’s plan is to improve their knights by looking for
squares from which to attack the pawn on e5, since e6 is not targetable. Those squares are usually d3 an
c4. Therefore, the most frequently repeated maneuvers will be f3-Nh3-Nf2-Nd3 and Nb1-Nd2-Nc4.
Even if White manages to place their knights in the ideal way, the e5-pawn will be very well-defended,
usually with a bishop on d6 and a knight on d7 or c6. But not everything in life is going to be about
defending with Black. This structure gives us considerable counterplay on the queenside which we will
expand by ...a6, ...b5 and ...c5. Although the main aim is to play on this side, it is also possible equally to
create counterplay on the kingside. This can be contemplated because there is only one open file (the d-
file) for the rooks but White won’t be able to exploit it. For this reason, Black’s rooks will be free, from
the last rank, to launch their pawns forwards on both sides.
11
Chapter 1
Rare 2nd Moves
1.e4 d6
Chapter Guide
Chapter 1 – Rare 2nd Moves
1.e4 d6
a) 2.g3
b) 2.Nf3
c) 2.Bc4
d) 2.f4
a) 2.g3
1.e4 d6
Although 2.d4 is White’s main second move by far, it is clear that White has other alternatives and we
must be well-prepared against all of them, if we don’t want to be surprised.
2.g3
12
Position after: 2.g3
This is the least common alternative and I have never had to face it in practice.
2...d5!
Reacting in the center is the best way to take advantage of the weaknesses created on the diagonal.
3.exd5
3.Bg2 dxe4 seems the easiest way to play. 4.Nc3 Nf6 5.Nxe4 e5 gaining space and control of the center.
Position after: 5...e5
6.d3 Nxe4 7.Bxe4 Bd6= with equality. Black’s position seems more comfortable to play thanks to the
easy development of their pieces.
13
3...Qxd5
Position after: 3...Qxd5
Already puts the opponent in trouble.
4.Nf3
If White were to play 4.Qf3, it would be a good idea for Black not to exchange queens and to play 4...Qc5
instead. The reason is that the white queen on f3 is badly placed because it hinders the development of her
own pieces.
4...Bg4
Position after: 4...Bg4
14
5.Be2
5.Bg2 This is how it was played in the game Rolletschek, H – Humer, W Linz 1993. We can take
advantage by removing any possibility of castling for White. 5...Qe6+!N 6.Kf1 [6.Qe2 doesn’t solve the
problem for White because of 6...Qxe2+ 7.Kxe2 Nc6 8.c3 e5= and our position is very pleasant. We can
continue with long castling.] 6...Qa6+ From this square, White cannot gain development time by attacking
the queen.
Position after: 6...Qa6+
A) 7.Kg1 Unlike with 7.d3, here, White seeks to play d4. 7...Nf6 8.h3 [8.d4?! Now is not a good time to
make this move because we can attack it quickly. 8...Nc6 9.c3 e5!³] 8...Bh5 9.d4 [9.g4 Bg6 10.Ne5 Be4!
11.Bxe4 Nxe4=] 9...e6
15
10.g4 [10.Nbd2 Nbd7 11.Kh2 Be7= and now our idea is ...c5.] 10...Bg6 11.Ne5 Nc6 12.Nxg6 hxg6
13.c3 e5= and we have a comfortable position.
B) 7.d3 Nc6 8.h3 Bh5 9.Nc3 0-0-0 This seems to be the best way forward. The idea is to attack on the
kingside. 10.g4 Bg6 11.Be3 e5 12.Nh4 Nge7=
Position after: 12...Nge7=
I find the position more pleasant to play for us as Black. The idea is to improve the situation of the
knights, placing one on d4 and the other on c6.
5...Nc6
Position after: 5...Nc6
6.h3
16
6.Nc3 White can decide to play without h3 but it doesn’t seem suitable. 6...Qd7 7.d4 e6
A) 8.Ne5 to exchange some pieces but we are well-prepared for this. 8...Bxe2 9.Qxe2
Position after: 9.Qxe2
9...Nxe5 [9...Nxd4?! I don’t think it’s worth winning this pawn because White obtains ample
counterplay. 10.Qd3 Qd6 11.Bf4 f6 12.Nf3 Qc6 13.Nxd4 Qxh1+ 14.Ke2 Qxa1 15.Qb5+© and the
white pieces have very good compensation for the exchange.] 10.dxe5 Bb4 11.Bd2 Bxc3 12.Bxc3 0-0-
0=
Position after: 12...0-0-0=
Although there is equality, the position is more comfortable to play for us (as Black) because the pawn
structure favors our knight. Why? Because the white pawns are located on the same colored squares as
their bishop.
17
B) 8.h3 Bxf3 There is no need to exchange but it’s for a specific reason. [8...Bf5!?] 9.Bxf3 0-0-0!
Position after: 9...0-0-0!
forcing White to play d5 and resulting in a few piece exchanges. 10.d5 exd5 11.Qxd5 Qxd5 12.Bxd5
Nd4 13.Be4 Nf6
Position after: 13...Nf6
So far everything appears forced and Black’s position looks very healthy. 14.Bd3 Nd7 15.Be3 Nc5 16.0-
0-0 Nxd3+ 17.Rxd3 Nf5=
6...Bh5
18
Position after: 6...Bh5
7.Nc3
7.g4 Unlike 7.Nc3, White’s idea is to keep the option of playing c4. 7...Bg6 8.d4 e6 9.c4 as played in the
game Munoz Pantoja, M – Narciso Dublan, M Barbera 2020. 9...Qd6!N In the aforementioned game,
Black retreated to d7. 10.Nc3 0-0-0 11.Be3 h5 12.g5 Nge7
Position after: 12...Nge7
13.c5 White is forced to play in this way to continue with the attack. [13.Qa4 is a very natural move but
meets the strong reply 13...Qb4!. We can see the idea behind 9...Qd6. 14.Qxb4 Nxb4 15.0-0-0 Nf5=]
13...Qd7 Black has gained control of the d5-square for their knight. 14.Qa4 Nd5 15.0-0-0 Be7 Breaking
through the kingside with ...f6.
19
Position after: 15...Be7
16.Rhg1 [16.Bb5 f6 17.Rhg1 Be8= with the idea of playing ...a6, with a good position for Black.] 16...a6=
7...Qd7 8.d4 e6 9.Bf4
As tried in Munoz Pantoja, M – Mateus, A Badalona 2019.
9...0-0-0N
Position after: 9...0-0-0N
It’s best to put a lot of pressure on the center.
10.Nb5
20
10.Ne5 to exchange pieces but we are well-prepared. 10...Nxe5 11.Bxe5 Bxe2 12.Qxe2 Ne7 13.0-0-0
Nd5= and Black doesn’t have any problems.
Position after: 13...Nd5=
10...Bxf3!
Black gives up the pair of bishops, but profits by taking White’s central pawn.
11.Bxf3 Nxd4
Position after: 11...Nxd4
12.Nxd4
21
12.a4 is a possible move but Black has a good answer. 12...e5! 13.Nxd4 Qxd4 14.Qxd4 exd4= and we
have nothing to fear. Now, we can transfer the knight from g8 to c6 via e7.
12...Qxd4 13.Qe2 Nf6 14.0-0 Bd6 15.Rfd1 Qa4 16.Be3 Be7=
Position after: 16...Be7=
Even though White has compensation thanks to their pair of bishops, Black has an extra pawn and nothing
to fear in this position. Now, the plan is simply to exchange rooks.
b) 2.Nf3
1.e4 d6 2.Nf3
Position after: 2.Nf3

22
2...Nf6 3.d3
If White decides to play 3.Nc3, we will transpose to the lines that are analyzed in the next chapter.
3.c3 taking advantage of the fact that we cannot capture the e-pawn due to a check on a4. 3...e5 4.d3 Be7
5.Be2 c5 6.0-0 Nc6 Transposing to 4.Be2.
3...e5
4.g3
4.Be2 c5 to have more control over the center. 5.0-0 Nc6 6.c3 Be7 Here, White has two reasonable
options:
23
A) 7.d4 exd4 8.cxd4 as played in the correspondence game Marcotulli, G – Borelli, C IECG email 2002.
8...d5!N
Position after: 8...d5!N
Dynamiting the center. 9.exd5 [9.e5 Ne4=] 9...Nxd5 10.dxc5 0-0 11.Bc4 Be6= And once we recoup the
pawn, we won’t have any problems.
B) 7.Re1 0-0 8.Nbd2 [8.Bf1 Re8 9.Nbd2 Bf8 10.a3 d5= as in the game Onischuk, A – Zhu, C Beijing
1998.] 8...d5 9.exd5 Nxd5 10.Bf1 Qc7 11.Nc4 Bf6= as tried in the game Sulskis, S – Shulman, Y
Vilnius 1997.
Position after: 11...Bf6=
24
Black has everything under control and thanks to the space advantage, this position is easier to play with
the black pieces.
4...g6 5.Bg2 Bg7 6.0-0 0-0
Position after: 6...0-0
As we can see, it’s a totally symmetrical position.
7.Nbd2
7.c3 c5 8.Re1 Nc6 9.a3 [9.a4 gaining space on the queenside. 9...h6 10.Na3 Re8 11.Nc4 Be6= as in
Bagheri, M – Maghsoodloo, P Arak 2016. Black is ready to play ...d5.] 9...h6 10.b4 a6
Position after: 10...a6
25
The c6-knight is very well-placed, so it is better to prevent b5. 11.Nbd2 Be6 12.Nb3 [12.Bb2 Nd7 13.Nc4
b5! 14.Ne3 Nb6=] 12...c4! 13.dxc4 Bxc4 14.Nfd2 Be6 and we are prepared to break with ...d5, so White
decides to play 15.c4 as played in the game Sutovsky, E – Dominguez Perez, L Saint Vincent 2002. Here,
we have a very strong riposte. 15...a5!!N
Position after: 15...a5!!N
16.b5 a4! 17.bxc6 bxc6³ and the position is favorable for us due to the superior pawn structure.
7...c5
Position after: 7...c5
8.c3
26
A) 8.a4 Nc6 9.Nc4 h6 10.Ne3 [10.b3 Be6 11.Bb2 Qc7= with equality in Bosiocic, M – Tiviakov, S
Trieste 2008] 10...Be6 11.Nd2 Qd7= and Black has no concerns as we can see in the game Weindl, A –
Bogdanovski, V Cannes 1990.
B) 8.Nc4 b5 9.Ne3 Nc6= as in Harikrishnan, A – Glimbrant, T Barcelona 2019.
8...Nc6
9.Re1
A) 9.a3 b5 10.b4 Rb8= occurred in Amin, B – Socko, B Khanty-Mansiysk 2010. Black’s plan is to move
the knight from f6 to b6 via d7.
B) 9.a4 h6 10.Nc4 Be6
27
11.Nfd2 [11.Qe2 Qc7 12.Nfd2 Rad8 13.a5 d5³ was played in Amin, B – Robson, R Antalya 2013.
Black’s position seems easier to play thanks to his space advantage.] 11...d5 12.exd5 Bxd5³ as in the
game Van der Wiel, J – Sosonko, G Amsterdam 1995.
9...h6 10.a3 Be6 11.b4 b5!
Position after: 11...b5!
Gaining space on the queenside and preventing White’s b5.
12.Bb2 a5
Putting considerable pressure on this side.
13.a4 axb4 14.axb5 bxc3 15.Bxc3
Here, we have reached the game Amin, B – Debashis, D Doha 2016.
15...Nd4!N
28
Position after: 15...Nd4!N
Black has a strong domain in the center and we will be able to progress through the queenside.
16.Bxd4 cxd4 17.Nc4 Qc7 18.Nfd2 Nd7=
And the position seems equal. Our plan now is to move ...Rfb8 and then ...Nc5.
c) 2.Bc4
1.e4 d6 2.Bc4
29
Position after: 2.Bc4
The idea is to continue with d3.
2...Nf6 3.d3
A) 3.Nc3 e5 4.f4?! The remaining options will transpose to the lines analyzed in the next chapter.
4...Nxe4!
Position after: 4...Nxe4!
An important move. 5.Nxe4 d5 6.Nf3 [6.Qe2? dxc4 7.fxe5 Nc6 8.Nf3 Be6 9.Neg5 Qd5µ and we have a
clear advantage as was shown in the game Kupreichik, V – Galdunts, S Graz 2001] 6...dxc4 7.Nxe5
Qh4+ 8.g3 Qe7 9.0-0 Nc6³ and Black has an advantage due to the pair of bishops.
30
Position after: 9...Nc6³
B) 3.Qe2 A reasonable choice with White. 3...e6 with the threat of ...Nxe4 followed by ...d5. 4.Bb3
[4.d3 Be7 5.Nf3 0-0 6.0-0 c5 and we are ready to react in the center. 7.c3 d5 8.Bb3 b5=] 4...c5
Here, our opponent has two interesting choices:

B1) 5.f4 Be7 6.Nf3 0-0 7.d3 [7.e5 Nd5 8.d3 Nc6=] 7...Nc6 8.c3 b5 9.0-0 a5 10.a4 b4=
B2) 5.Nf3 Be7 6.0-0 [6.d4 cxd4 7.Nxd4 Nc6 8.c3 0-0 9.0-0 Qc7=] 6...0-0 7.c3 b6
31
Position after: 7...b6
Black’s idea is to develop the bishop to a6. Now, White has three options:
B2.1) 8.Rd1 Ba6 9.d3 Nc6 10.Nbd2 Qc7 11.Nf1 Rad8 12.Ng3 Ne5= with equality as essayed in
Weill, R – Dourerassou, J Lille 2015.
B2.2) 8.Re1 Ba6 9.d3 Nc6
Black prepares to transfer the knight from f6 to e5. 10.Bf4 [10.Nbd2 Nd7 11.Bc2 Nde5 12.Nxe5
dxe5= as in the game Duarte, L – Fier, A San Luis 2006] 10...Nd7 [10...Nh5!?] 11.Na3 Nde5= as
was played in Baklan, V – Fish, G Yalta 1996.
B2.3) 8.d3 Ba6 9.Nbd2 Nc6 10.Bc2 Qc7 11.a3 Nd7 12.Re1 This position was reached in McShane, L
– Karjakin, S Hastings 2002. 12...d5!N gaining more space in the center.
32
13.e5 [13.Nf1 Black is ready to capture. 13...dxe4 14.Qxe4 Nf6 15.Qh4 Rad8 16.Bf4 Qd7=] 13...f6!
14.exf6 Rxf6 Black has significant counterplay along the f-file and their pieces are more active than
the opponent’s. 15.Nf1 Raf8 16.Bg5 Rxf3! 17.Bxe7 Nxe7 18.gxf3 e5 and we have a clear advantage.
Now, our plan is to play ...Ng6 and ...Nf4.
Back to 3.d3.
33
Position after: 3.d3
3...e6 4.Bb3
4.Nf3 d5 5.exd5 exd5 6.Bb3 Be7 7.0-0 0-0=
4...c5 5.f4
We are following the game Fernandez Romero, E – De Dios Ortega, J Seville 2016. Here, Black has a
strong move.
5...b5!N
Position after: 5...b5!N
So as to continue with ...c4.

34
6.Nf3
A) 6.Qe2 Be7 7.Nf3 0-0 8.e5 Nd5 9.0-0 dxe5 10.Nxe5 Bb7= Black has no problems.
B) 6.c3 c4! 7.dxc4 [7.Bc2 Bb7 8.Qe2 cxd3 9.Bxd3 a6 10.Nf3 Nbd7³] 7...bxc4 8.Bc2 Nbd7 9.Nf3 Be7
10.Qe2 0-0= with a pleasant position for us as Black.
6...Bb7
Position after: 6...Bb7
7.0-0
7.e5 Nfd7 8.exd6 Bxd6 9.Nc3 a6 10.a4 b4 11.Ne4 Be7=
7...Be7 8.Nc3
8.Qe2 c4 9.dxc4 bxc4 10.Bxc4 Nxe4=
8...c4! 9.dxc4 b4 10.Ba4+
35
Position after: 10.Ba4+
10...Bc6
It is also possible to play 10...Nbd7!?. 11.e5 to exchange a few pieces but we are well-prepared. 11...bxc3
12.exf6 Bxf6 13.Qxd6 cxb2 14.Bxb2 Bxb2
Position after: 14...Bxb2
15.Rab1 [15.Rad1 Qb6+ 16.Qxb6 axb6 17.Bxd7+ Ke7=] 15...Qb6+ 16.Qxb6 axb6 17.Bxd7+ Kxd7 and
the endgame seems to be heading for a draw. 18.Rxb2 Bxf3 19.Rxf3 Kc6=
36
Position after: 19...Kc6=
11.e5
11.Bxc6+ Nxc6 12.Nb5 Nxe4=
11...bxc3 12.Bxc6+ Nxc6 13.exf6 Bxf6 14.b3 0-0 15.Ba3 Be7=
Reaching a balanced position. Now, a possible idea would be to play ...Qa5.
d) 2.f4
1.e4 d6 2.f4
37
Position after: 2.f4
An alternative against which we must be well-prepared.
2...e5
I firmly believe that for us, the best option is to enter into the King’s Gambit.
3.Nf3
3.Bc4 exf4 is best. 4.d4. 4.Nf3 Transposes to the main line. 4...Qh4+ 5.Kf1 Nc6 6.Nf3 Bg4 7.Bb5 seems
to be the best choice for White.
Position after: 7.Bb5
38
7...Qh5 8.Nc3 f5! kicking the center. 9.Qd3 0-0-0 10.Bxc6 bxc6 11.Bxf4 fxe4 12.Qxe4 Ne7 13.Re1 g5
14.Nxg5 Bh6µ
Position after: 14...Bh6µ
as was played in the game between the engines Stockfish and Lc0 on chess.com 2020.
3...exf4
Position after: 3...exf4
4.Bc4
If White had chosen 4.Nc3, after 4...g5, it would transpose to the lines analyzed in the next chapter.
4.d4 is an interesting move. 4...g5 Here, our opponent has three options:
39
Position after: 4...g5
A) 5.Bc4? is a poor choice, as we can gain an advantage. 5...g4! 6.0-0 gxf3 7.Qxf3 Qf6 Although it may
seem that White has compensation, it’s not really enough. 8.e5 The best option, opening up the center to
try to reach our king. 8...dxe5 9.dxe5 Qb6+ 10.Kh1 Ne7!
Position after: 10...Ne7!
Our plan is to work on developing the pieces. 11.Bxf4 Be6 12.Bxe6 Qxe6 13.Qxb7 Qc6! 14.Qb3 Nd7
15.Bg3 Qe6 16.Qf3 Rb8 17.Nc3 Bg7–+ and after castling short, we have a clear advantage.
B) 5.h4 is the usual idea in the King’s Gambit but now it doesn’t work for White. 5...g4 6.Ng1 [6.Ng5?
f6! 7.Bxf4 fxg5 8.hxg5 Bg7µ] 6...Qf6 7.Nc3 Ne7 8.Nge2 Bh6
40
Black has everything defended so White doesn’t appear to have enough compensation for the sacrificed
pawn. 9.Qd2 [9.g3 fxg3 10.Nxg3 Bxc1 11.Rxc1 Nbc6–+ with a decisive advantage as was seen in
Khader, S – Aleksandrov, A Dubai 2010.] 9...Nbc6 10.Nb5 Kd8
Position after: 10...Kd8
Here, White has two reasonable moves but Black is very well-prepared against both.
B1) 11.e5 Qf5! 12.exd6 Nd5 13.Nxc7 as tried in the correspondence game Naftalin, S – Bangiev, A
corr. 1990. 13...Re8!N brings in
41
Position after: 13...Re8!N
another piece. 14.Nxe8 Ncb4 15.Nc7 [15.d7 f3–+] 15...f3–+

B2) 11.d5 The best option for White, as was played in Gallagher, J – Flear, G Lenk 1992. 11...a6!N
12.Nbc3 [12.Nxc7 Kxc7 13.dxc6 Qe5 14.Nxf4 Qxe4+³] 12...Ne5 13.Nxf4 g3 Leaving the g4-square
free to be occupied by a piece. 14.Qe3 N7g6
Position after: 14...N7g6
We can see how the white pieces are thoroughly pinned. 15.Nce2 Nxf4 16.Nxf4 Ng6 17.Nh5! Bxe3
18.Nxf6 Bd4 19.Nh5 Bf2+ 20.Kd1 f5³
42
Position after: 20...f5³
And the position is more comfortable for us to play as Black.

C) 5.g3 The best move for our opponent. 5...Bg7 6.Nc3 Nc6
7.d5 [7.Bb5? g4 8.Nh4 f3 9.Be3 a6 10.Bxc6+ bxc6 11.Qd3 Ne7 12.0-0-0 0-0µ] 7...Ne5 8.gxf4 gxf4
9.Bxf4 Bg4 10.Bb5+ Kf8 11.Be2
43
Position after: 11.Be2
We have reached the game Zvjaginsev, V – Smirnov, P Novokuznetsk 2008. Now, we have an excellent
move. 11...Nxf3+! 12.Bxf3 Qf6 13.Bxd6+ cxd6 14.Bxg4. This position was seen in the correspondence
game Nepustil, F – Kuta, J ICCF email 2014. 14...Qh4+N 15.Kd2 Ne7
Position after: 15...Ne7
It should be noted that Black has great control over the dark squares. Now, one possibility is to install the
knight on e5. 16.Kc1 [16.Rf1 Bh6+ 17.Kd3 Ng6³] 16...h5 17.Bd7 Rd8 18.Bb5 Bxc3 19.bxc3 Qxe4³
4...h6
44
Position after: 4...h6
5.d4
5.0-0 g5 6.Nc3 Bg7 7.d4 Nc6 8.Nd5 Nge7 It seems that Black has no difficulties in developing their
pieces and the plan is to castle long. 9.c3 Nxd5 10.Bxd5 Ne7 11.Bb3 Bg4 12.g3
as was seen in the correspondence game Firsching, G – Weber Widmer, D Remote email 2013. 12...Qd7N
13.gxf4 0-0-0µ
5...g5
45
6.0-0
6.g3 Bg7 7.gxf4 g4 8.Rg1 Nc6 9.Be3 as in Todorovic, G – Husari, S Budapest 2001. 9...Kf8!N An
excellent king move. 10.Nc3 gxf3 11.Qxf3 Nxd4 12.Qf2 Nc6
It doesn’t appear that White has enough compensation for the piece. 13.0-0-0 Bxc3 14.bxc3 Qf6µ
6...Bg7
46
7.c3
7.g3 Nc6 8.gxf4. 8.c3 transposes to the main line. 8...Bh3 9.Rf2 g4 10.d5 Na5 11.Bb5+ c6–+ as occurred
in Johnson, C – Berry, J Oklahoma 2008.
7...Nc6
8.h4
A) 8.Qa4 Bd7 9.Qb3 Na5! Black can afford to get caught on f7. 10.Bxf7+ Kf8 11.Qa3 Kxf7 12.Qxa5
Kg6µ
47
Position after: 12...Kg6µ
With a clear advantage for Black as demonstrated in the game Van Hoorn, G – Warmerdam, M Assen
2018.
B) 8.g3 Bh3 9.Rf2 Qd7 10.gxf4 Nf6!–+ as essayed in Rasulov, V – Raetsky, A Abu Dhabi 2014. Black’s
plan is to improve the king’s position by castling long.
8...Qe7 9.Qb3 Nf6!
Position after: 9...Nf6!
10.hxg5
10.e5 dxe5 11.hxg5 hxg5 12.Nxg5 Nd5 [12...Bh6!? is also a good option. 13.Nxf7 Rh7–+] 13.Nxf7
[13.Bxd5 Qxg5 14.Bxf7+ Kf8–+] 13...Qxf7 14.Bxd5 Qh5 15.Nd2 Qh1+ 16.Kf2 Qh4+ 17.Kg1
48
Position after: 17.Kg1
17...Nxd4! 18.cxd4 e4!–+
10...hxg5 11.Nxg5
And we reach the game Langer, W – Ackermann, D Germany 1989. Here, we have a very strong
response.
11...Nh5!N
Position after: 11...Nh5!N
12.Nxf7
49
12.Bxf7+ Kd8–+
12...Nxd4! 13.Qd1 Rh7!
An important move. Once the rook is not under attack, it’s time to play ...Ng3.
14.Bxf4 Nxf4 15.Rxf4 Ne6–+
Position after: 15...Ne6–+
With a decisive advantage. The knight on f7 will be trapped after ...Bf6.
Conclusion to Chapter 1
White has several alternatives to 2.d4 with their second move. Those analyzed in this chapter are the least
common. In facing all of these, Black seems to have mechanisms to at least equalize and in many cases, to
obtain a clear and comfortable advantage.
The most dangerous amongst these alternatives for Black to face is perhaps 2.f4, but I firmly believe that
it is best to play 2...e5, entering the King’s Gambit because I believe that Black obtains good positions
there.
50
Chapter 2
2.Nc3
1.e4 d6 2.Nc3
Chapter Guide
Chapter 2 – 2.Nc3
1.e4 d6 2.Nc3 e5
a) 3.Nge2 and 3.g3
b) 3.Nf3
c) 3.Bc4
d) 3.f4
a) 3.Nge2 and 3.g3
1.e4 d6 2.Nc3
51
Position after: 2.Nc3
In my opinion, this is White’s most interesting alternative to the main line 2.d4 for Black to play against.
2...e5 3.g3
3.Nge2 is a very little-used option that does not put Black in any difficulty. 3...Nf6 4.g3 c6!
Position after: 4...c6!
A good move. The idea is that White cannot avoid Black’s two threats, either by playing ...d5 or by
playing ...b5. 5.Bg2 [5.a4 White prevents Black’s expansion on the queenside but now comes 5...d5!
6.exd5 Nxd5 7.Bg2 Nxc3 8.Nxc3 Bb4 and we don’t have any problems.
52
In fact, the e5-pawn give us more space. 9.0-0 0-0=] 5...b5 6.0-0 [6.a3 Be7 7.0-0 Nbd7 and it will
transpose] 6...Be7 7.a3 0-0 8.h3 Nbd7 9.d3 a5 10.g4 as in the game Khismatullin, D – Yudin, S Moscow
2007.
10...Re8N The idea is to vacate the f8-square to allow the knight to move to the kingside. 11.Ng3 Nf8
12.Nf5 Ne6 13.Ne2 Bf8 14.f4 h5! An important move with the idea of stopping White’s attack. 15.g5
Nh7=
53
Position after: 15...Nh7=
and Black has no problems in this position. A possible continuation would be to open up the center with
...d5.
3...Nc6 4.Bg2 g6 5.d3 Bg7
6.f4
A) 6.Nge2 Nge7 7.0-0 [7.Be3 Nd4 8.h3 0-0 9.Qd2 c5 10.f4 b5³ as in Ding Yixin – Vijayalakshmi, S
Riyadh 2017.] 7...0-0 8.Be3 [8.f4 f5 9.Be3 Nd4= was seen in the game Gabrielian, A – Khanin, S
lichess.org 2020. Black’s pieces are very active.] 8...Nd4 9.Qd2 Bg4 The aim of this move is to force
White to play f3. 10.f3 Be6
54
With these two bishop moves, we see that it has been beneficial for us to force f3, because now the g2-
bishop barely has space. 11.f4 Releasing the bishop. [11.Nd1 d5!=] 11...Qd7 12.Rf2 c5 13.Raf1 f5
14.fxe5 dxe5= With an equal position as in Rubinetti, J – Di Berardino, D Pinamar 2005.
B) 6.Be3 Nge7 7.h4 is a very standard move when Black decides to develop the knight to e7 instead of
f6. [7.Qd2 0-0 8.Bh6 Nd4 9.Bxg7 Kxg7 10.Nd1 f5!
Position after: 10...f5!
A good decision, activating all the pieces due to Black’s greater development. 11.h4 f4 12.gxf4 Rxf4=
With a very promising position] 7...h5 The best way to play. 8.Qd2 0-0 9.Bh6 Nd4 activating the pieces.
10.Bxg7 Kxg7
55
Position after: 10...Kxg7
B1) 11.Nce2 c5 12.c3 This position was reached in Garcia Castro, P – Movsziszian, K Mondariz 2002.
Now, we have a strong reply. 12...Ndc6!N It is best for us not to exchange because White’s knights
have difficulties getting to strong squares. We are ready to react with ...d5. 13.d4 cxd4 14.cxd4 d5ƒ
B2) 11.Nd1 d5! 12.Ne3 Be6 13.f4 dxe4 14.dxe4 as tried in Mamedyarov, S – Kasimdzhanov, R
Tashkent 2014.
Position after: 14.dxe4
14...Qd6!N 15.c3 Ndc6 16.Qxd6 cxd6 17.Ne2 Rad8 18.0-0 f5 19.Bh3 Rf6= and Black has nothing to
worry about in this position.
6...Nge7 7.Nf3 0-0
56
8.0-0
8.Be3? is a mistake that was seen in the game Spassky, B – Haubt, G Germany 1981. 8...d5!N
9.exd5 [9.Bf2 Bg4 10.0-0 dxe4 11.dxe4 Nd4³] 9...Nxd5 10.Nxd5 Qxd5 11.0-0 Qb5³
8...Bg4 9.h3 Bxf3 10.Qxf3
This was seen (via a different move order) in Nguyen, P – Shirov, A Roquetas de Mar 2019.
57
Position after: 10.Qxf3
10...Nd4
introducing a piece to the attack and supporting the advance of the pawn on the f-file.
11.Qd1
We are following the game Rendle, T – Harvey, M London 2019.
11...exf4N 12.gxf4
12.Bxf4 b5=
12...f5=
58
Position after: 12...f5=
And Black seems to have a comfortable position where the security of our king is superior. Now, the plan
is to finish developing with ...Qd7 and ...Rae8.
b) 3.Nf3
1.e4 d6 2.Nc3 e5 3.Nf3
3...Nf6 4.Bc4
4.g3 is a very harmless line. 4...c5! gaining more space and more control of the center. 5.Bg2 g6 6.0-0 Bg7
7.d3 0-0
59
A) 8.Nd2 transferring the knight via the queenside to the e3-square. 8...Nc6 9.Nc4 Be6 10.Bg5 h6
11.Bxf6 Bxf6 12.Ne3 Bg7= As in the game Triapishko, O – Mamedov, R Minsk 2015.
Position after: 12...Bg7=
Although there is equality, I think that the position is easier to play as Black thanks to the bishop pair.
B) 8.h3 Nc6 9.Be3 Nd4 10.Kh2 b5
11.Bxd4 The critical move – White is going to win a pawn. [11.a3 as tried in Smyslov, V – Moiseev, O
Moscow 1951. 11...Bb7N It is easier to play with the black pieces. The plan is ...d5 and ...Qd7] 11...cxd4
60
12.Nxb5 Qb6 However, Black has compensation for the pawn and will most likely recoup it. 13.a4 a6
14.Na3 Qxb2 15.Nc4 Qb8
Position after: 15...Qb8
Clearly, our opponent must try to play dynamically because the long-term outlook favors Black due to
the bishop pair. 16.Rb1 Qc7 17.Nxd4 is a good resource but we have a great reply. 17...d5!‚ With the
initiative.
4...Be7
5.d3
61
5.0-0 0-0 6.Re1 as in Nepomniachtchi, I – Cheparinov, I Poikovsky 2013. 6...Be6N Black should not fear
doubling their pawns by exchanging bishops, because doing so brings the f7-pawn closer to the center –
Black will gain great control. 7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.d4 exd4 9.Qxd4 Nc6 10.Qc4 Qd7!=
Position after: 10...Qd7!=
Although there is equality, the position is more comfortable for Black to play. The plan is to improve the
f6-knight, either by moving it to f4 via h5 or by moving it to e5 via g4.
5...Be6!
Position after: 5...Be6!
I like this idea for Black very much, who should not be afraid to double pawns: we gain more control of
the central squares and dominate the white knight on c3. It also manages to open up the f-file, along which
62
we can attack.
6.Bb3
A) 6.Bxe6 fxe6 7.d4 exd4 8.Nxd4 [8.Qxd4 Nc6 9.Qc4 d5=] 8...Qd7=
Position after: 8...Qd7=
And this position is easier to play as Black.

B) 6.0-0 0-0 7.Be3 [7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.d4 exd4 9.Nxd4 Qd7 10.Qe2 Nc6=] 7...Nc6=
Position after: 7...Nc6=
As in the game Tomazini, A – Tomazini, Z Rogaska Slatina 2009. We can continue with ...d5.
6...0-0 7.0-0 c5 8.Bg5 Nc6

63
9.Bxf6
Perhaps the best attempt for White is to gain more control over the d5-square. However, we have two
good bishops so we have nothing to fear.
9...Bxf6 10.Nd5 g6 11.c3 Bg7=
With a balanced position, although it is more straightforward to play as Black. We have a long-term
advantage thanks to the bishop pair and furthermore, we have the option of breaking through the kingside
with ...f5.
64
c) 3.Bc4
1.e4 d6 2.Nc3 e5 3.Bc4 Be6!
As we have seen in the subchapter with 3.Nf3, it is a very good idea for Black to provoke the exchange of
the bishop on this square, so as to double the pawns and thus gain more control of the central squares.
4.Bxe6
A) 4.d3 Nf6 5.Nge2 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.f4 Bxc4 8.dxc4 Nbd7 9.Ng3 Re8=
B) 4.Bb3 Nf6 5.f4 Nc6

65
B1) 6.Nf3 Nd4! to encourage the exchange of the bishop. 7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.d3 [8.fxe5 dxe5 9.d3 Bd6=]
8...Nxf3+ 9.Qxf3
Position after: 9.Qxf3
9...exf4 10.Bxf4 e5 11.Be3 Be7=

B2) 6.d3 exf4 7.Bxf4 Nd4 looking for the exchange. 8.Nf3 Nxb3 9.axb3 Be7 10.0-0 0-0 11.Nd4 is
White’s best option. 11...d5! Hitting the center. 12.Nxe6 fxe6 13.e5 Nd7
Position after: 13...Nd7
And the position looks comfortable for Black. 14.Qg4 Bc5+ 15.Kh1 Qe7 16.Rf3 Bb6=
4...fxe6
66
Position after: 4...fxe6
5.d4
The best move.

A) 5.Nge2 as tried in Jovanovic, Z – Rukavina, J Sibenik 2015. 5...c5N achieving great control of the
central squares. 6.0-0 Nf6 7.d3 Nc6 8.f4 Be7
9.f5 exf5 10.Rxf5 0-0=

B) 5.Nf3 c5 6.d3 Nf6 7.0-0 Nc6 8.Ne2 Be7 9.c3 0-0 10.Ng3 d5 11.Re1
67
Position after: 11.Re1
As was seen in Kupreichik, V – Batricevic, S Nis 1994. 11...Bd6N 12.a3 h6 13.b4 Qc7=
C) 5.d3 Nf6 6.f4 exf4 7.Bxf4 Be7 8.Nf3 0-0
Black has plenty of play because of the open file. 9.Qd2 [9.Qe2 was played in Siepelt, H – Chabanon, J
Germany 1999. 9...e5N 10.Be3 Qd7 11.0-0-0 c5 12.Rdf1 Nc6= And we have promising prospects of
attacking the enemy king on the queenside.] 9...Nc6 10.0-0 This was played in the game Nunn, J –
Rozentalis, E Hastings 1996. 10...d5N 11.e5 Nh5=
5...exd4 6.Qxd4 Nc6
68
Taking advantage of the fact that we can gain a tempo in development.
7.Qc4 Qd7 8.Nf3
We have reached the game Kargoll, H – Genkin, M Germany 2004. Now, Black has a very strong way to
continue.
8...0-0-0!N
Position after: 8...0-0-0!N
Looking for ...d5.
9.0-0
69
This is best.
9...d5 10.exd5 exd5 11.Qb3 Nf6 12.Bg5 Na5
In order to exchange queens, with a pleasant position.
13.Qb5 Qxb5 14.Nxb5 c6 15.Nbd4 Nc4=
Black has nothing to worry about in this balanced position. Here, we can develop the kingside pieces and
we will always have the e4-square to set up a strong knight.
d) 3.f4
1.e4 d6 2.Nc3 e5 3.f4
70
This is White’s most critical line, which brings us right into the King’s Gambit.
3...exf4 4.Nf3
A) 4.d4? is a terrible decision. 4...Qh4+ 5.Ke2 g5 6.Nf3 Qh5! The best square for the queen. 7.Kf2
Nf6! 8.h4 g4
9.Ng1 [9.e5 doesn’t solve White’s problems. 9...dxe5 10.Nxe5 Bh6 11.g3 Be6 12.Bxf4 Bxf4 13.gxf4
Nbd7 14.Bg2 0-0-0–+] 9...g3+ 10.Ke1 Qxd1+ 11.Kxd1 All this was played in the correspondence game
Kireev, V – Turko, S ICCF email 2009. 11...Bh6!N
71
Position after: 11...Bh6!N
The right move. The idea is to defend the f4-pawn and the knight is ready to occupy the g4-square.
12.Bd3 Nc6 13.Nge2 Ng4µ With a clear advantage.
B) 4.Bc4?! Nc6 5.Nf3 [5.d4 Qh4+ 6.Kf1 Bg4 7.Nf3 Bxf3 8.Qxf3 Nxd4µ] 5...g5 6.d4 [6.h4? g4 7.Ng5
Ne5! 8.Bb3 h6
Once we have captured the white knight, a few exchanges will take place that will favor us. 9.d4 hxg5
10.dxe5 dxe5 11.Bxf7+ Ke7 12.Qxd8+ Kxd8µ] 6...g4 7.0-0 gxf3 8.Qxf3 Qf6
72
Position after: 8...Qf6
White has much better development but that’s not sufficient to compensate for the sacrificed piece. 9.e5
dxe5 10.Nd5 Qd6 11.dxe5 as in Milosevic, M – Petrovic, B Belgrade 2017. 11...Qc5+!N Now, we can
win a piece. 12.Kh1 Qxc4 13.e6 [13.Nxc7+ Kd8 14.Nxa8 Be6–+] 13...Bxe6 14.Nxc7+ Kd7
Position after: 14...Kd7
15.Bxf4 [15.Nxa8 Nf6 16.Bxf4 Nd5–+] 15...Rd8–+ And after the king hides on c8, we have a decisive
advantage.
4...g5!
73
Position after: 4...g5!
Usually, it is best to defend a pawn with another pawn and this principle can be applied in this position.
The black f4-pawn is very annoying for White, and especially so for the bishop on c1 who cannot come
into play.
5.d4
The most critical line for White consists of sacrificing the knight on f3 in exchange for quick development
of pieces.
5.Bc4? g4 6.0-0 White decides to sacrifice the piece in exchange for development but it is not enough.
6...gxf3 7.Qxf3 Be6!
74
Once our development is complete, our advantage will be decisive. 8.Bxe6 fxe6 9.d4 As in the game
Neumann, M – Jendrian, M Kiel 1992. 9...Bg7N 10.Bxf4 Bxd4+ 11.Kh1 Ne7–+
5...g4
Obviously, Black has nothing to be afraid of and it is best to enter fully into the opponent’s plan, capture
the piece and then defend ourselves.
6.Bxf4 gxf3 7.Qxf3 Nc6!
Position after: 7...Nc6!
A critical position in this subchapter. White now has several options but by far the best is 8.Bb5.
8.Bb5!
A) 8.0-0-0? h5! 9.e5 Bg4 10.Qe4 Bh6–+ Morozevich, A – Aleksandrov, A Shenyang 2000
B) 8.Bc4? aims directly at the weak f7-pawn but in fact, this is a mistake. 8...Nxd4! No fear! 9.Bxf7+
Kxf7 10.Qh5+ Kg7
75
Position after: 10...Kg7
Now, White must choose the direction in which to castle.

B1) 11.0-0-0 Nf6!! As Black has two extra pieces, it is best to return one in exchange for development.
12.Qg5+ [12.Bh6+ Kg8 13.Qg5+ Kf7 14.Rxd4 Rg8 15.Qd2 Bxh6 16.Qxh6 Rg6–+] 12...Kf7 13.Rxd4
Rg8 14.Qh4
Position after: 14.Qh4
This position was reached in the correspondence game Chetvertakoff, V – Pinasco, D IECG email
2001. 14...Rg4!N An important move that leads to a decisive advantage. 15.Qf2 Qe7 16.Rf1 Kg8–+
B2) 11.0-0 Be6 12.Rad1 h6!! serves to control the g5-square and allows our king to go to h7.
76
Position after: 12...h6!!
13.Rxd4 Qe8 14.Qf3 Rh7! Another great move that serves to vacate the h8-square for the king, where
he will be very safe. 15.e5 Kh8 16.exd6 cxd6–+ Kutsak, Y – Sanner, Z ICCF email 2011.
8...Bd7
Position after: 8...Bd7
9.0-0-0
9.Bxc6? A poor decision. 9...bxc6 10.0-0 Bg7 11.Rad1 h5µ And White has no compensation for the piece
as we can see in the game between the engines Lc0 – Stockfish TCEC chess.com 2020.
9...Qh4!
77
Position after: 9...Qh4!
An important move to try to exchange the dark-squared bishops from h6.
10.Kb1
10.g3 Qg4 11.Qe3 This was essayed in Zelbel, P – Iwanow, A Pula 2012. 11...Nge7! Our aim is to castle
but first, the central files have to be well-covered. 12.Bg5 f6! 13.Bxf6 Qg6 An important move. 14.Bg5
a6 15.Nd5 0-0-0µ
Position after: 15...0-0-0µ
10...0-0-0 11.d5 Nb8
78
Position after: 11...Nb8
12.Rd4!
A strong move by White which is clearly the best option.

12.Bxd7+?! It’s not enough. 12...Nxd7 13.Nb5 a6 14.Nxc7 The best for White, based on a double attack
from c3 but it is insufficient. 14...Kxc7 15.Qc3+ Kb8 16.Qxh8 Qxf4 17.Qxg8 Ne5! 18.Qxh7 Qf2µ
Position after: 18...Qf2µ
And the position is much more comfortable to play as Black because we have two minor pieces against
the rook; furthermore, one of them is a wonderful knight in the center.
12...a6 13.Be2 Bg7
79
White must play forcefully.
14.e5!
14.Rb4?? Bxc3 15.bxc3 a5 only makes things worse.
14...dxe5 15.Bxe5 Qh6! 16.Bf4 Bxd4!
It is best for Black to give up the queen in exchange for one rook and two minor pieces.
17.Bxh6 Nxh6
Position after: 17...Nxh6
80
18.Rd1!
A) 18.Ne4? Bg4 19.Qd3 Rxd5 20.Bxg4+ Nxg4 21.c3 f5µ

B) 18.Bd3? Ng4 19.h3 Ne5 20.Qf6 Rde8µ
18...Be5
19.d6!
and we have reached the game between the engines Stockfish – Lc0 TCEC chess.com 2020.
19.Qe3? The double attack doesn’t work. 19...Rhe8 20.Qxh6 Bxc3 21.Bh5 Be5 22.Bxf7 Re7 23.Rf1 b6µ
And we have a clear advantage.
19...Bxd6N
I think this is the best choice.

Now, White has to play very precisely in order to fight for equality.
20.Rxd6! cxd6 21.Qf6 Nf5 22.g4! Ne3 23.Ne4!
This is a good move, putting pressure on our king.
23...Bxg4
81
Position after: 23...Bxg4
24.Bxg4+
24.Qc3+ seems possible too. 24...Nc6 25.Qxe3 Bxe2 26.Qxe2 f5 27.Nf6 Ne5= Although there is
equality, I find it more comfortable to play the position as Black.
24...Nxg4 25.Qf5+ Kc7 26.Qxg4 Rhg8 27.Qd1 Nc6=
The position is easier to play for Black.
82
The move 2.Nc3 is a very common alternative to the main move 2.d4. There is no doubt that it is a very
serious option that deserves a great deal of attention if we wish to avoid the risk of staying in an inferior
position.
I have highlighted important moves which we have analyzed in the 3.Nf3 and 3.Bc4 subchapters. There is
a maneuver by Black that is repeated and offers the exchange of bishops on e6, which also involves the
doubling of pawns. This structure is usually good for Black because it allows us to dominate the whole
center and at the same time, we gain very active play thanks to the opening of f-file.
As in the previous chapter, the most critical line relates to White playing f4, as we see in the subchapter
3.f4. In this case, I think that once again, the best option would be for Black to capture the pawn and
transpose to the King’s Gambit. By doing so, we can fight for an advantage and it is White who always
has to be very careful not to stray from the main line. Additionally, White has to remember very difficult
moves if they wish to avoid collapsing.
83
Chapter 3
3.Nd2 and 3.Bd3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6
Chapter Guide
Chapter 3 – 3.Nd2 and 3.Bd3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6

a) 3.Nd2
b) 3.Bd3 e5 – Various 4th Moves
c) 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.exd5
d) 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5 Nxe4 – Various 6th Moves
e) 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5 Nxe4 6.Nf3 with 9.Re1
f) 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5 Nxe4 6.Nf3 with 9.Nbd2
a) 3.Nd2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nd2
84
Position after: 3.Nd2
This move is not a very common choice. White’s idea is to hold the central d4-pawn with c3, which is a
sensible idea. However, we can see that this is not the most orthodox way to develop, as the knight
obstructs the bishop.
3...e5 4.c3
The best way to play.

A) 4.dxe5 doesn’t seem to get Black into trouble. 4...dxe5 5.Ngf3 Bc5
Position after: 5...Bc5
Now, the advantage for us is that the dark-squared bishop has more space to move. 6.Bc4 [6.Nxe5?? is a
terrible move. We can take on f2. 6...Bxf2+ 7.Kxf2 Qd4+ 8.Ke1 Qxe5µ] 6...0-0 7.0-0 Qe7 8.c3 a5 To
85
stop White expanding on the queenside. 9.a4 Nbd7=
Position after: 9...Nbd7=
And Black has no problems in this position which was reached in the game Gocheva, R – Georgiev, V
Plovdiv 2011.
B) 4.Ngf3 If White decides to play without 4.c3, it is best for us is to take on d4. 4...exd4! 5.Nxd4 Be7
6.Bd3 is the most natural way to play.
Position after: 6.Bd3
6...0-0 7.0-0 c5! 8.Ne2 as in the game Singh, D – Roy Chowdhury, S Dharamshala 2014. Here, we have
a strong move. 8...d5!N 9.c3 Nc6=
4...Be7
86
5.Ngf3
A) 5.Bc4?! A natural but dubious decision for a tactical reason. 5...exd4 6.cxd4 Nxe4!
7.Bxf7+ [7.Nxe4 d5 8.Bd3 dxe4 9.Bxe4 Bb4+ 10.Bd2 Qe7 with a better pawn structure for Black.]
7...Kxf7 8.Nxe4 Rf8 9.Nf3 Kg8= And the position is more comfortable to play as Black thanks to the
bishop pair, better pawn structure and greater piece activity.
B) 5.Bd3 0-0 6.Ne2 Nbd7 7.0-0 Re8!
87
Position after: 7...Re8!
In this type of structure, a standard maneuver for Black is to put the rook on e8 and the bishop at f8, in
order to exert pressure on e4. The f8-bishop can then be developed via g7. 8.f4 [8.Ng3 occurred in
Simonsen, O – Nielsen, H Faroe Islands 2019: 8...d5!N and Black dynamites the center to activate all
their pieces, with a pleasant position.] 8...c5! The best reaction. 9.fxe5 dxe5 10.d5 Ng4!
Position after: 10...Ng4!
Trying to take advantage of the weak squares in White’s territory. 11.Qe1! [11.Nf3? is the natural move
but now, Black has a way to take advantage thanks to the weakness of the king. 11...c4! Opening up the
g1-a7 diagonal. 12.Bxc4 Ndf6! 13.Bd3 Qb6+ 14.Kh1 Nf2+ 15.Rxf2 Qxf2³] 11...Bh4 12.g3 Bg5= And
we have nothing to worry about in this position.
5...exd4
88
Position after: 5...exd4
6.cxd4
6.Nxd4 Capturing in this way on d4 doesn’t give Black any trouble. 6...0-0 7.Bd3 Re8! 8.0-0 Bf8
Positioning the rook to press upon the central pawn. 9.Re1 Nbd7 10.a4 c5! 11.N4f3 b6
The light-squared bishop is much more useful on the long diagonal h1-a8, inflicting even more pressure
on the central e4-pawn. 12.Nf1 Bb7 13.Ng3 Qc7= And the position is more comfortable to play for us.
Now, one idea is to play ...c4 and ...Nc5.
6...d5 7.e5
and we have reached the position from the game Lopez Martinez, J – Narciso Dublan, M Montcada 2015.
89
7...Nfd7!N
Position after: 7...Nfd7!N
The best retreat. Until now, Black had always jumped with the knight to e4. The idea of 7...Nfd7 is to
support ...c5.
8.Bd3
A) 8.Nb3 An attempt to prevent Black’s idea of ...c5. 8...a5! trying to take advantage of the poor position
of the b3-knight. 9.a4 Nc6 The moves a4-a5 have clearly benefited us because we have managed to
weaken the b4 square and can now establish a knight there. 10.Be2 0-0 11.0-0 f6
Position after: 11...f6
90
Attacking the center to gain more space for the pieces. 12.exf6 Nxf6 13.Ne5 Bd6 14.f4 Nb4= With
equality. Black’s knights have strong squares on which to settle such as b4 and e4.
B) 8.Nb1 c5 Pressing the center. 9.Nc3 Nc6!
An important move to exploit the fact that it is not dangerous for us if White decides to take the d5-
pawn. 10.Be3 [10.Nxd5?! cxd4 11.Bc4 Ndxe5 12.Nxe5 Nxe5 13.Bb5+ Nc6=; 10.dxc5 0-0! The
development and the security of the our king is paramount. 11.Bf4 Nxc5 12.Nxd5 Be6 13.Nxe7+ Qxe7
14.Be2 Rad8© and Black has decent compensation for the pawn] 10...0-0 11.Be2 A critical moment.
Black has a fantastic move at this point: 11...Ndxe5!! 12.Nxe5 Nxe5 13.dxe5 d4 recovering the piece.
14.Bd2 dxc3 15.Bxc3 Be6=
8...c5 9.0-0 Nc6
91
10.Re1
10.h3 doesn’t seem particularly dangerous for Black. 10...0-0! 11.dxc5 Ndxe5 12.Nxe5 Nxe5
Position after: 12...Nxe5
13.Bxh7+ Kxh7 14.Qh5+ Kg8 15.Qxe5 Bxc5= Black has nothing to fear, thanks to the bishop pair.
10...0-0 11.h3 a5!
Gaining space on the queenside and avoiding the possible threat of Nb3. Once the kingside is under
control, our plan is to mobilize our forces on the queenside.
12.Bc2 Qb6=
92
Position after: 12...Qb6=
b) 3.Bd3 e5 – Various 4th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Bd3
Although this option has not been used as much as other alternatives, I must admit that I personally have
had to face it many times, especially in blitz and rapid games. This means that it is worth investing time to
study how we should respond to it.
3...e5
Now, White has several possible alternatives to the main option 4.c3, which we will discuss in the
following subchapters.
4.Nf3
A) 4.Ne2 doesn’t look dangerous because it doesn’t attack the center. 4...Nc6 5.c3 [5.d5 Nb4 and we
will able to eliminate White’s bishop pair.] 5...d5! 6.exd5 Nxd5=
B) 4.dxe5 Usually, this capture on e5 does not land Black in trouble because the f8-bishop now has much
more space. 4...dxe5 5.Nf3 Bc5! The most active square for the bishop. 6.0-0 Qe7 7.Bg5 h6 Always a
useful move. 8.Bh4 Bg4 9.h3 Bh5 10.Nbd2 Nbd7= We have arrived at the game Zozulia, A – Grischuk,
A Calatrava 2007.
93
Position after: 10...Nbd7=
It is clear that Black has no problems in this position, because we have managed to develop our pieces
harmoniously.
C) 4.d5 closes the center but this is not a problem for us. 4...Nbd7 Trying to capitalize on the fact that
White has loosened the c5-square. 5.c4 Nc5 6.Nc3 Nxd3+ 7.Qxd3 Be7
Even though White has more space, Black has nothing to worry about. We have the bishop pair and have
managed to exchange one minor piece. 8.Nge2 0-0 9.Ng3 Nd7 10.Be3 Reaching the game Wagner, R –
Casper, T Germany 2018. Here, we have an strong response: 10...Bg5!N – the dark-squared bishop is the
worse of the two so Black exchanges it. 11.0-0 b6 to stop White expanding on the queenside. 12.Qd2
Bxe3 13.Qxe3 a5 14.b3 Nc5=
94
And the position appears balanced. Now, one of Black’s ideas is to play ...f5.
4...Bg4
Exerting pressure on the center.
5.c3
5.dxe5 If White decides to take on e5, we don’t have any problem. 5...dxe5 6.h3 Bh5 7.g4 The most
critical move. [7.0-0 Nbd7 8.Nbd2 Bd6= with no issues for Black as we saw in Le Quang, L –
Mamedyarov, S Dubai 2014.] 7...Bg6 8.Nxe5 Bxe4
95
Position after: 8...Bxe4
Black is well-prepared for the exchanges. 9.Bxe4 Qxd1+ 10.Kxd1 Nxe4 11.Nd3 Nd6 12.Re1+ Kd7
13.Nc3 Nc6= This was seen in the game Ivanov, S – Leon Hoyos, M Cappelle la Grande 2006.
5...Nbd7 6.0-0 Be7 7.Re1 0-0
Black has managed to develop all their pieces harmoniously.
8.Nbd2
8.Bg5 h6 9.Bh4 Nh7= Hiebert, K – Short, N Cha-Am 2018.
96
8...c6 9.h3 Bh5
10.Nf1
A standard knight maneuver that is very typical in many lines of the Spanish Opening.
10.a4 a5! stops White’s expansion on the queenside. 11.b3 Qc7 12.Bb2 Rfe8 is the standard maneuver to
introduce the rook into the game. 13.Nf1 Bf8 14.Ng3 Bg6 15.Nh4 d5=
Position after: 15...d5=
As in the game Kamsky, G – Pridorozhni, A Khanty-Mansiysk 2013. We have managed to break through
in the center and we have all our pieces well-placed.
97
10...Re8 11.Ng3 Bg6 12.Qc2 Bf8=
This balanced position was reached in Sonis, F – Krasenkow, M Porticcio 2019. Black has achieved good
squares for his four minor pieces. Now, a possible idea would be to play ...Qc7, ...Rad8 and ...d5.
c) 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.exd5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3
Position after: 4.c3
This is White’s main move in this position and the best answer to Black’s central attack.
4...d5!
98
It is best for Black to react like this. Now, the best reply for White is 5.dxe5, a move that we will discuss
in the following subchapters. Let’s look at two other less common options.
5.exd5
5.Bg5 This move doesn’t create any problems for Black. 5...dxe4! 6.Bxe4 Be7
Now, White is faced with a dilemma: to hand over the bishop pair or to keep an isolated pawn on d4.
7.Bxf6 I think this is the best option. 7...Bxf6 The position is already more comfortable to play with the
black pieces due to the bishop pair. 8.dxe5 Qxd1+ 9.Kxd1 Bxe5 10.Nf3 Bf6= And we have reached
Salem, A – Shevchenko, K Biel 2017. Although there is equality, I believe that the position is easier to
play as Black.
Position after: 5.exd5

99
5...Qxd5
The best way to capture. White has to be careful.
6.dxe5!
6.Nf3?? is a terrible move: 6...e4! 7.Qe2 Be7 8.c4 exf3–+ and Black wins a piece.
6...Qxg2 7.Qf3 Qxf3 8.Nxf3
And we have arrived at the game Cruz Gomez, I – Iruzubieta Villaluenga, J Santa Cruz de la Palma 2018.
Position after: 8.Nxf3
The position appears more pleasant for Black thanks to the better pawn structure.
8...Nfd7!N
The idea is to establish the knight on c5 and, at the same time, attack the e5-pawn.
9.Bf4 Nc5 10.Bc2 Nc6 11.Nbd2 Bg4 12.Rg1 Bh5³
100
Position after: 12...Bh5³
Black has an advantageous position due to the bishop pair and better pawn structure.
d) 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5 Nxe4 – Various 6th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5
The main line and White’s best option.
5...Nxe4
101
The main move is 6.Nf3 which we will analyze later. At this point, we will look at other options for White
and how to deal with them.
6.Bxe4
One of the critical moves and one I’ve had to face several times.
A) 6.Qe2 This move has been made several times, as in the game Feuerstack, A – Carlstedt, J Lueneburg
2014. Now, the main line for Black is 6...Nc5 but I believe it is better not to remove the knight.
6...Bc5!N
Position after: 6...Bc5!N
The quick development of our pieces should be prioritized. 7.Bxe4 dxe4 8.Qxe4 Be6! Threatening
...Bd5. 9.Nf3 [9.Qxb7? Bd5 (9...0-0 is also possible.) 10.Qb5+ Bc6 11.Qxc5 Bxg2µ] 9...Nc6 10.0-0
Qd5 11.Qxd5 Bxd5 12.Nbd2 0-0-0© And Black has good compensation for the pawn.
102
Position after: 12...0-0-0©
We have the bishop pair, greater development and it is easy to attack the e5-pawn, so it is possible to
recoup it.
B) 6.Nd2 Nc5!
B1) 7.Bc2 Now that the bishop is on c2, we can play 7...d4! with the idea of ...d3. 8.Nb3 d3 9.Bb1 Nc6
10.Nf3 Bg4
And Black is completing the development of their pieces in the best possible way with a strong pawn
on d3. 11.Nxc5 Bxc5 12.Bxd3 Qd5=
B2) 7.Bb1 as essayed in Bologan, V – Zvjaginsev, V Moscow 2017. 7...d4!N Once again an important
pawn move.
103
8.Ne4 [8.cxd4 Qxd4 9.Qe2 Qa4 10.Ngf3 Bd7³ Black seems to have the advantage. Our opponent’s
king is not going to castle because of the threat of ...Bb5.] 8...Nc6 9.Nf3 dxc3! 10.Qxd8+ Nxd8
11.Nxc3 Bg4= With a balanced position.
6...dxe4
Position after: 6...dxe4
7.Qxd8+
The best move.

7.Qa4+? White can win the e4-pawn but we will gain substantial activity. 7...Bd7! To transfer to c6.
8.Qxe4 Bc6 9.Qg4 h5 10.Qh3 g5!
104
In exchange for the pawn, Black has managed to bring the bishop to c6 which is on its best diagonal and
has managed to leave almost no space for the white queen, who has to keep an eye on the defense of the
g2-pawn. [10...Qd7!? is also possible.] 11.Ne2 g4 12.Qg3 As tried in Poza, J – Moon, B Orlando 2014.
12...Qd5N 13.0-0 Nd7µ And we have a clear advantage.
Position after: 13...Nd7µ
The e5-pawn is very likely to be captured and then Black prepares to castle long and attack on the
kingside.
7...Kxd8
Position after: 7...Kxd8
105
Here, White has several options.
8.Bf4
A) 8.Bg5+?! In my opinion, this move is one of the least problematic for Black. 8...Be7 9.Bxe7+ Kxe7
10.Nd2 Nc6 11.Nxe4 Nxe5 12.Rd1 Be6µ as in the game Rabiega, R – Bacrot, E Germany 2010.
Position after: 12...Be6µ
The position is clearly advantageous for Black because of the better coordination of our pieces in the
endgame.
B) 8.Ne2 Nd7 9.e6! is the right way for White to play. 9...fxe6 10.Ng3 Nc5 11.0-0 b6= Krektun, D –
Oleksienko, M Alushta 2006.
Position after: 11...b6=
106
Even if Black has doubled pawns, it is one extra pawn and we have the bishop pair. Added to that is the
fact that our light-squared bishop has good diagonals and the knight has a good square on d3, so Black
has nothing to worry about.
C) 8.Nd2 Nc6 9.Nxe4 Nxe5 10.Bg5+ Nijboer, F – Cifuentes Parada, R Wijk aan Zee 1995. 10...Kd7!N
Position after: 10...Kd7!N
I believe that this is the best way to play. The king will be very safe on c6 and then our plan is ...b6 and
...Kb7. 11.0-0-0+ Kc6 12.Ne2 threatening Nd4+. 12...b6= Although there is equality, as soon as Black
manages to stabilize their position, we will have a more comfortable position thanks to the bishop pair.
8...Nd7 9.Ne2 Nc5 10.0-0 Nd3³
Position after: 10...Nd3³
107
As played in Proehl, H – Berelowitsch, A Berlin 1994. Black’s position is more pleasant due to the strong
knight on d3 and the bishop pair.
e) 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5 Nxe4 6.Nf3 with 9.Re1
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5 Nxe4 6.Nf3
The main line and the best for White.
6...Nc5 7.Bc2 Bg4
The best way to develop our pieces.
8.0-0
8.h3 Bh5 9.0-0 Nc6 10.Qe2N The best move for White. [10.Re1 d4 transposes to the main line 8.0-0.]
10...Ne6 11.Rd1 Bc5 The correct square for the bishop.
108
12.b4 Bb6 13.a4 a5 14.b5 Bxf3! An important move to take advantage of the fact that the c6-knight
attacks White’s central pawn. 15.Qxf3 [15.gxf3 Nb8! It is better to move to b8 than e7 because then, our
queen is able to transfer quickly to the kingside. 16.f4 Qh4 17.Qf3 g5!ƒ with a great attack.] 15...Nxe5
16.Qxd5 Qf6=
Position after: 16...Qf6=
And after castling short, Black’s position is much more comfortable thanks to the great development of
our pieces.
8...Nc6 9.Re1
109
An interesting alternative to the main move 9.Nbd2 that we will see later.
9...d4!
Threatening ...d3.
10.h3
This was seen in Rabiega, R – Meister, J Germany 2012.

10.b4 d3 11.Bb3 Nxb3 12.axb3 Qd5=
10...Bh5!N
110
Position after: 10...Bh5!N
If we look closely at the position, we can appreciate some similarity with the Open Variation of the
Spanish Opening.
In the aforementioned game, Black played 10...d3 but it’s not the optimal time to do so yet; it is better to
remove the bishop.
11.g4
The most powerful line.

A) 11.e6 is not dangerous for us. 11...Nxe6 12.g4 Bg6 13.Bxg6 hxg6 14.cxd4 Bb4 15.Nc3 Qd6!
Position after: 15...Qd6!
16.Bg5 [16.d5? Bxc3 17.bxc3 0-0-0µ] 16...0-0= Black’s position is easier to play thanks to the better
pawn structure and safer king.
B) 11.b4 d3! An essential move that we have to make when our opponent attempts to push out the
knight.
111
Position after: 11...d3!
12.Bb3 Nxb3 13.axb3 Qd5! Exerting pressure on f3 with the idea to improve our knight by taking it to
e6. 14.g4 Bg6 15.b5 Nd8! 16.c4 Qd7 17.Nc3 Ne6 18.Nd5 Bc5 19.b4 c6!= and we don’t have any
problems.
Position after: 19...c6!=
C) 11.Bf5 doesn’t seem to land Black in trouble either. 11...dxc3 12.Nxc3 Bxf3! 13.gxf3 Nd4 14.Be4
Qd7 Attacking the h3-pawn and now, our idea is to castle long.
112
Position after: 14...Qd7
15.Bd5! Nf5 16.b4 c6= And Black’s position is straightforward to play. Once we castle long, the attack
on the kingside can be powerful.
11...d3! 12.Bb3
12.Ba4 Nxa4 13.Qxa4 Bg6=
12...Bg6 13.e6 fxe6
14.Bc4
113
14.Bxe6?! looks natural but we have an excellent reply. 14...Nxe6 15.Ng5 Kd7!!
Position after: 15...Kd7!!
A brilliant move: our d3-pawn defends our king very well. 16.Rxe6 [16.Nxe6? Qf6µ] 16...Bc5³ And once
the king takes cover on c8, we be able to attack freely on the kingside.
14...Be7 15.b4 Ne4 16.b5 Na5 17.Bxd3 0-0
It looks easier to play as Black because our king is clearly safer and we have substantial counterplay on
the f-file.
18.Qe2 Ng5
114
18...Qxd3!? 19.Qxd3 Ng5= and the best option for White is to surrender back the queen.
19.Bxg5 Qxd3=
Position after: 19...Qxd3=
With an equal position but Black’s position is probably more comfortable.
f) 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5 Nxe4 6.Nf3 with 9.Nbd2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Bd3 e5 4.c3 d5 5.dxe5 Nxe4 6.Nf3 Nc5 7.Bc2 Bg4 8.0-0 Nc6 9.Nbd2
This is the best move for White.
9...d4!
115
10.h3
A) 10.Qe1 This position was reached in Slobodjan, R – Beliavsky, A Germany 2000. The French
Grandmaster Christian Bauer, in his book “The Philidor Files”, gives this move an exclamation mark.
10...Be7! My recommendation is to castle as soon as possible. 11.h3 is the best try. [11.Nxd4 Nxd4
12.cxd4 Qxd4 13.Nb3 as played in Larsen, K – Svedberg, H Helsingor 2013. 13...Qc4N with an easier
position to play for Black] 11...Bh5 12.cxd4 Nxd4 13.Nxd4 Qxd4 Our pieces are wonderfully active.
14.Ne4 [14.Nb3 Qc4 15.Be3!? Qxc2! 16.Rc1 Qg6 17.Bxc5 Bxc5 18.Nxc5 Bf3=] 14...0-0 15.Qc3 Qxc3
16.Nxc3 Bg6= With an equal position.
B) 10.Re1 Be7
116
B1) 11.Nb3?! Now, we can exchange a lot of pieces. 11...dxc3 12.Qe2 Nxb3 13.Bxb3 Nd4 14.Qe4
Bxf3 15.gxf3 Nxb3 16.axb3 cxb2 17.Bxb2 Qd2 18.e6! The best way to play for White. 18...0-0³
B2) 11.Ne4 as in the game Cori Tello, J – Valdes Romero, L Barcelona 2013. 11...dxc3!N 12.Nxc3
Qxd1 13.Rxd1 Nd7 14.Nd5 0-0-0= And Black’s position is more pleasant because the e5-pawn can be
vulnerable.
B3) 11.h3 Bh5
Now, White has several options but none are dangerous for us as Black.
B3.1) 12.g4? Bg6 13.cxd4 Nxd4 14.Bxg6 hxg6 15.Ne4 as played in Mrdja, M – Mitkov, N Nice
2003. 15...Rxh3!N
117
Position after: 15...Rxh3!N
This is a great move. 16.Qxd4 [16.Nxd4 Rd3! is the key move. 17.Qe2 Qxd4 18.Nxc5 Bxc5 19.Be3
Rxe3! 20.fxe3 Qxe5 21.Qh2 Qe6µ] 16...Rxf3 17.Nd6+ cxd6 18.exd6 Rd3! Once again this rook
move is key. 19.Qxc5 Qxd6µ
B3.2) 12.Ne4 dxc3 13.Nxc5 Qxd1 14.Rxd1 Bxc5=
B3.3) 12.Nb3 dxc3 13.bxc3 Qxd1
14.Rxd1 [14.Bxd1?? is a terrible decision. 14...Nd3 15.Re3 as in the internet game Arjun, K –
Bosiocic, M chess.com 2020. 15...0-0-0!µ with a decisive advantage.] 14...Bg6= With an equal
position.
10...Bh5 11.Nb3 dxc3
118
Position after: 11...dxc3
12.Qe2N
The best move for White and a decent improvement.

12.bxc3 Qxd1 13.Rxd1 Bg6 14.Bxg6 hxg6 and Black has the better pawn structure. 15.Nbd4 Nd8
It is best not to exchange knights – that would only benefit our opponent. 16.Rb1 a6 17.Bg5 Be7= This
was Cao, S – Chernin, A Hungary 2002. The position is easier to play as Black.
12...Nxb3 13.Bxb3 Nd4!
119
Position after: 13...Nd4!
An important move to simplify the position.
14.Bxf7+
The best decision for White.

14.Qe4 Bxf3 15.gxf3 Nxb3 16.axb3 cxb2 17.Bxb2 Bc5
We have the better pawn structure. Our only concern is that we have our king on e8 and we’re behind in
development. 18.Rad1 Qe7 19.Qxb7 0-0= With equality, even though it is possibly easier to play as Black.
14...Bxf7 15.Nxd4 Qxd4 16.e6! 0-0-0!
120
It is best to return the piece.
17.exf7 Qf6 18.bxc3 Qxf7 19.Be3 a6 20.Rab1 Bd6
The position is totally balanced. White does not seem to have much of an attack on the queenside and, in
the long term, Black’s pawn structure is superior.
21.c4
21.Qg4+!? An interesting move that involves a rook sacrifice. 21...Rd7 22.Rxb7 Kxb7 23.Qe4+
121
Position after: 23.Qe4+
23...c6 24.Rb1+ Kc7! In fact, Black has nothing to worry about here. White must follow a forced
sequence of moves to avoid an imminent collapse. 25.Bb6+ Kb7 26.Ba5+ Ka7! 27.Qxc6 Rb7 to exchange
rooks. 28.Rxb7+ Qxb7 29.Qxd6© White has compensation but we have nothing to fear. Once our king is
placed on a8, White will have no checks and it will be time to bring the rook into play.
21...Qf5!
Position after: 21...Qf5!
Threatening ...Qe5.
22.c5!
122
Preventing our idea.
22...Bxc5 23.Bxc5 Qxc5 24.Qe6+ Kb8 25.Qxa6 Qd5=
With an equal position. Now, our plan is to play ...Rd6.
Among White’s alternatives on move 3, both 3.Nd2 and 3.Bd3 are two options that we have not seen very
often at elite level, but nonetheless, they are very reasonable moves worthy of attention.
As we have seen, 3.Nd2 seeks to defend the pawn on d4 by means of another pawn (c3), which I believe
is a sensible idea. The only drawback is that the knight on d2 obstructs its own pieces and this makes it
easy for Black to equalize. Once we have played 3...e5, I believe the best idea is to continue by taking on
d4 and then look for a way to break the center with ...d5.
3.Bd3 seems more complex than 3.Nd2 and we must study it well because it can be poisonous.
Furthermore, it is an alternative that is more frequently seen in practice. Our answer is the same here:
3...e5 and after 4.c3 (the best way to play as White), 4...d5 is a great move – once our opponent takes on
e5, our knight will capture the e4-pawn. With this maneuver, we will reach a similar position to that which
is found in the Open Variation of the Spanish Opening.
In any case, in all these lines, Black generally achieves good positions thanks to the superiority of their
pawn structure.
123
Chapter 4
3.f3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.f3
Chapter Guide
Chapter 4 – 3.f3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.f3 e5

a) 4.Ne2 with 8.Nb3
b) 4.Ne2 with 8.Nb5
c) 4.d5 Be7 5.c4
d) 4.d5 Be7 5.Be3
e) 4.dxe5
a) 4.Ne2 with 8.Nb3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.f3
124
This is an alternative to 3.Nc3 that I think is very serious. One of White’s ideas is to continue with Be3
and quickly developing the queenside in order to castle long, followed by launching an attack on the
kingside with g4 and h4. Another way to play is with c4, attaining the “Maroczy” pawn structure. Finally,
yet another idea is to wait for Black to answer with 3...e5, then take the pawn and exchange queens while
still having the knight on b1.
3...e5!
Of course, against 3.f3 we can also use the Philidor Defense. No fear!
4.Ne2
This is the third most used line, after 4.d5 and the main line which is 4.dxe5. This option does not make it
difficult for Black, who has a very energetic way forward.
4...exd4
It is simply best to take it. It may seem an odd choice because it allows the knight on e2, which is badly
placed, to move closer to the center but there is a good reason.
5.Nxd4 d5!
The key.
6.e5 Nh5
125
Position after: 6...Nh5
Although the knight seems to be badly placed, it actually has no major difficulties coming into play. Now,
our idea is ...Qh4+ and then the knight can be cycled via g7 to f5 or e6.
7.g3
An indispensable move.
7.Be3? The idea is to protect against the check on h4 with Bf2. However, Black can expand in the center.
7...c5! 8.Bb5+ Bd7 9.Bxd7+ Qxd7 10.Nb3 d4 11.Bc1 Getting the f4-square under control. 11...g6³
Position after: 11...g6³
Now, the knight on h5 can be recycled and Black has more comfortable play thanks to their space
advantage.
126
7...c5
8.Nb3
This has been played in several games, for example in Tomczak, J – Lubcynski, R Poronin 2016. The best
option for White is 8.Nb5, which we will see in the next subchapter.
8.Bb5+?! This check only helps us to develop. 8...Bd7 9.Bxd7+ Qxd7 10.Ne2 f5 11.f4 g6³ And I find the
position easier to play as Black.
Now, one feasible plan is to prepare to castle long and then improve the h5-knight, by bringing it to e6.
127
8...Nc6!N
Position after: 8...Nc6!N
The best move.

Until now, 8...c4 had always been played in order to quickly develop the bishop to c5. However, this
allows White’s knight to return to the center.
9.f4
A) 9.Bb5 a6! Forcing an exchange. 10.Bxc6+ bxc6 11.c4 [11.Nc3 g6 12.0-0 Qb6³] 11...a5! 12.a4 Ba6
13.Na3 g6³
B) 9.Nc3 c4! Now seems to be the right time to play ...c4 because the knight on d4 is going to be
attacked. 10.Nd4 Bc5
128
B1) 11.Be3?! is the move that White would like to make but it would be at the cost of sacrificing a
pawn – I don’t believe they have sufficient compensation. 11...Nxe5 12.Bg2 0-0 13.Ne6! At least gets
the bishop pair. 13...Bxe6 14.Bxc5 Re8 15.0-0 Nf6µ And White has no real compensation for the
pawn.
B2) 11.Nxc6 is a sad necessity. 11...bxc6 12.Na4 Be7 13.Bg2 0-0 14.0-0 g6! Preparing to cycle the
knight. 15.Be3 Qc7 16.f4 Ng7=
Position after: 16...Ng7=
And although there is equality, Black’s position seems more comfortable. The idea is to gain a foothold
on the light squares by placing a bishop on f5 and a knight on e6. Furthermore, thanks to the pawns on
d5 and c6, the white bishop on g2 is very restricted.
9...g6
129
10.Nc3
10.Be2? A terrible decision. 10...c4! 11.Nd4 Qb6! This move puts all the pieces to work. It’s not
important that White can take our knight on h5. In return, we’ll obtain a substantial amount of counterplay
and the bishop pair. 12.Nxc6 bxc6 13.Bxh5 gxh5 14.Qxh5 Rg8µ
Position after: 14...Rg8µ
Now, Black is threatening to take control of the light squares with ...Bg4, so Black has a clear advantage.
10...Be6 11.Bg2 c4! 12.Nd4 Qb6 13.Be3 Bc5
Black’s pieces are tremendously active.
130
All that remains is to relocate our knight that is on the rim.
14.Nxe6 fxe6 15.Bxc5 Qxc5=
With an equal position but it is easier for us to play, thanks to Black’s capacity to mobilize their pawns in
the center.
b) 4.Ne2 with 8.Nb5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.f3 e5 4.Ne2 exd4 5.Nxd4 d5 6.e5 Nh5 7.g3 c5 8.Nb5
Position after: 8.Nb5
131
The best knight move. Now, Black must play energetically.
8...d4!
taking away the c3-square from the white knights. White’s best attempt to fight for an advantage seems to
be
9.Qe2
A) 9.c4? A poor decision. It fixes Black’s structure but removes the possibility of taking a piece to this
square, for example the bishop. 9...a6 to misplace the knight. 10.N5a3 Nc6 11.f4 g6 12.Bg2 Be7 13.0-0
Ng7µ
Position after: 13...Ng7µ
as in Vedder, R – Haslinger, S Hoogeveen 2009. Black has a clear advantage, thanks to greater space for
their pieces and the possibility of exploiting the light-squared weaknesses by installing pieces on them.
B) A better try is 9.f4 g6 10.Nd2 a6 11.Na3 Be7 12.Bg2 Ng7 13.0-0
132
Position after: 13.0-0
This was the correspondence game Novikov, A – Hechl, G ICCF email 2017. 13...h5!N The best way for
Black to play, gaining space on the kingside. Now, the f5-square will always be attainable for a piece,
usually the g7-knight. 14.Nac4 Nc6=
9...a6
10.Nd6+
The most critical move.

10.N5a3 g6 11.Bg2 b5! 12.f4 Ra7 13.0-0 Ng7= and Black doesn’t seem to have any problems in this
position.
133
10...Bxd6 11.exd6+ Kf8
Position after: 11...Kf8
We shouldn’t worry about moving the king because the queens are going to be exchanged on the e-file.
Besides, the d6-pawn is very likely to become a weakness.
12.Qe5 Qe8!
An important move.
13.Qxe8+ Kxe8
The d6-pawn is very weak.
14.Nd2 Nc6
134
15.Ne4
15.Nc4 Heading to the weak b6-square. 15...Be6 to develop the rook. 16.Nb6 Rd8 17.Na4! Rc8!
Position after: 17...Rc8!
Another important move. Now that we’ve placed our pieces properly, it’s time to go hunting for the pawn.
18.c4 [18.Nxc5?! is very dubious. 18...Nb4 19.Nxe6 Nxc2+ 20.Kd1 fxe6 21.Rb1 Nf6³] 18...Ne5 19.Kf2
Rc6= With a balanced position. The plan for us is to capture the pawn with the king.
15...b6 16.g4N
Definitely the best.
135
16.Bg2? as played in Galic, I – Jovanovic, Z Osijek 2015. 16...f5!N 17.Nf2 Be6µ
16...Nf6 17.Nxf6+ gxf6
The aim is to try to open up the h-file with ...h5.
18.Bh6 f5=
With equal possibilities for both, although the position is easier to play with the black pieces. White has a
bishop pair but has a worse pawn structure due to the weak d6-pawn. Black must continue with ...Be6 and
...Kd7.
c) 4.d5 Be7 5.c4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.f3 e5 4.d5
136
The second most popular choice for White. The aim is to gain space and close the center which would
leave them free to develop their pieces. Nevertheless, it loosens control of c5, upon which Black can
capitalize.
4...Be7
Here, White has two popular options.
5.c4
This is the second most popular choice after the main line 5.Be3, which we will discuss later. White’s aim
is to play in the same spirit as the Sämisch Variation of the King’s Indian Defense. However, the main
difference here is that Black has their dark-squared bishop on e7 and not on g7; thus the weaknesses on
the dark squares caused by the move f3 can be exploited. If White had played 5.Nc3, then after ...0-0, we
transpose to the line 4.d5 analyzed in the following chapter.
5...a5
137
To allow a knight to settle on the c5-square and also to gain space on the queenside.
6.Nc3
6.Be3 Nfd7! It seems preferable to move this knight to c5 in order to clear the h4-d8 diagonal, with the
idea of exchanging bishops on g5. 7.Qd2 Na6
Position after: 7...Na6
There’s no reason to fear that White has the opportunity of capturing the a5-pawn. 8.Bd3 [8.Qxa5 f5
9.exf5 Ndc5 10.b4 Bg5!³ and Black has a lot of compensation for the sacrificed pawn, thanks to greater
piece activity and a safer king, once we have castled.] 8...Ndc5 9.Bc2 Nb4= And after taking the light-
squared bishop and playing ...f5, Black’s position is more comfortable.
138
6...Nfd7!
The most correct move order. Now, Black combines the plan to move the knight to c5 with the idea of
exchanging the black bishop on g5.
7.Be3 Na6
8.Bd3
8.Qd2 as in Silva, E – Nogueira, I Recife 2009. 8...Ndc5N with the idea of castling short and ...f5. 9.Bd3
[9.g3 f5= with great counterplay on the kingside.] 9...Nxd3+ 10.Qxd3 0-0³ And after playing ...f5,
Black’s position will be easier due to their bishop pair.
8...0-0
139
9.Nge2
We have reached the game Hansch, T – Roessner, U Friedrichroda 2008.

9.Qd2 Ndc5 10.Bb1 Moradiabadi, E – Markowski, T Mainz 2010. 10...f5!N
Position after: 10...f5!N
There’s no reason to wait – it’s time to break. 11.exf5 White must play in this fashion, at least to try to
gain control of e4 in order to place a knight there. 11...Bxf5 12.Bxf5 Rxf5 13.Nge2 Bg5= Without any
problems for Black.
9...Nb4!N
140
Position after: 9...Nb4!N
10.Qd2
This may be the best option for our opponent.

10.Bb1 Nb6! taking advantage of the weakness of the c4-pawn. 11.b3 Bh4+ to provoke g3. 12.g3 [12.Ng3
a4=] 12...Bg5
13.Bxg5 [13.Bf2 Qf6! 14.h4 Qxf3 15.Rf1 Bh3 16.hxg5 Bxf1 17.Kxf1 a4³ and Black is very active. One
possibility is ...f6.] 13...Qxg5 14.Qd2 Qxd2+ 15.Kxd2 a4³ With a better position for us as Black.
10...h6
141
Black wants to play ...Bg5.
11.Bb1
11.0-0 Bg5=
11...Bg5 12.Bxg5 Qxg5 13.Qxg5 hxg5=
Position after: 13...hxg5=
With a balanced position, although I would find it easier to play as Black. A possible plan could be to take
advantage of the open file with ...g6, ...Kg7 and ...Rh8 or ...g6 and ...f5.
142
d) 4.d5 Be7 5.Be3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.f3 e5 4.d5 Be7 5.Be3
This is White’s main choice. Now, as our opponent hasn’t played c4, I think it’s best to hit the center
immediately.
5...c6! 6.c4 b5!
It’s best to keep hitting the center. There are several options here.
143
7.a3
A) 7.b3 is a harmless move. 7...bxc4 8.bxc4 cxd5 9.cxd5 0-0= with an easier position to play. The best
plan is ...Nh5 and ...f5.
B) 7.dxc6 This was Gallagher, J – Pelletier, Y Flims 2012. 7...b4!N
I think this move is so vital. Black has gained control of the c5-square and has limited the action of the
f1-bishop by keeping the white pawn on c4. 8.Qa4 [8.a3 Qa5! 9.c7 Nc6 10.Bd3 0-0 11.Ne2 Be6 12.0-0
Qxc7=
Position after: 12...Qxc7=
144
Black has achieved very good piece coordination and now, the plan is to bring the knight from f6 to c5,
via d7. Then we will place the rooks on the semi-open files.] 8...Qc7 9.a3 [9.Qxb4?? d5 10.Qa4 d4
11.Bd2 Nxc6–+] 9...bxa3 10.Nxa3 Nxc6 11.Ne2 Bd7 12.Nc3 a6 13.Bd3 0-0 14.0-0 Nd4 15.Qd1 Rfb8=
Position after: 15...Rfb8=
Black seems to have no problems in this position: they have a good knight set up on d4 and pressure on
the open file.
C) 7.cxb5N An attempt to win an extra pawn. 7...cxd5 8.exd5 Nbd7
Position after: 8...Nbd7
With the pawn sacrifice, Black will obtain fast development in return and all of their pieces will join in
to attack the central d5-pawn. 9.Nc3 Bb7 10.Bc4 seems the only way to defend that pawn at all costs.
10...Nb6
145
C1) 11.Qd3 Nxc4 12.Qxc4 Rc8
Position after: 12...Rc8
C1.1) 13.Qb3 Rxc3! is a beautiful exchange sacrifice to activate all the pieces and take over the
center. Besides, the white king will be insecure. 14.bxc3 Nxd5 15.Bf2 Nf4 16.Kf1 Qc8©
Position after: 16...Qc8©
Black has excellent compensation, thanks to better coordination and development in addition to a
much safer king.
C1.2) 13.Qd3 Qa5 14.Kf2 Rxc3!? Although this is not necessary, it is also interesting. [14...a6
15.Nge2 axb5 16.a3 0-0=] 15.Qxc3 Qxb5 16.Qb3 Qxb3 17.axb3 a6© And Black has compensation
for the exchange because they will capture the d5-pawn. This will activate all our pieces and we have
a better pawn structure.
146
C2) 11.Bb3 a6!
Position after: 11...a6!
The idea, beyond opening up the a- and b-files, is to gain the a8-square for our queen. 12.bxa6 Rxa6
13.Nge2 Qa8 All the black pieces aim at the d5-pawn that will soon be captured. Hence, the position is
easier to play for Black. 14.Bg5 Nbxd5 15.Bc4 Rb6=
7...bxc4 8.Bxc4 0-0 9.Nc3
Position after: 9.Nc3
This position was reached in Lupulescu, C – Kempinski, R Germany 2016.
9...cxd5!N
147
A good move. Black should not fear that the opponent would recapture with the bishop as the attack on
the a8-rook is not dangerous.
10.Bxd5
10.Nxd5 is not concerning. 10...Be6 11.Ne2 Nbd7 Now, the development of the black pieces seems
simple.
12.Nec3 Nxd5 13.Bxd5 [13.Nxd5 Bh4+ 14.g3 Bg5= and after the knight moves to b6, Black’s position is
ideal.] 13...Rb8 14.Qd2 a5 15.0-0 Nb6=
10...Nxd5
148
11.Qxd5

11.Nxd5 Be6 12.Ne2 Nd7 13.Nec3 [13.0-0 Bxd5 14.Qxd5 Nf6 15.Qd3 d5=; 13.Nxe7+ Qxe7 14.0-0
Rfb8 15.b4 a5=] 13...Bh4+ 14.g3 Bg5 15.Bf2 Nf6=
11...Qd7!
Position after: 11...Qd7!
The key move.
12.Nge2
12.Qxa8? Nc6 13.Nge2 Ba6 14.Qxf8+ Kxf8 The plan is to jump with the knight to d4. 15.Rd1 Na5 16.0-
0 Nc4 17.Bc1 Nb6µ
149
Position after: 17...Nb6µ
is much easier for Black to play, thanks to the bishop pair and, even more so, the tremendous activity of
the light-squared bishop.
In addition, the white king is weaker and the white rooks do not have an easy way to come into play.
12...Bb7 13.Qb3 Na6
To transfer the knight to c7 from where it will support the possible advance of the d6-pawn.
14.0-0 Rfb8 15.Qc2 Nc7=
With equal chances. Our plan is to try to play ...d5 after improving the queen to e6.
150
e) 4.dxe5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.f3 e5 4.dxe5
The main move in this position and one of the ideas that White had in mind when they played 3.f3.
However, Black need not fear the exchange of queens and what that entails, namely the loss of castling
rights, because in the absence of queens, the king will be safe in the center.
4...dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Bc4
attacking the weakest pawn.
6...Ke8
Position after: 6...Ke8
White now has several reasonable options but Black is well-prepared to face them all and will manage to
equalize without any problems.
7.Be3
The main line, with the idea of hindering the development of the black dark-squared bishop.
A) 7.Ne2 a5! gaining space on the queenside. 8.a4 is the best answer for White and we have reached the
game Repka, C – Kadric, D Batumi 2018. 8...Nfd7!N
151
Position after: 8...Nfd7!N
In the aforementioned game, Black played 8...Nbd7. I think it’s preferable to play in this way: the idea is
to quickly bring the knight to b6. 9.Nbc3 Nb6 10.Bb3 Na6 – the best square for the knight. 11.Be3 Bc5
Black has managed to develop their pieces in the most harmonious way possible.
A1) 12.Kf2 Bxe3+ 13.Kxe3 Ke7 14.Nc1 Nc5 Black has no difficulties in this position. 15.Nd3 Nxb3
16.cxb3 f6=
152
Although there is equality, Black’s position seems to me more pleasant. Black’s next moves will be
...c6 and ...Be6. Then the h8-rook can be activated by placing it on the open file.
A2) 12.Bxc5 Nxc5 13.Nb5 seems the only way to try to get something out as White. But we have a
great move now. 13...Kd8!
Position after: 13...Kd8!
14.Bxf7 [14.0-0-0+ Bd7 15.Bxf7 Nbxa4=] 14...Nbxa4 15.Nbc3 [15.b3 Nb6³] 15...Bd7= And after
placing the king on e7 or c7, I find Black’s position easier to play.
B) 7.Nc3 is a very logical move but with ...c6, this knight will be well-controlled. 7...c6 8.Be3 [8.a4 a5
9.Be3 Nbd7 and there seems to be nothing better for White than to develop the knight from g1 to e2 by
transposing to 8.Be3.] 8...Nbd7 9.a4 a5 10.Nge2 Bc5
153
The position seems very balanced, and Black has no difficulties at all. In the long term, it is easier for
Black to play because of the weak squares on the queenside. 11.Nd1 [11.Kf2 Bxe3+ 12.Kxe3 Nb6
13.Ba2 Nfd7= as in Knoll, H – Bosiocic, M Austria 2013. After placing the knight at c5 and the king at
e7, Black has nothing to fear.] 11...Bxe3 12.Nxe3 Nc5 13.Kf2 Nfd7! to transfer to b6. 14.Rhd1 Nb6
15.b3 Ke7= Following the game Neverov, V – Onischuk, V Zhytomyr 2017.
Position after: 15...Ke7=
The position is perfectly playable for Black, who has their knights very well-placed. Now the plan is
...Be6 and then to fight for the open file.
7...Nfd7!
154
Position after: 7...Nfd7!
In addition to supporting our dark-squared bishop’s move to c5, this also serves to move the knight to b6.
8.Nd2 Bc5 9.Nf1
This was Grimm, G – Lakos, N Hungary 2015.

Instead, Arribas Lopez, A – Del Rio de Angelis, S Linares 2014 went 9.Bxc5 Nxc5 10.Nb3 Nxb3
11.Bxb3 Ke7=
with an equal position.
9...Bxe3N 10.Nxe3 Nb6 11.Bb3 N8d7
155
Looking for the c5-square.
12.a3
To keep the bishop.
12...Nc5 13.Ba2 a5=
Position after: 13...a5=
Although there is equality, I find the position very pleasant to play with the black pieces. Our knights are
very well-placed. The plan is simply to connect the rooks by placing the king on e7 and the bishop on e6.
The move 3.f3 is a very serious alternative to the main option, which is 3.Nc3. The former is quite popular
and I personally have had to face it on numerous occasions. This means that we have to pay considerable
attention to it and know the typical plans in each line.
4.Ne2 has its followers today but Black has a very energetic way to respond and to solve their spatial
issues. It is best to take on d4 (4...exd4 5.Nxd4) and continue with the key 5...d5. As we have seen,
playing in this fashion leads to having to place a knight on h5 but this does not have to concern us unduly
because it is easy to bring it back to the center.
4.d5 is perhaps the most positional move for White. After 4...Be7, White can choose to play either 5.c4
(gaining more space on the queenside) or 5.Be3. If the chosen option is 5.c4, then the best response for
Black is to gain space on the queenside with ...a5. By doing so, we ensure the c5-square for one of our
knights; another of our standard ideas is to exchange the dark-squared bishop on g5. On the other hand, if
the chosen option is 5.Be3, it is best to hit the center very quickly with 5...c6 and if our opponent wants to
hold it with 6.c4, we must keep hitting it with 6...b5.
Finally, the main line is 4.dxe5, aiming to exchange queens and to remove Black’s option to castle.
However this is not a problem because the black king, without queens, is very well-placed in the center.
156
What we need to be clear about in this variation is that we should transfer the f6-knight to b6 and the b8-
knight to c5.
In all cases, we are going to secure good positions and we have nothing to fear.
157
Chapter 5
Rare 4th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5
Chapter Guide
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5

a) Various 4th Moves
b) 4.d5
c) 4.f3 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Qf2
d) 4.f3 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Bb5 with 8.Bxc6
e) 4.f3 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Bb5 with 8.Qd2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5
158
This is the move that introduces us to the magical world of the Philidor Defense. White has several
reasonable options as an alternative to the main move 4.Nf3. The moves 4.d5 and 4.f3 will be analyzed in
their own subchapters here and the lines 4.f4, 4.Nge2 and 4.dxe5 will be analyzed in their respective
chapters.
4.Bc4
A) 4.Be3 has been played very rarely and understandably so. It doesn’t seem to be the optimal square for
the bishop because we can attack it. 4...Ng4! 5.Bc4 As in Ostovic, M – Novak, K Porec 2010. 5...Nxe3N
I see no reason to delay this. 6.fxe3 Qh4+ to weaken the kingside. 7.g3 Qe7 8.Nf3 c6! 9.0-0 Nd7
159
Once Black manages to complete the development of their pieces, their position will be more
comfortable to play thanks to the bishop pair and better pawn structure. 10.Nh4 White’s best try.
10...Nf6 11.Nf5 Bxf5 12.Rxf5 g6 13.Rf1 Bg7= With equality. Even so, I think the position is easier to
play for us as Black.
B) 4.Bg5 is more interesting than 4.Be3. 4...Be7 5.dxe5 The only independent way for White. [5.Nf3
Nbd7 would transpose to Chapter 9.] 5...dxe5 6.Qxd8+ Bxd8 Black does not have any problems here.
Position after: 6...Bxd8
7.Nf3 Nbd7 8.Bc4 c6! As well as controlling the knight’s jump to d5, it serves to develop the bishop on
the diagonal a5-d8. 9.a4 Ba5= with a balanced position.
Position after: 9...Ba5=
160
The black pieces are harmoniously developed and after short-castling, we do not have any difficulties in
the position.
4...exd4!
Taking advantage of the fact that White has not defended their pawn with their knight. We’ll gain time in
development by attacking the queen.
5.Qxd4 Nc6
6.Qd1
As played in Toma, K – Gagarin, V Krakow 2010.

6.Qe3 The queen can also retreat here. Now, Black applies the same idea as against 6.Qd1. 6...Be6!
7.Bxe6 [7.Nd5 Ne5 8.Bb3 c6=] 7...fxe6 8.Bd2
161
If White decides to castle long, it’s best to do the same as Black. 8...Qd7 9.0-0-0 0-0-0= With the idea of
...d5, and an equal position.
6...Be6!N
Position after: 6...Be6!N
The best way to neutralize the strength of the c4-bishop.
7.Bxe6
7.Bb3 Qe7 with the idea of castling long. 8.Bg5 0-0-0
162
Position after: 8...0-0-0
9.Nge2 [9.Nd5?! Bxd5 10.Bxd5 Nb4³] 9...h6 10.Nd5 Bxd5 11.Bxf6 Qxf6 12.Qxd5 Re8=
7...fxe6 8.Nf3 Be7 9.0-0 0-0 10.Qd3 Qd7=
Black has no difficulties in this position. Now, the plan is to complete development with ...Rad8 and to
improve the f6-knight by transferring it to f4.
b) 4.d5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.d5
163
This is very similar to the line with 3.f3 followed by d5, discussed in the previous chapter.
4...Be7
5.f3
White is ready to play in the fashion of the English Attack: Be3, Qd2 and 0-0-0. However, the problem for
our opponent is that Black can quickly hit the center.
A) 5.Nf3 A possible mistake by White is 5.Bg5, losing a pawn after 5...Nxd5, precisely because the
bishop on g5 is not defended. 5...c6 Fighing for the center. 6.Bg5 Nbd7 7.Qd2 cxd5!
Position after: 7...cxd5!

164
8.Nxd5 [8.exd5 h6 9.Bh4 0-0 10.Bd3 Nc5µ] 8...Nxd5 9.exd5 0-0³ Black’s position is more pleasant to
play. The plan is to expand on the kingside with ...f5.
B) 5.Be2 c6
6.Nf3 [6.Be3 exploits the fact that the knight can’t go to g4. 6...cxd5 7.exd5 0-0 8.h3 as in the game
Szegi, T – Jurcik, M Slovakia 2008. 8...Na6!N 9.Nf3 Nd7 10.0-0 f5= and this is easier to play with the
black pieces] 6...cxd5 7.exd5 0-0 8.0-0 Na6! 9.Nd2 Transferring the knight to the queenside. 9...Bf5
10.Nc4 Ne4!
It is always a good idea to try to exchange minor pieces, if you have less space. 11.Nxe4 Bxe4= After
removing the bishop to g6, Black is ready to play ...f5.
165
C) 5.h3 is an unusual choice. It serves either to prepare g4 or to place the bishop on e3 without the black
knight being able to bother it. 5...c6
C1) 6.g4 as played in Pagerka, M – Straka, J Martin 2013. 6...0-0!N Black should not be afraid. 7.Nge2
b5 8.a3 [8.dxc6 b4! 9.Nd5 Nxc6 10.Ng3 Bb7 11.Nxe7+ Nxe7 12.Bg2 d5!= with a more comfortable
position.] 8...cxd5 9.exd5 a6
Black is preparing to relocate their pieces in the best possible way and to break with f5. 10.Ng3 Nbd7
11.Bg2 Ne8! Black wants to transfer the knight to g7. 12.0-0 g6 13.Bh6 Ng7 14.f4 is the best way to
play for White. 14...exf4 15.Bxf4 f5! 16.gxf5 Nxf5 17.Nxf5 Rxf5= And the position is balanced.
166
Position after: 17...Rxf5=
The black knight has a great square on e5 from which it can look for ways to attack the weaker white
king.
C2) 6.Be3 Qa5 7.Qd2 b5!
It is a very good idea to expand on the queenside by taking advantage of the fact that the white pawn on
e4 is under attack. 8.dxc6 is the most critical move. 8...b4 9.Nb5 0-0! 10.Nxd6 Nxc6 11.Nc4 Qc7
12.Bd3 Be6= and Black’s position is much easier to play due to their superior development.
5...0-0 6.Be3 c6 7.Qd2 cxd5
167
Position after: 7...cxd5
8.exd5
8.Nxd5?! Nxd5 9.exd5 [9.Qxd5 Nc6 10.Qd2 Be6³] 9...Nd7 10.0-0-0 f5= Once we have established the
kingside after ...Nf6, it’s time to expand on the queenside with ...a6 and ...b5.
8...a6!
The idea is to provoke the move a4 and make it harder for White to castle long.
9.a4
168
9.Bd3 b5³ and once Black places the bishop on b7 and the b8-knight on d7, our position will be much
more comfortable.
9...Nh5
Enabling ...f5.
10.g3
A) 10.g4?! Bh4+ 11.Kd1 Nf4³ with a slight advantage in Hacaperka, M - Hantak, A Cesky Krumlov
2009.
B) 10.a5 f5 11.Na4 Nd7 12.0-0-0 Qc7=
10...f5=
With an equal position, but I consider this more pleasant for Black to play.
c) 4.f3 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Qf2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.f3
169
White’s idea is to play in a similar way to the lines analyzed in the previous chapter on 3.f3, and to
develop the pieces following the scheme of the English Attack: Be3, Qd2 and 0-0-0.
4...exd4!
The correct move.
5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Qf2
Position after: 6.Qf2
Although the main line, by far, is 6.Bb5 which we will analyze later, this move is the machine’s favorite.
170
6...d5!
Whenever possible, Black benefits from this central break, resulting in greater mobility for their dark-
squared bishop.
7.Bg5 Bb4
8.0-0-0
The most critical way to play.

8.exd5 doesn’t land Black in any trouble. 8...Qxd5 9.Bd2 as tried in Beshukov, S – Kuzmin, G Krasnodar
1998. 9...Qa5!N exerts pressure on the a2-pawn which makes it impossible for White to castle.
171
Position after: 9...Qa5!N
10.Qe2+ [10.Bb5?! Be6 11.Nge2 0-0-0 12.a3 Bxc3 13.Nxc3 Nd4 14.Bd3 Bc4!µ with a clear advantage]
10...Be6 11.Qb5 0-0-0 12.Qxa5 Bxa5³ and the position is easier for Black to play thanks to their superior
development and safer king.
8...Bxc3!
It is important to remove this knight in order to capture the central e4-pawn.
9.exd5
9.bxc3?? Nxe4–+
9...Ne4!!
Position after: 9...Ne4!!
Now comes some exchanges of pieces that will favor us.
10.Qe3
10.fxe4 Qxg5+ 11.Kb1 Bd4! 12.Rxd4 Nxd4 13.Qxd4 0-0 14.Nf3 Qf4³
172
Position after: 14...Qf4³
And White does not have enough compensation for the exchange.
10...Qxg5 11.Qxg5 Nxg5 12.bxc3 Na5 13.h4! Ne6 14.dxe6 Bxe6³
Position after: 14...Bxe6³
White’s damaged pawn structure gives Black a more pleasant position to play.
d) 4.f3 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Bb5 with 8.Bxc6
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.f3 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Bb5
The main line.
173
6...Be7
Here, White has many options.
7.Be3
A) 7.Bg5 looking to castle long. 7...0-0 8.Qd2 h6! Forcing the bishop to make a difficult decision.
Position after: 8...h6!
A1) 9.Bh4?! Ne5! is an important move that prepares for expansion on the queenside with ...c6 and
...b5, and doing so with tempo against White’s b5-bishop. The advantage for Black is that White cannot
expel our knight with f4. 10.f4? Nxe4! 11.Bxe7 Qxe7 12.Nxe4 Nd7µ
174
A2) 9.Be3 Ne5 As we have seen in the 9.Bh4 line, Black prepares for expansion on the queenside.
10.Be2 [10.0-0-0? c6 11.Be2 b5µ Vavra, P – Roos, M Germany 2006] 10...c6! Readying ...b5. 11.Nh3
is the best move to transfer to f2. 11...d5! 12.Nf2 b5³ And our position is more comfortable.
Position after: 12...b5³
B) 7.Nd5 The aim of this move is to eliminate as many pieces as possible from the board. 7...0-0 8.Bxc6
bxc6 9.Nxe7+ Qxe7 10.Bg5 c5 Black’s position is good.
White has two options but neither of them poses problems for Black. 11.Bxf6 [11.Qc3 Re8 Threatening
...Nxe4 or ...Nd5. 12.Bxf6 Qxf6 13.Qxf6 gxf6 14.Kf2 f5 15.exf5 Bxf5= The position is easier to play
for us.] 11...gxf6 12.Qd2 Srbis, J – Jovanovic, Z Hum na Sutli 2013. 12...Rb8N Bringing the rook into
175
play and provoking b3 from White. 13.b3 Qe5 The idea behind 12...Rb8. 14.Rd1 f5! This tears up
White’s center. 15.Ne2 fxe4 16.fxe4 Bb7 17.0-0 Bxe4
Black has nothing to fear in this position and even has an extra pawn. 18.Ng3 [18.Nc3 Bc6 and it’s
Black who has a chance to attack through the g-file with ...Kh8 and ...Rg8.] 18...Bg6= It is not easy for
White to attack.
7...0-0
8.Bxc6
176
One of the two main lines that White has, along with 8.Qd2 that we will analyze later.
8...bxc6 9.Nge2 d5!
Whenever possible, striking out is the best way to play.
10.Qd3
The right move.

A) 10.e5? Nd7 11.0-0-0 [11.f4 Nb6 Preparing ...c5. 12.Na4 Rb8 13.0-0 Nxa4 14.Qxa4 c5µ] 11...Bb7
12.Qf4 Re8 13.h4 Bf8–+ As in Sokac, M – Ostovic, M Sveti Filip i Jakov 2014.
Position after: 13...Bf8–+
177
B) 10.exd5?! is better than 10.e5 but not enough to equalize. 10...cxd5 11.Na4 Re8 12.0-0-0 [12.0-0? c5!
13.Nxc5 Bxc5 14.Qxc5 d4µ] 12...c6³
Position after: 12...c6³
And once Black has managed to stabilize their center, the position is more pleasant for us with ample
chances to attack on the queenside.
10...a5!
Looking for ...Ba6.
11.0-0-0 Ba6 12.Qd2 dxe4 13.Nxe4
178
13.fxe4 Qxd2+ 14.Rxd2 Rfe8³ and the e4-pawn will fall.
13...Nxe4 14.fxe4 Qxd2+ 15.Rxd2 Rfe8=
Position after: 15...Rfe8=
Black’s position is easier to play due to the bishop pair. Our opponent will need to suffer to keep their e4-
pawn.
e) 4.f3 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Bb5 with 8.Qd2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.f3 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Bb5 Be7 7.Be3 0-0 8.Qd2
This is the best option for White, without eliminating the bishop pair.
8...Ne5
179
To expand on the queenside with ...c6 and ...b5.

9.Be2
A very logical move and the best. It removes the threat of c6 and supports the pawn’s advance to g4.
A) 9.g4? is a terrible move as played in the game Rasik, V – Caletka, R Ostrava 2016. 9...Nfxg4!N
Shattering the kingside. 10.fxg4 Bxg4 Now, White’s position is horrible.
Black has two pawns for the piece, good coordination of minor pieces and the white king cannot castle.
11.Be2 [11.h3 Bf3 12.Rh2 f5µ; 11.Qg2 Leaving the d2-square free for the king. 11...Bh4+ 12.Kd2 d5!
180
Blowing up the center. 13.exd5 c6 14.Bd3 cxd5 15.Qxd5 Qe7–+ And after the black rooks come into
play, Black’s advantage will be decisive.] 11...Bh4+
Position after: 11...Bh4+
12.Kd1 [12.Bf2 Bxf2+ 13.Kxf2 f5 14.Kg2 Bxe2 15.Ngxe2 f4µ] 12...Nc4! 13.Qd4 b5–+
B) 9.0-0-0?! is not a satisfactory solution for White. Black can now easily attack from the queenside.
9...c6 10.Be2 b5 11.g4 As in Schriemer, O – Docx, S Gent 2009. 11...b4!N
12.Na4 [12.Nb1 d5!–+] 12...Qa5 13.b3 Rd8 14.g5 Nfd7µ With a clear advantage. The plan is to attack
from the queenside and open up the center with ...d5.
9...c6 10.g4 b5
181
11.g5
This position was reached in Rasik, V – Caletka, R Ostrava 2016.

A) 11.b3?? Preventing ...Nc4 but it turns out to be a blunder. 11...Nexg4! 12.fxg4 b4 13.Na4 Nxe4
14.Qd3 Bh4+ 15.Kd1 [15.Kf1 f5 16.Kg2 d5–+] 15...Re8–+
B) 11.a3 Rb8 12.g5 [12.Bxa7? Ra8 13.Be3 b4! 14.Nd1 d5µ] 12...Ne8 13.h4 f5³
11...Ne8N
Position after: 11...Ne8N
In the aforementioned game, Black moved the knight to d7 but on this square, it obstructs the bishop.
182
12.f4
12.0-0-0 Qa5 13.a3 [13.f4 Ng4 14.Bd4 b4 15.Nb1 c5! 16.h3 Ne5!µ] 13...Rb8³ Black has decent chances
of attacking through the queenside.
Position after: 13...Rb8³
12...Ng4 13.Bxg4 Bxg4 14.Qg2 f5!
15.exf5
15.h3 Bh5 16.exf5 d5³ with the idea of transferring the knight to d6.
15...Bxf5 16.Qxc6 b4 17.Qd5+ Kh8 18.Nb5 Nc7 19.Nxc7 Qxc7=

183
Position after: 19...Qxc7=
Black’s position is more comfortable. We have the bishop pair and once the rook on a8 heads to e8, the
white king will suffer.
In this chapter, we analyzed the most unusual options for White on the 4th move. Of all of them, both 4.d5
and 4.f3 seem to be the most interesting.
4.d5 is closely-related to 3.f3 discussed in the previous chapter. In view of this, it is best for us to continue
with 4...Be7 and then hit the center with ...c6. In addition to capturing on d5, it also allows us to expand
on the queenside with ...b5.
4.f3 is a dynamic option and, precisely for this reason, Black has a strong way of countering. It is best to
capture on d4 to force our opponent’s queen into approaching the center and, because of that, we will able
to gain time in development. In many lines, we will encounter opposite-side castling. In any case, I believe
that Black benefits from all the options.
184
Chapter 6
4.f4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.f4
Chapter Guide
Chapter 6 – 4.f4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.f4 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6

b) 6.Bb5 Bd7 – Various 7th Moves
c) 6.Bb5 Bd7 7.Bxc6
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.f4
This is the most critical line that White has in this position and that is why it requires Black to act with
energy. Moreover, it is an option that White tends to choose often in practice and which I personally have
had to face on many occasions, so it is worth studying this well.
4...exd4!
Forcing our opponent to recapture with the queen in order to gain a tempo in development with ...Nc6.
5.Qxd4 Nc6
185
Here, White has many options that we will analyze. The main line is 6.Bb5 which we will discuss in the
following subchapters.
6.Qd1
This has been played several times in this position, for example in the game Lampert, J – Solak, D Biel
2013. Black has no stronger response than to react in the center.
A) 6.Qf2 d5!
As we are seeing in all the chapters, normally if Black can react in this way with guarantees, then they
should do so. Now is a great time to try to take advantage because the queen is badly placed on f2.
186
7.exd5 [7.e5? Ng4 8.Qg3 Nd4µ] 7...Nxd5 8.Bd2 Following the game Garcia Serrano, J – Lozano
Freras, S Madrid 2017. [8.Bb5?! Nxc3 9.Bxc6+ bxc6 10.bxc3 Qd5µ and Black has a clear advantage
thanks to the bishop pair.] 8...Ncb4!N Attacking the weaknesses. 9.0-0-0 Nxc3 10.bxc3 Nc6= And
Black has a better position due to their better pawn structure.
B) 6.Qd3 This move is usually seen after 6.Bb5. Now, it’s weirder because it blocks the bishop. 6...d5!
This move is always so important. 7.e5 [7.exd5?! Nb4 8.Qe2+ Qe7 9.Qxe7+ Bxe7 10.Bb5+ Bd7
11.Bxd7+ Nxd7 12.Kd1 Nb6µ] 7...Nb4 8.Qe2 Ne4! A great pawn sacrifice that serves to clear the h4-
d8 diagonal. 9.Nxe4 [9.Nf3 Be7 10.Nxe4 dxe4 11.Qxe4 g6© and Black has good compensation for the
pawn. The idea is to play ...Bf5.] 9...dxe4 10.Qxe4 Qh4+ 11.g3 Qh5
Position after: 11...Qh5
187
All the light squares are weak and given that the white queen is out in the center, we can exploit this by
developing our pieces with tempi – there is more than sufficient compensation for the sacrificed pawn.
12.Be3 [12.Bd3 Nxd3+ 13.Qxd3 a6 14.Nf3 Bd7 15.Bd2 0-0-0³] 12...c6= And we have arrived at my
game Villalta Bustillo, I – Trigo Urquijo, S Zornotza 2015. Black has great compensation for the pawn
thanks to better development and the possibility of exploiting the light-squared weaknesses. Besides, the
white king is vulnerable. The threat is to develop the bishop to f5, or to e6 followed by d5.
C) 6.Qe3 is an unusual move that prepares for castling long. 6...Be7 Preparing ...d5.
C1) 7.Nf3? A poor move, played in Gussakovski, J – Weil, V Gerlingen 2007. 7...d5!N 8.e5 d4 9.Qe2
dxc3 10.exf6 gxf6 11.bxc3 Qd5µ
Position after: 11...Qd5µ
188
And Black has a clear advantage. The plan is to castle long and place the rooks on the open files.
C2) 7.Bd2?! We have seen this move in many games, as in Lach, A – Perera Borrego, M Prague 2012.
7...d5!N 8.exd5 Nxd5 9.Qe4 Nf6 to avoid exchanges. 10.Qd3 Qxd3 11.Bxd3 Nb4! 12.Bb5+ c6
13.Ba4 Be6
And we have a better position. 14.Nf3 0-0 15.a3 Nbd5³

C3) 7.Bc4 is the only way for White to stop the central pawn’s advance. 7...Be6! With the idea of
transferring the f7-pawn to the center and thus be able to continue with ...d5. 8.Bxe6 fxe6
Our aim is to break with ...d5 and try to take advantage of it by castling long. 9.Nf3 [9.Qe2 e5! 10.Nf3
Qd7 11.0-0 0-0-0= with the idea of taking on f4 to gain the e5-square for a knight. 9.Bd2 This was
189
Delorme, A – Kaulich, P Avoine 2013. 9...d5!N 10.exd5 exd5 11.Qf3 Qd7 12.0-0-0 0-0-0³ With a
slightly better position] 9...d5 Very important.
Position after: 9...d5
10.Qe2 Bb4 11.exd5 [11.Bd2! Bxc3 12.Bxc3 Nxe4 13.Bxg7 Rg8 14.Bc3 Qe7= and after castling long,
Black does not have any problems] 11...Bxc3+ 12.bxc3 Qxd5= with a balanced position.
Black has the better pawn structure so their position is comfortable.
6...d5!N
190
7.e5
7.exd5 Nb4 8.Bb5+ Bd7 9.Nf3 Bxb5 10.Nxb5 Nbxd5³ with a better position for us as Black.
7...d4! 8.exf6 dxc3 9.Qxd8+ Nxd8
And Black has no difficulties in this position.
10.Ne2
191
10.bxc3 gxf6 11.Nf3 Ne6 12.Be3 Bd6 13.g3 Bd7 We have achieved good piece development. 14.Kf2
Nc5= With equality.
The plan is to castle long and take advantage of the weak squares along the h1-a8 diagonal by placing a
bishop on c6 and a knight on e4.
10...Nc6! 11.Nxc3 Nb4 12.Bb5+ c6 13.Ba4 Bf5=
Black’s position is easier to play.
b) 6.Bb5 Bd7 – Various 7th Moves
192
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.f4 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Bb5
The main move. White’s idea is to retain the queen in the center, even at the cost of capturing on c6.
6...Bd7
Now, let’s analyze the queen’s moves. The main line is 7.Bxc6 which we will analyze in the next
subchapter.
7.Qf2
This is the recommendation by the British Grandmaster, John Emms in his book “Attacking with 1.e4”.
A) 7.Qd3 is a very rare option. 7...a6! forcing White to make a choice. In any case, Black intends to
continue with ...Nb4. 8.Bc4 is the best move. [8.Ba4? as in Vignette, J – Likhoded, V Nimes 2012.
8...Nb4!N 9.Bxd7+ Qxd7 10.Qe2 0-0-0µ
193
With a clear advantage thanks to our greater development and safer king.] 8...Nb4! 9.Qe2 Bg4 10.Nf3
Bxf3 11.gxf3 d5!! Dynamiting the center.
Position after: 11...d5!!
The idea is that the e4-pawn disappears, leaving White’s structure on the kingside destroyed. 12.exd5+
[12.Nxd5? Nfxd5 13.Bxd5 Qh4+ 14.Kf1 Nxd5 15.exd5+ Be7µ with a better position for Black.]
12...Qe7 13.Bb3 0-0-0= With a more comfortable position for us thanks to the better pawn structure.
B) 7.Qd2 is an unusual move that was played in the game between Grandmasters Hector, J – Danielsen,
H Copenhagen 2012. 7...Qe7!N Trying to take advantage of the queen’s awkward position. 8.Qe2 0-0-0
Black wants to attack the e4-pawn very quickly. 9.Nf3 Re8 10.Bd3 d5!
194
All of Black’s pieces are on their optimal squares, so it’s time to strike at the center. 11.e5 [11.exd5??
Qd6 12.Be3 Nxd5–+] 11...d4 12.Nb5 [12.Nd1?! Ng4 13.h3 Nh6³ with a better position. Now, the idea
is to play ...f6.] 12...Nd5 13.Qf2 Qc5 By reinforcing the strength of the e8-rook, and with the idea of
hitting the center with ...f6. 14.Nbxd4 Nxd4 15.Nxd4 g5!= Kicking the pawn that holds e5.
Position after: 15...g5!=
Capitalizing on the fact that our king is well-protected, we strike the center to exploit the weakness of
our opponent’s king.
7...a6!
195
The best decision, as in the line with 7.Qd3.
8.Bd3
And we have reached Khalesi, V – Stopa, J Rasht 2016.

8.Bc4 Preventing ...d5. 8...Qe7! With the idea of castling long. 9.Qe2 0-0-0 10.Nf3 Re8
Position after: 10...Re8
11.Bd3 [11.Bxa6 is not a problem for us. 11...Nxe4 12.Nd5 Qd8 13.Be3 Ne7³ With a better position. The
aim is ...Nf5.] 11...d5! This is the natural central reaction in these lines. 12.e5 d4³
8...d5!N
196
As we see in many lines, the best way is to push hard.
9.exd5
9.e5? Ng4 10.Qe2 Bc5µ
9...Nb4 10.Nf3 Nxd3+ 11.cxd3 Bb4! 12.a3 Bxc3+ 13.bxc3 Nxd5=
Position after: 13...Nxd5=
With a balanced position, although I find it easier to play with the black pieces thanks to the better pawn
structure.
197
c) 6.Bb5 Bd7 7.Bxc6
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.f4 exd4 5.Qxd4 Nc6 6.Bb5 Bd7 7.Bxc6
The main line. White’s idea is to surrender the bishop pair in return for keeping the queen centralized.
7...Bxc6
Position after: 7...Bxc6
8.Nf3
So far, we have reached this position in many games, such as Sosa, T – Oratovsky, M Barcelona 2019.
8.Nge2 Qe7 Attacking e4 very quickly. 9.Ng3 As essayed in Barrientos Chavarriaga, S – Argandona
Riveiro, I Capdepera 2004. [9.Nd5 Bxd5! 10.exd5 g6 11.0-0 Bg7 12.Nc3 0-0= and Black’s position is not
problematic. The plan is to transfer the knight to c5.] 9...h5!N To expel the g3-knight.
198
Position after: 9...h5!N
To avoid this, White is forced to play h4 and that is precisely what Black is hoping for. 10.h4 Nxe4!
11.Ngxe4 f5 12.Be3 Bxe4µ With a clear advantage for Black.
8...Nxe4!N
Seizing the moment. Our idea is based on the fact that we will be able to pin the knight.
9.Nxe4
9.0-0?
Position after: 9.0-0?
199
A) 9...Nxc3!? is a good alternative to 9...Nf6. 10.Qxc3 Qd7 ...Qf6 is also fine. Now, the idea is ...0-0-0.
11.Re1+ Be7 12.Qxg7 0-0-0!
Black is threatening to capture on f3 and then install a rook on g8. 13.Qxf7 Bxf3! 14.Rxe7 Qc6 15.gxf3
Qxf3 16.Rxc7+ Kb8 17.Rxb7+! Qxb7 18.Qxb7+ Kxb7³
B) 9...Nf6 10.Re1+ Be7 11.Qe3
Position after: 11.Qe3
Seems to be the best try for White, impeding Black’s ability to castle long. 11...Bxf3 12.gxf3 d5! 13.Nb5
c6 14.Nd4 Kd7µ and White has no compensation for the pawn. Now, the plan is ...Re8 and ...Kc7.
9...Qe7
200
Position after: 9...Qe7
10.0-0
10.Kf2?! is not a solution. 10...Bxe4 11.Ng5 d5 12.Nxe4 dxe4 13.Be3 Qe6 14.Rad1 Bd6 Black has
managed to develop their pieces in a harmonious manner and we are ready to castle. 15.Qxg7 0-0-0µ
10...Bxe4 11.Re1 d5
201
The idea is ...Qc5, to exchange queens.
12.Ng5
12.Be3 c5 13.Qd2 0-0-0 14.b4 Qc7µ
12...f5
Strengthening e4.
13.Nxe4 dxe4 14.Be3
202
White’s best attempt is to hinder the development of the black pieces and avoid ...Qc5.
14...Qe6 15.Rad1 Bd6
Black has managed to develop their pieces harmoniously and in case White does not capture on g7, the
idea is to place the king on f7.
16.Qxg7 0-0-0³
Black’s position is more comfortable to play. We have good attacking possibilities with ...Rhg8.
Position after: 16...0-0-0³
As we have seen, 4.f4 is a critical line that requires Black to play with a lot of energy and react in the right
way. It’s also a popular line that I have had to deal with many times, especially in games against
opponents with a dynamic style.
The idea for White is clear: attack the center and centralize the queen very quickly in order to achieve
rapid piece development, thanks to their space advantage. To achieve this, our opponent is even willing to
hand over the bishop pair.
Given this, Black must always react strongly in the center, either by attacking it with pieces, such as the
queen from e7, a rook from e8, or directly with ...d5. In most cases, this break is the most appropriate and
we will have to keep it foremost in mind.
Finally, it is important to remember that in the main line with 7.Bxc6, there is the novelty 8...Nxe4 which
gives Black an advantage and therefore renders 4.f4 an unproblematic option for us.
203
Chapter 7
4.Nge2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nge2
Chapter Guide
Chapter 7 – 4.Nge2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nge2 Be7

a) 5.Be3
b) 5.h3
c) 5.f3
d) 5.g3 c6 6.a4
e) 5.g3 c6 6.Bg2
a) 5.Be3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nge2
204
Position after: 4.Nge2
This has become popular nowadays, only just behind 4.dxe5 and the most played 4.Nf3. The main idea is
to defend the pawn with the knight, as in 4.Nf3, but here, White seeks to continue with g3 and Bg2,
strengthening the center without the knight getting in the way of the bishop, had it been on f3. It is also the
recommendation of the Scottish Grandmaster, John Shaw in his book “Playing 1.e4 – Caro-Kann, 1...e5
and Minor Lines”.
4...Be7
Here, White has several options. We will discuss them one-by-one, starting with 5.Be3.
The main line is 5.g3 which we will discuss at the end of this chapter.
5.Be3
205
5...c6
This is almost always the right way to play – now, Black has two ideas: either to play with ...d5 or to play
with ...b5, expanding on the queenside.
6.f3
To avoid the knight jump to g4 and also with the idea of expanding on the kingside.
6...0-0
It is best to put the king into safety so that you have your hands free to attack from the other side.
7.g4
7.Qd2 White wants to castle long and hopes to attack on the kingside. However, Black is very well-
prepared and can mobilize their forces on the queenside. 7...b5
206
We already have a free hand to throw ourselves forward.

A) 8.Ng3 b4 9.Nd1 exd4! With the idea of ...d5. 10.Bxd4 As tried in Sokac, M – Brigljevic, M Zadar
2014. 10...Be6N Preparing to play ...d5 in better conditions, as White cannot avoid it.
Position after: 10...Be6N
11.c4 bxc3 12.Nxc3 d5= With a more pleasant position for us.
B) 8.a3 prevents the knight from being evicted. However, this pawn move makes it less desirable for
White to castle long. 8...Nbd7 To transfer to the c4-square. 9.g4 Nb6 10.Ng3
207
Position after: 10.Ng3
10...exd4 The reason for taking this pawn is not to play ...d5, but to force White to place a piece on d4 so
that we can then gain time by attacking it with ...c5 and thus continue to expand. 11.Bxd4 This was
Chandler, M – Wahls, M Novi Sad 1990. 11...a5!N The best way to continue our expansion on the
queenside. 12.Qf2 is the most critical move. 12...c5! This move involves the sacrifice of a pawn.
We’ll get the bishop pair in return. This compounds the weaknesses on the dark squares and the white
king – there is great compensation. 13.Bxf6 Bxf6 14.Bxb5 Rb8 15.a4 Bd7© With excellent compensation
for the pawn.
C) 8.g4 b4
208
C1) 9.Nd1 exd4 10.Nxd4 d5! As always, Black has to try to strike at the center. 11.e5 Nfd7 12.f4
This was Santo Roman, M – Bojkov, D Sautron 2004. 12...Nb6!N In addition to going to c4, this move
aims to control the f5-square. 13.Bd3 c5 14.Nf5 f6³
C2) 9.Na4 as played in the game Navarro Lopez Menchero, D – Gonzalez de la Torre, S Linares 2013.
9...Nfd7!N The idea is to transfer the knight to b6 and leave the diagonal free to check from h4.
10.Qxb4 The most critical move. 10...d5! 11.Qd2 dxe4 12.fxe4 Bh4+ 13.Ng3 Nf6³
209
Position after: 13...Nf6³
With advantage for Black, thanks to the weakness of the white king and the vulnerable white pawns.
7...Nbd7
8.Qd2
A) 8.Ng3 d5! pushing hard. 9.g5 Ne8 10.exd5 Bxg5 11.Qd2 Bxe3 12.Qxe3 exd4 13.Qxd4 Nb6= with
equality as played in Coenen, M – Hautot, S Belgium 2010.
B) 8.g5 Nh5 9.Qd2 as in Berzinsh, R – Comas Fabrego, L Solsona 2003. 9...f5!N 10.gxf6 Rxf6³
8...b5
210
9.Ng3
A) 9.g5 Ne8 10.f4? A mistake that we saw in Ponkratov, P – Goganov, A Khanty-Mansiysk 2014. [10.h4
b4 11.Nd1 d5³ Groetz, H – Shaw, J Hamilton 2010] 10...Nb6N 11.Ng3 exf4 12.Bxf4 b4 13.Nd1 f6µ
B) 9.0-0-0 b4 10.Nb1 d5 11.g5 Ne8‚ and Black takes the initiative.
9...exd4
Bringing a white piece to the center so that we can attack it with ...c5.
10.Bxd4 b4 11.Nd1 d5! 12.g5 Ne8 13.exd5
Position after: 13.exd5

211
This position was reached in Dimitrov, V – Izeta Txabarri, F Mondariz 1994.
13...c5!N 14.Be3 Nd6
Black has great development and this, together with the weakness of the white king, gives us excellent
compensation for the pawn.
15.f4 Re8 16.Be2 Nb6 17.b3 Bh3³
Position after: 17...Bh3³
With an easier position to play for us as Black.
b) 5.h3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nge2 Be7 5.h3
212
Position after: 5.h3
This is the third most played option but it has very decent statistics for White, so we must play
energetically. The idea is to facilitate development of the bishop to e3 without being disturbed and
eventually play g4.
5...exd4!
An important move. We want to bring the knight closer to the center and then have the possibility to break
with ...d5.
6.Nxd4
6.Qxd4 The advantage is that we can develop the knight by winning tempi because White cannot pin it
with a bishop on b5. 6...Nc6 7.Qd1 Ne5 to transfer to the kingside so that we can play ...c6 and thus
expand with the queenside pawns.
213
A) 8.f4 doesn’t seem to be a concern. The more White moves their pawns, the weaker their king will be.
8...Ng6 9.g3 c6 10.Bg2 0-0 11.a4 d5! Sacrificing the pawn.
12.exd5 As in Seul, G – Vandenbussche, T Germany 2018. [12.e5 Ne8 13.Be3 f6 14.exf6 Bxf6=]
12...Bc5!N The pawn is not so important; what really matters is the white king’s poor situation. 13.Qd3
[13.dxc6 Qe7µ] 13...Ne7 14.dxc6 Qxd3 15.cxd3 Nxc6© And Black has good compensation for the
pawn.
B) 8.Ng3 c6 9.f4 Ng6 10.Bd3 d5!
214
11.e5 [11.0-0 Now, we can exchange pieces. 11...dxe4 12.Ncxe4 Nxe4 13.Bxe4 Qxd1 14.Rxd1 0-0 15.f5
Ne5 And Black doesn’t have any problems in this position. 16.Bf4 f6=] 11...Nd7 12.0-0 0-0 13.Qe2
Re8! Trying to exploit the white queen’s situation. 14.Qf2 Qb6! 15.Be3 Qxe3 16.Qxe3 Bc5 17.Qxc5
Nxc5 18.Rae1 f6 Breaking the center.
19.e6 [19.exf6 Rxe1 20.Rxe1 gxf6 21.Nh5 Kf7=] 19...Nxd3 20.cxd3 f5! Black wants to take on e6.
Once we do so, our position will be more comfortable to play. 21.Nxf5 Rxe6 22.Rxe6 Bxe6=
6...0-0
215
7.Be3
A) 7.g4 and now, the best answer is 7...d5! applying the saying “lateral action, central reaction”. 8.e5
[8.Bg2 Nxe4 9.Nxe4 dxe4 10.0-0 Re8= Afek, Y – Heinz, A Pulvermuehle 2006] 8...Nfd7 9.Nxd5
[9.e6?! Ne5 10.exf7+ Rxf7‚ with good chances of attack.] 9...Nxe5 10.Bg2 Bc5
11.Bf4 [11.0-0 c6 12.Nb3 Bd6 13.Nf4 Qc7=] 11...c6! 12.Bxe5 Re8= As played in the game Ernst, S –
Giri, A Amsterdam 2012. The position is easier to play as Black because we will gain the advantage of
the bishop pair and also have the safer king.
B) 7.Bf4 Re8 8.Bd3 d5!
216
Again, the same reaction. 9.e5 [9.0-0 dxe4 10.Bxe4 Bd6 11.Bxd6 Nxe4=] 9...Bd6! Hitting the center.
10.Nf3 Nbd7 And we continue striking. 11.Qe2 Nxe5! 12.Nxe5 Qe7 13.0-0 Bxe5 14.Rfe1
Position after: 14.Rfe1
14...Bxf4! We sacrifice an exchange but the white rook will be locked up. 15.Qxe7 Rxe7 16.Rxe7 Be6!
17.Nb5 Kf8 18.Rxc7 a6= With equal chances.
7...d5!
217
8.e5
8.Nxd5 Nxd5 9.exd5 Qxd5 10.Qf3 [10.Nb5 Qc6=] 10...Qxf3 11.Nxf3 Rd8 12.Bd3 Nc6 13.a3 Be6=
8...c5! 9.exf6 Bxf6 10.Be2 cxd4 11.Bxd4
Walter, T – Turnet, J Bayern 2016
11...Bxd4N 12.Qxd4 Be6=
218
With a balanced position, although after the development of the knight to c6 and the advance of the pawn
to d4, the position is more comfortable for us to play as Black.
c) 5.f3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nge2 Be7 5.f3 exd4!
Position after: 5...exd4!
The idea is to lure the knight into the center so that we can hit it with ...d5. We’ve seen this theme before.
6.Nxd4
6.Qxd4 Now, there is no point in taking with the queen for White because we can attack her and gain time
with development, since there is no option to pin the knight with a bishop on b5. 6...Nc6 7.Qd1 0-0 8.Nf4
Ne5
219
To transfer to the kingside and then play ...c6 and ...d5. 9.Be2 Ng6 10.0-0 c6 Both to play ...d5 and ...b5.
11.a4 Qc7= With an equal position. Now, the plan is ...d5.
6...0-0
7.Be3
The most popular move.

7.Bc4 The aim is to avoid ...d5 but we will be able to gain time because the bishop is on c4. 7...c6!
220
A) 8.a4? serves to avoid ...b5 but not ...d5. 8...d5! 9.exd5 cxd5 10.Bb3 Re8 11.0-0 Bc5 12.Kh1 Nc6³
And White is already a bit worse.
B) 8.Bb3 b5 9.Bf4 a6!
An important move. We defend the b5-pawn so that we can play ...c5 and continue our expansion. 10.a3
c5 11.Nde2 c4 12.Ba2 Be6 The position is easier to play as Black. 13.Qd2 Nc6 14.Rd1 Qa5 15.0-0
Rfd8=
C) 8.Be3 b5 Spreading out on the queenside. 9.Bb3 b4 10.Na4 c5 We continue with our expansion!
11.Ne2 As tried in Perez Fonolleras, O – Guzman Maglaya, N Figueres 2016. 11...Nbd7N Transferring
the knight to the center.
221
Position after: 11...Nbd7N
12.0-0 Ne5 13.c3 a5= With a balanced position, although this is easier to play with the black pieces. We
can take advantage of the f1-a6 diagonal by playing ...Ba6.
7...d5!
8.e5
8.exd5 Bb4! To destroy the pawn structure. 9.Bc4 Bxc3+ 10.bxc3 Re8 11.Kf2 Nxd5 12.Bxd5 Qxd5=
222
As played in Sanchez Saez, F – Cuenca Jimenez, J Roquetas de Mar 2013. Black has an advantage, thanks
to their better pawn structure and the weakness of the white king.
8...Ne8
White must remove the knight because Black is threatening ...c5 and ...d4.
9.Nb3 c6!
We defend the pawn in the best possible way and now, we are ready to strike at the center with ...f6.
223
10.Bd3
as played in Hague, B – Shaw, J Sunningdale 2007.

10.Qd2 a5! 11.a4 Nd7 12.f4 Bb4³ Pacuszka, T – Vaulin, A Rowy 2000. Black has a slight advantage.
10...f6N
It is best to hit the center to remove the e5-pawn, so that we can develop our pieces more conveniently.
11.exf6 Bxf6 12.0-0 Nd7 13.Re1 Nd6³
And Black has a slight but comfortable advantage.
d) 5.g3 c6 6.a4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nge2 Be7 5.g3
We have reached the main line. White’s idea is to hold the center with as many pieces as possible in order
to maintain their space advantage.
5...c6!
224
In my opinion, this is the best decision. As we have seen previously, ...c6 serves both to expand along the
queenside with ...b5 and also to break in the center with ...d5.
6.a4
One of the options. The main move is 6.Bg2 which we’ll analyze in the next subchapter. With this move,
White avoids ...b5 but does not control the center, so Black can react with ...d5.
6...exd4! 7.Nxd4
7.Qxd4 d5!
225
Black is already prepared to play in this way. 8.exd5 [8.e5 Nfd7 9.e6 Nf6 10.exf7+ Kxf7 and to have the
king on f7 is not a problem for Black. 11.Bg2 Re8 12.0-0 Kg8=] 8...cxd5 9.Bg2 Nc6 10.Qd1 d4!
Sacrificing the pawn.
If White decides to capture, it will have to be in exchange for the g2-bishop. 11.Nb5 [11.Bxc6+ bxc6
12.Nxd4 0-0 13.0-0 Bg4 14.Qd3 Qd7© and Black has great compensation for the pawn, thanks to the
bishop pair and the weak light squares surrounding our opponent’s king.] 11...Bc5 12.Bf4 0-0 13.0-0 a6
14.Na3 Nd5³
As played in Skuhala, J – Jovanovic, Z Nova Gorica 2020. We have a slight advantage.
7...d5!
226
8.e5
8.exd5 is not problematic for us. 8...Nxd5 9.Bg2 Nxc3 10.bxc3 0-0 11.0-0 Re8= as in Musakaev, E –
Bocharov, D Khanty-Mansiysk 2011. The plan is to transfer the knight to c5.
8...Ng4! 9.e6
9.Bf4 g5 10.e6 Leaving the g4-knight defenseless. 10...h5! 11.exf7+ Kxf7ƒ
Position after: 11...Kxf7ƒ
And Black had the initiative in the game Bortnyk, O – Indjic, A Albena 2011.
9...Nf6 10.Bh3
227
10.exf7+ Kxf7 11.Bg2 Re8 12.0-0 a5 13.h3 Na6= with a balanced position as in Dvirnyy, D – Lazic, M
Otranto 2011.
10...0-0 11.0-0 Kh8=
Position after: 11...Kh8=
As played in the game Srbis, J – Jovanovic, Z Sibenik 2012. We can see that the position is balanced.
Now, the plan is to develop the pieces on the queenside, starting with the knight, which can travel to a6
and then to c7.
e) 5.g3 c6 6.Bg2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nge2 Be7 5.g3 c6 6.Bg2
228
Position after: 6.Bg2
The main move that serves to stop Black’s central reaction. However, this does not arrive in time to stop
Black’s queenside expansion.
6...b5!
Seizing the moment.
7.a3
7.0-0 Nbd7
8.h3 [8.a3 would transpose to the main line; 8.d5 cxd5 9.Nxd5 Nxd5 10.Qxd5 Rb8= with equality as in
Kennaugh, C – Redpath, J West Bromwich 2002.] 8...0-0 9.Be3 b4! 10.Nb1 This position was reached in
San Marco, B – Dorfman, J Paris 1990. 10...d5!N 11.exd5 Nxd5=
7...0-0
229
8.0-0
8.h3 a5 Continuing with the advance on the queenside. The aim is to expel the knight from c3. 9.Be3 Ba6
10.f4 This was seen in Ponomariov, R – Wiewiora, R Katowice 2017. 10...b4!N 11.dxe5 dxe5 12.Qxd8
Rxd8 13.Na4 Nbd7³ And Black is better.
8...Nbd7 9.h3 a5!
An important move.
Black expands on the queenside and tries to dislodge the knight from c3.
230
10.g4
A) 10.Be3 Ba6 Threatening ...b4. 11.b4 Qc7 12.f4 Nb6³ As played in Sorin, A – Felgaer, R Buenos
Aires 2003. The knight has a very strong square on c4 on which to install itself.
B) 10.f4 Bb7 11.Re1 b4! 12.Nb1 Re8 13.b3 as tried in Predke, A – Dzhumaev, M Izhevsk 2010. 13...c5N
14.d5 exf4 15.Nxf4 Ne5³
10...Ba6
Position after: 10...Ba6
Our idea is to play ...b4.
11.Ng3
Because of this position, John Shaw recommends this line in his book, as mentioned above.
11.b4 Bb7 The bishop was no longer doing anything on a6. 12.Rb1 axb4 13.axb4 as in Beliavsky, A –
Mokry, K Haifa 1989. 13...Nb6!N
231
Position after: 13...Nb6!N
Aiming for White’s weak c4-square. 14.Ng3 g6 15.Bh6 Re8= with an easier position to play for Black.
11...exd4!
This is my recommendation. The idea is to lure the queen to the center for a tactical reason.
12.Qxd4 b4 13.Nce2
A sad necessity.
13...bxa3!
Position after: 13...bxa3!
232
Improving upon the game Moiseenko, A – Caruana, F Dubai 2014. Here, you can see the idea behind
11...exd4. The b2-pawn is going to disappear and therefore the queen is misplaced on d4 because of the
threat of ...Bf6.
14.b3!N
Clearly the best move.

A) 14.Re1?! as in the game Jakubowski, K – Oratovsky, M Figueira da Foz 2018. 14...Nxg4!N
Position after: 14...Nxg4!N
Leaving the f6-square free for the bishop. 15.Rxa3 Nge5³ Black has a pleasant advantage.
B) 14.g5 seems problematic for Black but there’s a brilliant counter. 14...d5!!
Position after: 14...d5!!
233
White cannot take on f6. If our opponent does so, we will capture with the bishop and then on b2. 15.Rd1
Nxe4 16.Bxe4 Bc5! 17.Qd2 dxe4 18.Qxd7 White seems to be doing fine but after 18...Qb6! 19.Qf5 e3
their position just collapses. 20.fxe3 Bxe2 21.Nxe2 Qb5µ with a clear advantage. We are threatening
multiple pieces: the knight on e2, the pawn on b2 and the queen on f5 after taking on e3 with check.
14...Nxg4!
Threatening ...Bf6.
Position after: 14...Nxg4!
15.Qd2 Nge5 16.Nf5
234
16.Rxa3 Bxe2 17.Qxe2 Ng6=
16...a4
Getting rid of the pawn.
17.Rxa3 axb3 18.cxb3 g6 19.Nxe7+ Qxe7=
Position after: 19...Qxe7=
With a balanced position, although Black’s position is more pleasant to play. We have an extra pawn and
our king is safer.
4.Nge2 has become the third most popular option and as I indicated, is even the recommendation of
Grandmaster John Shaw, so this gives us an idea of how important it is to be well-prepared against it.
White’s main idea is to continue with g3, Bg2 and 0-0. Once they succeed in doing so, their plan is to
expand on the kingside. This means that Black has to play energetically and it is best to delay castling by
playing ...c6. In this way, we will threaten two things: breaking in the center with ...d5 and expanding on
the queenside with ...b5. The point is that White can’t stop both threats.
The main way to play with White is with Bg2, which allows ...b5. Then we will continue our expansion
with ...a5. It is important to try and dislodge the knight from c3.
In any case, we can see that Black not only has mechanisms to equalize, but in most lines, can fight for a
slight advantage – it is our opponent who has to be very careful.
235
Chapter 8
4.dxe5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5
Chapter Guide
Chapter 8 – 4.dxe5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8

a) 6.f3 and 6.Bd2
b) 6.Be3
c) 6.f4
d) 6.Nf3 Bd6 – Various 7th Moves
e) 6.Nf3 Bd6 7.Be3
f) 6.Bg5
g) 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6 fxe6 – Various 8th Moves
h) 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.f3 Nc6 9.Be3 Bd6 – Various 10th Moves
i) 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.f3 Nc6 9.Be3 Bd6 10.Nh3
a) 6.f3 and 6.Bd2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5
236
4.dxe5
We have reached one of the most important chapters of the book: it can be seen that this line is at odds
with the other lines. This capture is the second most popular option according to the database and I would
say, at the amateur level, the most frequent line. The idea for White is clear: to exchange queens and
eliminate the possibility of castling for Black. However, Black has nothing to fear because without queens
on the board, the king is not compromised by staying in the center.
4...dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8
Here, we will analyze two very unusual options: 6.f3 and 6.Bd2.
Position after: 5...Kxd8
237
6.Bd2
A strange square for the bishop because it will block White’s own rook when White castles.
6.f3 It is usual to play like this once the bishop has developed to c4. Now, Black can play ...Be6 without
any problems. 6...Be6 7.Be3 looks to castle long. 7...Nbd7 Besides aiming to exchange bishops on c5, our
idea is to play ...c6 and hide the king on c7, a very safe square.
A) 8.Nge2 Having played f3, the g1-knight does not have a quick route to enter the game. The idea is to
move it to the center via c1. 8...Bc5
238
A1) 9.Kf2 Bxe3+ 10.Kxe3 c6= with total equality. We have a very healthy pawn structure and the
pieces are placed on good squares. Now, one idea is to put the king on c7 and then transfer the knight
from f6 to d6. In this way, we can defend the central pawn by ...f6 so that our d7-knight is free to move.
A2) 9.Bxc5 Nxc5 10.Nc1 c6 11.Nd3 Nfd7= as played in Sax, G – Nevednichy, V Bowl 2013. We are
preparing to play ...f6 and ...Kc7, obtaining a good position. As we will observe throughout this
chapter, our knight on c5 is more active than White’s c3-knight because we have very good control of
the d5-square.
B) 8.0-0-0 c6 9.g3 Kc7 10.Bh3 Bc5!= Taking advantage of the fact that if the bishop is captured on c5,
the knight will defend the bishop on e6, as was played in the game Okhotnik, V – Rat, D Sarospatak
2000.
6...Bd6
The idea is to have the possibility of defending the f7-pawn with the king on e7, in case it is attacked.
7.0-0-0
7.Bc4, as tried in Nolsoe, E – Khamatgaleev, A Presov 2000. 7...Ke7N We could also have played 7...Be6
but I don’t think Black needs to do so. 8.Nge2 c6 Readying ...b5. 9.a4 Nbd7 With the idea of ...Nc5 and
...Be6.
239
10.f3 Nc5 11.Ng3 g6= We are now ready to play ...Be6 and ...a5 by ensuring the c5-square for our knight.
7...Nbd7
In order to play ...c6 in better conditions. White now has several choices.
8.f3
A) 8.Nge2?! A very questionable decision because now, we will be able to win the bishop pair. 8...Ng4!
9.Be1 Bc5 10.f3 Nf2 11.Bxf2 Bxf2³
240
Position after: 11...Bxf2³
With the plan of playing ...c6 and ...Ke7 in order to be able to move the knight.
B) 8.Nf3 does not seem problematic for Black. 8...Ke7 9.Nh4 g6 We are ready to play ...c6. 10.g3 Ng4
Position after: 10...Ng4
Seizing the moment. 11.Nd5+ Kf8 12.Be1 Ngf6= with a balanced position.
C) 8.g3 c6 9.f4 as in Reprintsev, A – Pasalic, H Moscow 2013. 9...Ng4N
241
Position after: 9...Ng4N
The aim is to misplace our opponent’s knight. 10.Nh3 Ke7 11.Be2 Ndf6= with a balanced position,
having managed to activate our pieces.
D) 8.Bc4 Ke7 A great square for our king. 9.Nf3 c6 Threatening ...b5. 10.a4 Nc5 A vey important
square for the knight. 11.Ng5 Ne6= And we have it all under control.
8...c6
The move we want to make. We need to have 9.Bh6 under control but we have nothing to fear.
9.Bh6
242
A) 9.Nh3 Ke7 10.Nf2 b5= and the position is more comfortable to play for Black.
B) 9.g4 doesn’t seem dangerous because g5 could be answered with ...Nh5. 9...Nc5 10.Nge2 Kc7
11.Ng3 g6= and we have everything well-defended.
Position after: 11...g6=
Now, one idea is to exploit the weakness of the f4-square with ...Ne6.
9...Bf8! 10.Be3 Ke8
To have the f7-pawn defended. The plan is to play ...Bc5 because we should exchange the dark-squared
bishop to make d4 more accessible.
243
11.Nge2
11.g4 Bc5 12.Bd2 Ke7 to continue with ...b5.
13.Nge2 [13.g5 Nh5 14.Nge2 g6 15.Ng3 Nf4= with all the pieces well-placed.] 13...b5 14.Ng3 [14.g5
Ne8=] 14...g6 With the idea to transfer the knight from f6 to e6. 15.g5 Ne8 16.h4 Ng7 17.h5 Rd8= With a
balanced position, although more comfortable to play with the black pieces.
Position after: 17...Rd8=
The g7-knight will be placed on e6 so it can jump to f4 or d4, and the d7-knight will aim to move to c4.
11...Bc5 12.Bd2 b5=
244
The idea is to place the king on e7, the knight on b6, the bishop on e6 and create good counterplay on the
queenside by expanding with the pawns.
b) 6.Be3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Be3
A better option than 6.Bd2, with the idea of castling long.
6...Bb4!
245
A good move putting the e4-pawn under pressure.
7.0-0-0+
A) 7.Bd3 doesn’t look too dangerous, and we can develop our pieces without any difficulties. 7...Be6
A1) 8.Nf3 Nbd7 9.Ng5 Considering the pawn structure that results, it is not a problem that our bishop
pair is eliminated. We’re actually well-prepared to deliver both. 9...Bxc3+! damaging the pawn
structure. 10.bxc3 Ke7 11.Nxe6 Kxe6 Our knights have good squares so they are not inferior to
White’s bishops, and we also have a better pawn structure. 12.f3 Ne8 bringing it to the center. 13.Ke2
Nd6 14.a4 a5= With a balanced position.
246
Due to White’s poor queenside structure, the c4-square is weak and we want to exploit it by aiming to
place a knight via ...Nb6. Then we’ll play ...f6 and ...Rhd8.
A2) 8.Nge2 To play f4. 8...Nbd7 9.f4 Ng4! to take on f4, and then having control of the e5-square for
our knight. 10.Bd2 exf4 11.Nxf4 [11.Bxf4 f6 12.Nd4 Re8³ and control of the e5-square together with
the weakness of the e4-pawn give Black an advantage.] 11...c6 12.Nxe6+ fxe6 13.Rf1 Ke8=
Followed by ...Nge5 with great control of the position.

B) 7.Nge2 Looking for quick counterplay.
Position after: 7.Nge2
B1) 7...Nxe4?! is the move we’d like to make but it’s not a sensible idea. 8.0-0-0+ Nd6 as in Weynjes,
T – Katranov, M Maastricht 2014. 9.Nd5!N A great move. 9...Ba5 10.Bg5+ Kd7 11.f4!
247
Position after: 11.f4!
White has much better development. 11...h6 12.Bh4 exf4 13.b4 Bb6 14.c4² White has ample
compensation for the two pawns, thanks to their great development and the horrible situation of our
king.
B2) 7...Be6!N We have to play this way.
B2.1) 8.a3 Ba5 Maintaining the threat. 9.f3 Nbd7 We want to continue with ...c6 and ...Ke7. 10.0-0-0
c6 11.g4 b5 12.g5 Ne8= And the position seems more pleasant for Black to play, thanks to the good
counterplay that we will be able to create on the queenside. Now, the idea is to play ...Kc7, ...Nd6 and
...Bb6.
B2.2) 8.0-0-0+ Nbd7 9.h3 c6
248
10.f4 [10.a3 Ba5 11.f4 exf4 12.Bxf4 Re8 The king on c8 is going to be very safe and we have better
pawn structure, so our position is fine. 13.e5 Nd5 14.Bg5+ Kc8 15.Ne4 Bc7! 16.Nd6+ Bxd6 17.exd6
Nc5= And the d6-pawn is very weak.] 10...Kc7! 11.g4 [11.fxe5 Nxe5 12.a3 Bd6 13.Nd4 Rad8= and
e5 is a great square for our knight.] 11...Bc5 12.Bd2 Ne8=
Position after: 12...Ne8=
A maneuver that is becoming standard: to be able to transfer the knight to the center and have the
possibility of shoring up the central pawn with ...f6.
7...Nbd7
249
8.Nd5
This was Baeumler, I – Lowitz, T Greifswald 2001.

A) 8.f3 and we can destroy the queenside structure. 8...Bxc3 9.bxc3 Ke7 10.g4 Ne8 11.c4! preventing
...Nd6.
Position after: 11.c4!
However, the pawn on c4 limits the light-squared bishop and, in addition, as the pawn is closer to our
territory, it will be more vulnerable to attack. 11...b6 12.Ne2 Nd6 13.Nc3 [13.Ng3 g6 14.h4 a5=
Preparing ...Ba6.] 13...c6 14.h4 Nb7!=
250
Position after: 14...Nb7!=
Taking over control of c5. The plan is ...Ndc5 and ...Be6.

B) 8.Bc4 Bxc3 9.bxc3
Position after: 9.bxc3
Here, we have two very reasonable options.

B1) 9...Ng4!? We can play like this, sacrificing the f7-pawn. 10.Bxf7 Nxe3 11.fxe3 Ke7 The pawn is
compensated by White’s very deteriorated structure. 12.Bb3 a5 13.a4 Ra6= Bringing the rook into the
game.
251
Position after: 13...Ra6=
14.Rd5 To provoke ...c6 and cut off the passage of the a6-rook. [14.Nf3 Rd6=] 14...c6 15.Rd1 Nc5
Black has nothing to fear. 16.Nf3 Nxe4=
B2) 9...Nxe4 We can take the pawn. 10.Bxf7 Rf8 To take on f2. 11.Bb3 Nxf2 12.Bxf2 Rxf2 13.Nf3
Ke7 14.Rhe1 Kf6=
Position after: 14...Kf6=
We have everything defended plus we have a very active rook on f2. Now the plan is to play ...a5, so
that we can develop the other rook to a6.
8...Bd6N
With this move Black prepares ...Ke7 and ...c6, after the knight on d5 has been exchanged.
252
Position after: 8...Bd6N
9.f3
A) 9.Bg5 It’s not concerning to have doubled pawns on f6. In return, we’re going to retain the bishop
pair. 9...h6 10.Bxf6+ Nxf6 11.Nxf6 gxf6 12.Ne2 Ke7 13.Ng3 Bc5= with an equal position.
B) 9.Nxf6 Nxf6
Position after: 9...Nxf6
B1) 10.f3 doesn’t put any pressure on us. 10...Be6 11.g4 Ke7 12.Ne2 h5! [12...Bxa2?? We have to be
careful not to fall into the trap. 13.Rxd6! Kxd6 14.b3±.] 13.g5 Nd7 14.h4 Rhd8= With the idea to
continue with ...g6, ...b6 and ...Bc5.
253
B2) 10.Bc4 Ng4! 11.Bxf7 [11.Bg5+ f6 12.Bh4 Ke7 13.h3 Nh6= for ...Be6 and ...Nf7 with equality.]
11...Rf8 12.Bd5 Nxf2 [12...Rxf2!?] 13.Bxf2 Rxf2
Position after: 13...Rxf2
We have active pieces and the bishop pair, what more could we ask for? 14.Nf3 Rxg2 15.Nxe5 Ke7=
With equality, although the bishop pair and the better pawn structure makes it easier to play as Black.
9...Nxd5 10.exd5 f5
Gaining space, then looking to continue with ...Nf6 and to move the king to f7.
11.g4
254
A) 11.Nh3 Nf6 12.Nf2 b6 to activate our bishop on b7 and control the c5-square. 13.c4 Ke7 14.Bd3
Kf7= with a good position.
B) 11.Ne2 Nf6 12.c4 b6 13.Nc3 Bd7 14.Bd3 Ke7 15.Rhe1 Kf7= with equality.
11...fxg4 12.fxg4 Nf6 13.h3 h5=
Position after: 13...h5=
Giving play to our rook as 14.g5 would be a poor decision for White because of 14...Ne4.
Our plan is to place the king on e7 and then play ...Bd7 to allow the a8-rook to come into play.
c) 6.f4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.f4
255
One of White’s most aggressive options against which we have to be well-prepared. In exchange for the
activity of the white pieces, we will obtain a better pawn structure (the e4-pawn will be isolated) and good
control over the e5-square.
6...Nbd7!
The best way for Black to hold the center.
7.Nf3
A) 7.fxe5 is not a problem for us. 7...Nxe5 8.Bf4 is the independent way to play. [8.Nf3 Bd6 transposes
to 7.Nf3; 8.Bg5 c6 9.0-0-0+ Kc7 10.Nf3 Bd6 transposes also to 7.Nf3.] 8...Bd6 9.0-0-0 Ke7 The plan is
...Re8 to hide the king on f8.
10.Bg3 Bg4 11.Be2 as essayed in Relange, E – Chomet, P Chambery 1994. 11...Rhe8N 12.Nf3 Kf8
13.Rhe1 a6= Avoiding Nb5. We have a better pawn structure and the e5-square is under control, so our
position is easier to play.
B) 7.Bc4 Bb4!
256
Position after: 7...Bb4!
The best defense is a good attack. 8.Bxf7 [8.Bd2 Bxc3 is best, to simplify the position. 9.Bxc3 Nxe4
10.Bxe5 Nxe5 11.fxe5 Ke7= We have a better structure so our position is more comfortable.] 8...Nxe4
9.Nge2 exf4 10.Bxf4 Rf8 11.Bd5 And we reach Vorotnikov, V – Pelletier, Y Biel 2012.
Here, we have an excellent move. 11...Rxf4!N to capture on c3. 12.Nxf4 Nxc3 13.bxc3 Bxc3+ 14.Kf2
Bxa1 15.Ne6+ Ke7 16.Rxa1 Nf6 17.Nxc7 Rb8= With a better pawn structure in the endgame.
7...Bd6
257
8.fxe5
The main move.

A) 8.Ng5 is not a problem. 8...Ke7 9.Bc4 Rf8 and now that everything is defended, this is the moment to
play ...c6. 10.0-0 c6=
B) 8.f5 White’s decision to eliminate the central tension favors us. 8...h6 9.Be3 a6 avoiding Nb5 and
readying ...b5. 10.Bc4 Ke7 11.a4 b6 12.Nd5+ Kf8= Following the game Chepukaitis, G – Feofanov, D
St Petersburg 2004.
258
We are ready to play ...Bb7 and, at the same time, we attack the e4-pawn, which is not so easy for our
opponent to defend.
C) 8.Bc4 Ke7 9.0-0 [9.g3 Re8 10.0-0 Kf8=] 9...c6 Readying ...b5. 10.a4 As in Riff, V – Jovanovic, Z
chess.com 2020. 10...exf4!N To obtain control of the e5-square. 11.e5 The only critical move. 11...Nxe5
No fear! 12.Re1 Nfd7
Position after: 12...Nfd7
We’ve been able to perfectly defend our central knight and we’re going to keep the extra pawn. 13.Bxf4
f6 14.Nd4 Nf8! In addition to providing activity to the c8-bishop by controlling the white knight’s jump
to f5, it’s favorable to transfer the knight to g6. 15.Ne4 Bc7=
Position after: 15...Bc7=
259
White has more activity but I don’t believe that the pawn is sufficiently compensated – Black’s position
seems favorable.
D) 8.g3 Defensive play allows us to activate our pieces and quickly attack the center. 8...Re8 9.Bd3 exf4
Position after: 9...exf4
10.Bxf4 [10.gxf4 Nxe4! Breaking the pawn structure. 11.Bxe4 f5 12.Ne5 fxe4 13.Nf7+ Ke7 14.Nxd6
Kxd6³ We have the advantage, thanks to our extra pawn. We will follow with ...c6 and ...Kc7.] 10...Ne5
11.Nxe5 Bxe5 12.0-0-0 Bg4 Developing all the pieces.
13.Rd2 [13.Bb5+ is not a problem for Black. 13...Nd7 14.Bxd7 Bxd7 threatening ...Bxc3. 15.Rd3 Bxc3!
16.Rhd1 Re7 17.Rxc3 Rc8= With a balanced position. White has pressure but is compromised by their
260
pawn structure.] 13...c6 14.Bc4+ Kc7 15.Bxf7 Bxf4 16.gxf4 Re7 17.Bc4 Nxe4= With a better pawn
structure.
8...Nxe5
9.Bg5
9.Nb5? A mistaken pawn sacrifice. 9...Nxe4 10.Nxd6 cxd6 11.Be2 Be6³ With advantage for Black as in
Jamilov, R – Khismatullin, D Ufa 2012. We can continue with ...f6 and ...Ke7.
9...c6!
261
To put the king on c7.
10.0-0-0
10.Be2 is very slow. 10...Kc7 11.Bxf6 gxf6 In exchange for our inferior structure, we have obtained the
bishop pair and the open g-file. 12.Nd4 [12.0-0 Nxf3+ 13.Rxf3 Be5µ with a clear advantage.] 12...Rg8³
With a comfortable position.
10...Kc7 11.Be2
11.Nd4 Threatening Nb5. 11...Ne8! stops the threat and serves to intensify our control of the e5-square
with ...f6. 12.Be2 f6 13.Be3 This was Radovic, J – Todorovic, K Kragujevac 2010. 13...Ng6N
Position after: 13...Ng6N
As the e8-knight is not well-placed, the idea is to install the bishop on e5 so that the knight can transfer to
d6. With this, Black’s position is more comfortable to play, thanks to their superior pawn structure.
11...h6!
262
Provoking White to exchange on f6 to gain the advantage of the bishop pair.
12.Bxf6
A) 12.Bf4?! Nd3+³
B) 12.Bh4 Nxf3 13.gxf3 Bf4+! 14.Kb1 Be6= and the position is objectively in balance.
Black has an easier position though, thanks to our greater control of the weak squares. Now, the plan is
to play ...Nh5 with the aim of heading to f4.
C) 12.Be3 Neg4! 13.Bd4 [13.Rxd6 Nxe3 14.Rd2 Re8=] 13...Re8 14.h3 Nxe4! Taking advantage of the
fact that the e2-bishop is helpless. 15.Nxe4 Rxe4 16.Bd3 Rxd4 17.Nxd4 Nf2 18.Rhf1
263
Position after: 18.Rhf1
18...Bf4+! [18...Nxd1 19.Rxf7+ Kb6 20.Kxd1©] 19.Kb1 Be3³ with advantage, thanks to the bishop
pair.
12...gxf6
Now, the plan is to exchange knights and set the bishop on e5.
Position after: 12...gxf6
13.Nd4
A) 13.Nh4 Ng6 14.Nf5 Be5³

B) 13.Rhf1 Nxf3 14.Rxf3 Be5³
264
13...Bd7
Stopping White’s idea.
14.Rhf1
14.Nf5 Bb4 15.Rhf1 h5³
Position after: 14.Rhf1
And we have reached Agdestein, S – Mihajlov, Fagernes 2015.
14...Rag8N 15.g3 h5!
For ...h4.
16.Rxf6 Be7
265
17.Rff1
17.Rf2 Is not the optimal square for the rook. 17...Bg5+! 18.Kb1 Be3 19.Rf6 Bxd4 20.Rxd4 h4µ with a
clear advantage because our rooks will attack on the kingside.
17...h4
18.Nf5
18.Nf3 Ng4 19.Rd3 [19.Nxh4 Bg5+! by keeping the king away. 20.Kb1 Bxh4 21.Rf4 Bg5µ] 19...hxg3
20.hxg3 b5µ
266
Position after: 20...b5µ
Next is most probably ...Bc5.
18...Bg5+ 19.Kb1 hxg3 20.hxg3 Rh2³
Position after: 20...Rh2³
You can hardly tell that Black is a pawn down. Black’s piece activity, the bishop pair and the better
structure clearly compensate and therefore, Black has an advantage.
d) 6.Nf3 Bd6 – Various 7th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Nf3
267
An aggressive option.
6...Bd6
The best way to defend the pawn. Our idea is to continue with ...Ke7. White has several options.
7.Bg5
A) 7.Ng5 is not dangerous. 7...Ke7 8.Bc4 Rf8
Position after: 8...Rf8
Once we have everything defended, it’s time to play ...c6 to expand on the queenside.
268
A1) 9.f4? The most aggressive but a bad move. 9...exf4 10.e5 Bxe5 11.0-0
Position after: 11.0-0
In exchange for the two sacrificed pawns, White has gained a lot of activity and is preparing to pin our
bishop. 11...Be6! Great move. 12.Nxe6 fxe6 13.Bxf4 Bxf4 14.Rxf4 Nbd7 15.Re1 e5³ following the
game Barua, D – Juswanto, D Bali 2000. White does not have sufficient compensation for the pawn.
Position after: 15...e5³
A2) 9.0-0 c6= with equal chances as in Strzemiecki, Z – Vachier Lagrave, M Warsaw 2010.
B) 7.Bc4 is the main move. 7...Ke7 [7...Be6!? is also possible.] International Master Vladimir Barsky, in
his book “The Modern Philidor Defence” says that this move is doubtful because after 8.Bg5 c6, which
is the most played option, White ends up with an advantage. He’s right, but Black has a great answer
here. 8.Bg5 Nbd7!
269
Position after: 8...Nbd7!
The best option which does not appear in Vladimir Barsky’s book.
B1) 9.Nd2 h6 10.Bh4 Nb6 11.Bb3 [11.f3 Bb4= followed by ...Be6.] 11...g5! 12.Bg3 Nh5=
With a balanced position. Our aim is to continue with ...f6 and ...Be6.
B2) 9.0-0-0 Nb6 10.Bb3 h6 11.Bxf6+ [11.Bh4 Bg4= with equality as in Abreu Delgado, A – Alvarez, J
Holguin 2002. We continue with ...g5 and ...Nh5.] 11...Kxf6 12.Rd3 Be6
270
13.Nb5 Bxb3 14.axb3 Rhd8 15.Rhd1 Ke6= And we have everything under control.
B3) 9.Nd5+ Ke8 10.Bxf6 [10.Nxf6+ gxf6 11.Be3 Nc5 puts pressure on the e4-pawn. 12.Nd2 Ke7
13.f3 h5= Obtaining space on the kingside and avoids g4.] 10...Nxf6 11.Ng5 [11.Nxf6+ gxf6 12.Nh4
Be6=] 11...Ng4! Intending ...f6.
B3.1) 12.Nxf7?? Spectacular but a terrible decision. 12...Kxf7 13.Nxc7+ Ke7 14.Nxa8 Bd7–+
271
Position after: 14...Bd7–+
We will win the a8-knight and our advantage will be decisive, thanks to our two minor pieces against
the rook and the bishop pair.
B3.2) 12.f3 Nh6 13.Ne3 [13.0-0-0?! c6! leaving the bishop defenseless but White has no way of
taking advantage of it. 14.Nb6 axb6 15.Rxd6 Ke7 16.Rhd1 f6³
Position after: 16...f6³
With a better position for us.] 13...c6 14.Ke2 f6 15.Nh3 Bxh3 16.gxh3 Bc5= We have a better pawn
structure in the endgame.
7...Be6
272
To play ...Nbd7.
8.0-0-0
The most powerful way to play.

8.Nd5 Generally, we don’t need to worry about doubling our pawns on f6. 8...Nbd7 9.Nxf6 as tried in
Lyrberg, P – Bezold, M Budapest 1993. 9...gxf6N [9...Nxf6 10.Nh4! and I find it easier to play with
White because the knight will reach f5, putting pressure on g7.] 10.Be3 Bc5=
Position after: 10...Bc5=
Exchanging bishops benefits us, as we will install the knight on c5, a great square. In addition, our light-
squared bishop is more active than White’s.
273
8...Nbd7
Here, White has many moves that can be considered.
9.Bb5
A) 9.Bxf6+?! White’s surrender of the bishop on f6 will always benefit us. 9...gxf6 10.Nh4 Transferring
to f5, a good square for this knight.
Position after: 10.Nh4
It is best for us that this knight can’t attack anything from this square. 10...Bc5 We have removed the
bishop from d6 so that it is not attacked by the knight from f5 and we are ready to play ...c6 and ...Kc7.
274
11.f3 c6 12.Nf5 Kc7³
Position after: 12...Kc7³
With a better position for Black as in Krstic, P – Damljanovic, B Kragujevac 2010. We have the bishop
pair and decent chances of attack on the queenside with ...b5 and ...a5.
B) 9.Nd2 threatening Nc4, so we need to react quickly. 9...h6! 10.Bh4 g5 11.Bg3 This was Rodmacq, C
– Argandona Riveiro, I San Sebastian 2015. 11...Bb4!N
Position after: 11...Bb4!N
Once the f6-knight is not pinned, it’s time to strike back by attacking the center. 12.Nc4 Bxc3 13.bxc3
Nxe4 14.Nxe5 Nxg3 15.hxg3 Ke7= with total equality.
C) 9.Nb5 This jump is always designed to eliminate the d6-bishop and thus deprive us of the bishop pair.
However, we don’t have to worry about it here because in return, we’ll obtain significant counterplay
275
from the open file, and our e5-pawn will be much better protected. 9...Ke7
C1) 10.Nd2 h6 11.Bh4 g5! Using the same plan that we have seen in the 9.Nd2 line. 12.Bg3 Rhc8
anticipating White’s plan. 13.f3 Looking for Nc4. 13...a6=
As in Royset, P – Argandona Riveiro, I Helsingor 2013. We can continue with ...b5. It is also possible
to play ...Nh5.
C2) 10.Nxd6 cxd6 11.Bb5 Rhd8 12.Nd2 h6! Generally, when the white knight goes to d2, we must
play in this fashion because the bishop does not have a good retreat. 13.Bh4 g5 14.Bg3 a6 15.Bxd7
Rxd7 16.f3 Rc8ƒ
276
Position after: 16...Rc8ƒ
And we have reached the World Champion’s game Vallejo Pons, F – Carlsen, M Sao Paulo/Bilbao
2012. Thanks to the pawn structure, our pieces are more active. Our c8-rook has great activity and now
the plan is ...Nh5 followed by ...f5.
9...Kc8
Position after: 9...Kc8
Intending ...a6 and ...Nc5.
10.Bxf6
277
10.Rhe1 a6 11.Ba4 Nc5 12.Bxf6 gxf6 13.Bb3 Nxb3+ 14.axb3 Rg8³ with advantage to Black because of
the bishop pair as played in Andriasian, Z – Hasangatin, R Internet 2006.
10...Nxf6 11.Ng5 a6
12.Be2
A) 12.Nxe6?! is not the best move. 12...axb5! We have ample counterplay on the open file. 13.Nxg7 b4
14.Nd5 Nxd5 15.Rxd5 Rg8 16.Nf5 Rxg2ƒ with a great initiative for us as Black.
Position after: 16...Rxg2ƒ
278
B) 12.Ba4 Bc4 Preparing ...h6 and ...b5, without allowing White to take on e6. 13.Bb3 Bxb3 14.axb3
Rf8=
Position after: 14...Rf8=
Keeping everything under control as played in the game Moiseenko, A – Malaniuk, V Ordzhonikidze
2001.
12...Bc5 13.Rhf1 c6=
Position after: 13...c6=
As in King, D – Wahls, M Luzern 1989. The idea is ...Kc7 and ...b5 without worrying about being
captured on e6 as we may obtain counterplay on the f-file.
e) 6.Nf3 Bd6 7.Be3

279
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Nf3 Bd6 7.Be3
is the recommendation of Grandmaster Francisco Vallejo Pons in an explanatory video about this defense
on an online platform.
7...Ke7 8.0-0-0
Position after: 8.0-0-0
8...Be6
Here, White has several lines to choose from but none are dangerous for Black.
8...Ng4?! A standard idea but here it turns out not to give very good results. 9.Bg5+! f6 as I played in
Gonzalez Pereira, A – Trigo Urquijo, S Euskadi 2018. 10.Nd5+!N is a good check, the idea being that it
will not be simple to expel the knight with ...c6 because the d6-bishop would be helpless. 10...Kf7 11.Bh4
Be6
280
12.Nd2 Heading to c4. 12...Rc8 In order to remove the bishop from d6. 13.h3 Nh6 14.g4 Nd7! 15.Nc4
Bc5 16.Na5! A great knight maneuver. 16...Rab8 17.Nb3!² And the position is much more pleasant for
White.
9.h3
A) 9.Nd5+ Bxd5! 10.exd5 This was the correspondence game Strautins, V – Koegler, K ICCF email
2010. 10...Ng4N 11.Bg5+ f6 12.Bh4 h5! Gaining space before our knight goes to h6. 13.h3 Nh6 14.Bd3
g5 15.Bg3 Nd7=
281
And although White has a pair of bishops, the dark-squared bishop doesn’t look great, so the position is
more comfortable for us to play as Black.
B) 9.Nd2 as tried in Goiria Eguidazu, J – Fernandez Rivera, I Erandio 2014. 9...Ng4!N 10.Nd5+
[10.Bg5+ f6 11.Bh4 Bc5 12.f3 Ne3= to eliminate the bishop on f1.] 10...Bxd5 11.exd5 h5 There’s no
hurry to take on e3. 12.Be2 Nd7=
Once we complete our minor piece development, we are ready to continue with ...Nxe3.
C) 9.Ng5 The most aggressive move for White but leads to a very equal endgame. 9...Ng4! 10.Nxe6
Nxe3
282
C1) 11.Nxc7?? is a losing move. 11...Nxd1 12.N3d5+ Kd8! 13.Nxa8 Nxf2 14.Rg1 Nxe4–+ with a
material advantage.
C2) 11.Rxd6 is a good try for White. 11...Kxd6 12.Ng5 [12.Nxg7?? Rg8 13.Nb5+ Kc6µ] 12...f6
13.Nf7+ Ke6! 14.Nxh8 Nxf1 15.Rxf1 Na6 16.Rd1 Rxh8= With a totally equal endgame.
C3) 11.Rd3 fxe6 [11...Kxe6!? is also possible. 12.Rxe3 c6 13.Bc4+ Ke7 14.Rd1 Threatening Bxf7.
14...Bc7 15.Red3 a6
To play ...b5 with more strength. 16.a4 b5 17.Bb3 Ra7= With the idea of ...Ba5 followed by ...Rd7
leading to a comfortable position for Black.] 12.Rxe3 Bc5 13.Rg3 g6 14.Nd1 Nd7=
283
With a balanced position as played in Quesada Perez, L – Plat, V Marianske Lazne 2020.
9...Nbd7
To exchange the dark-squared bishop on c5.
10.Nd5+
This was Brandner, S – Vaulin, A Oberwart 1997.

10.Ng5 Bc5! 11.Bxc5+ [11.Nxe6? is a bad idea. 11...Bxe3+ 12.fxe3 fxe6! is the best way to control the
d5-square.
284
Position after: 12...fxe6!
13.Be2 Nc5 14.Bf3 a5µ With a clear advantage, as played in Mousseri, D – Khachiyan, M San Diego
2014. Our plan is ...c6 and ...b5.] 11...Nxc5 12.Nd5+ [12.Nxe6 Nxe6 13.Bc4 c6=] 12...Nxd5 13.exd5 Bf5
14.g4 Bg6 15.Bg2 Kd6 is an excellent square for the king. 16.Rhe1 a5=
And although there is equality, the black pieces are more active and better-placed to face the endgame.
10...Ke8N
285
Position after: 10...Ke8N
11.Ng5
11.Nxf6+ Nxf6 12.Bd3 Nd7! Intending ...f6 and ...Bc5. 13.Ng5 Bc5 14.Bxc5 Nxc5 15.Nxe6 Nxe6
16.Bc4 Ke7=
11...Nxd5 12.exd5 Bf5 13.g4
13.Bd3 Bxd3 14.Rxd3 h6 15.Ne4 f5 16.Nxd6+ cxd6= and Black’s position has more potential.
13...Bg6
286
14.Bg2
14.Bd3 with the idea of taking control of the e4-square for the knight. 14...Bxd3 15.Rxd3 h5! 16.Rdd1
[16.Re1 hxg4 17.hxg4 Rh4 and now, we will gain ample counterplay on the open file. 18.f3 f6 19.Ne4
Ke7= To continue with ...Rah8.] 16...b5! 17.Ne4 f6= With a balanced position. The aim is to continue
with ...Ke7 and to expand on the queenside with ...a5.
14...Ke7
15.Rhe1
15.Ne4 Bxe4! 16.Bxe4 Bc5 17.d6+ To activate the light-squared bishop. [17.Rhe1 Bxe3+ 18.Rxe3 Kd6=]
17...cxd6 18.Bxb7 Rab8
287
Position after: 18...Rab8
19.Bg2 [19.Bd5 Bxe3+ 20.fxe3 Nf6 21.Bb3 h6 22.Rhf1 a5= intending ...Rb4 and ...Rhc8 with a totally
equal endgame.] 19...Bxe3+ 20.fxe3 h5 21.g5 f5 22.gxf6+ Nxf6= With the idea of playing ...g5.
15...h5
16.f4
16.Be4 Bxe4 17.Nxe4 hxg4 18.hxg4 Rh2= with good activity for our pieces.
16...exf4 17.Bxf4+ Kf8
288
Our king is very safe on f8 and we are going to activate the h8-rook.
18.Bxd6+ cxd6 19.Be4
19.Ne6+?! is a poor move. 19...fxe6 20.dxe6 Ne5 21.Rxd6 Ke7
Activating the most important piece in the endgame, the king. 22.Rd2 hxg4! 23.Rxe5 gxh3 24.Bxb7 Rad8³
Thanks to the h3-pawn, we have the advantage.
19...Rh6!=
Position after: 19...Rh6!=

289
We have everything defended and now our idea is to install a knight on e5, followed by ...Re8.
f) 6.Bg5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Bg5
One of the main options and recommended by Grandmaster Alexander Khalifman in his book “Opening
for White According to Anand – Vol.4”.
This is similar to the 6.Be3-line, covered in subchapter ‘b’. However, the bishop is more active on g5.
6...Nbd7!
Position after: 6...Nbd7!
In my opinion, this move is the best response Here, White has many options.
7.Bc4
A) 7.f4 Although this seems like an active move, it doesn’t give us trouble. 7...h6! 8.Bxf6+ gxf6 9.fxe5
[9.Bc4 Rh7=] 9...fxe5= and in the long term, the position will be favorable for Black, thanks to the
bishop pair.
B) 7.Nf3 Bb4 8.0-0-0 Bxc3 9.bxc3 Ke7 10.Nh4 g6= as in Belov, V – Ponkratov, P Moscow 2009.
290
White has the bishop pair but a poor pawn structure on the queenside. Now, the plan is ...h6 followed by
...Nb6.
C) 7.0-0-0 is possibly the most critical way to play. 7...c6 intending ...Kc7.
C1) 8.f4? h6 9.Bxf6+ gxf6 10.Nf3 exf4!µ This was Kurilin, A – Sadikhov, U Rilsk 2017. Even if we
have tripled pawns, we have an extra pawn, a couple of bishops and better squares for our pieces. The
plan is ...Bc5 and ...Ke7.
C2) 8.Bxf6+?! This appears to me to be a nonsensical idea. 8...gxf6 9.g3 following the game Vazquez
Igarza, R – Del Rio de Angelis, S Linares 2014. 9...Kc7!N The dark-squared bishop will go to the h6-
c1 diagonal. 10.Bh3 b5 Grabbing space on the queenside.
291
11.Nf3 [11.Nge2? deprives the c3-knight of the e2-square. 11...Bh6+ 12.Kb1 Nc5 13.Bxc8 Rhxc8µ
with a clear advantage, thanks to the poor position of the c3-knight and the threat of ...b4.] 11...Bh6+
12.Kb1 Nc5 13.Bxc8 Rhxc8³ following ...a5 with a slightly better position for us.
C3) 8.Nf3 Kc7
Position after: 8...Kc7
C3.1) 9.Bh4 Intending Ng5. 9...Ne8! 10.Ng5 Nd6 11.Bg3 to play f4. 11...Be7 12.f4 Bxg5 13.fxg5
b5=
292
We have good control of the center. Our plan is ...h6 so as to introduce the rook into play, because we
want to eliminate the g5-pawn. Why? We want to play ...f6 to move our d7-knight.
C3.2) 9.Bc4 Bc5 10.Bxf7 [10.Bh4 Ng4! Intending ...f6. 11.Rhf1 f6 12.h3 Nh6=] 10...Bxf2 11.Rhf1
Bc5
12.Bh4 [12.Nh4 Rf8 13.Be6 Nb6 It is favorable for us to exchange the light-squared bishops.
14.Bxc8 Raxc8 15.Nf5 Ne8= followed by ...g6 with an equal position.] 12...Rf8 13.Be6 b5
Threatening ...b4. 14.Bg3 Nh5! To exchange pieces. 15.Bxd7 Nxg3 16.Bxc6 Nxf1 17.Bxa8 Ne3
18.Rd3 Nxg2=
293
Position after: 18...Nxg2=
We have a position that is easier to play for us, thanks to the bishop pair and the considerable activity
of our pieces.
C4) 8.Bc4 is the recommendation of Alexander Khalifman in his aforementioned book, reaching a
position that has been played in many games. 8...Bc5!N
A very important novelty. 9.Bh4 Any other way would have transposed to 8.Nf3. 9...Ke7 10.Nf3.
Now, I consider that Black has two playable options.
C4.1) 10...h6!? Avoiding Ng5 and preparing ...g5. 11.Bg3
294
The problem is that it is not easy to defend the central pawn. The idea is to sacrifice it and obtain
ample counterplay on the queenside. 11...b5 12.Bb3 a5 to force White to play a3. 13.a3 a4 14.Ba2 b4!
15.axb4 Bxb4 Threatening ...a3. 16.Nxe5! [16.Bxe5 a3‚] 16...Nxe5 17.Bxe5 a3
In exchange for the pawn, we have reached the white king very quickly. 18.Rd3 [18.Nb1 axb2+
19.Kxb2 Be6 20.Bxe6 Kxe6© It is clear that we have great compensation for the pawn, thanks to the
weakness of the white king.] 18...axb2+ 19.Kxb2 Ba3+ 20.Ka1 Bc5© With great compensation. Now,
we want to play ...Be6.
C4.2) 10...b5 11.Bb3 Re8
295
Intending ...Kf8 but we are sacrificing a pawn. 12.Ng5! is the critical move. 12...Rf8 13.Nxh7 Rh8
14.Nxf6 Rxh4 15.Nxd7 Bxd7 16.f3 Rah8 17.h3 Bc8©
Position after: 17...Bc8©
Black has compensation because of the bishop pair and good control over the weak squares.
7...Ke8
296
Once we have defended everything, it’s time to follow up with ...Bb4.
8.0-0-0
A) 8.Nd5?! is a dubious idea. 8...Nxd5 9.Bxd5 c6 10.Bc4 Nc5 11.f3 b5³ with a slight advantage, as in
Lambrechts, K – Reinderman, D Germany 2015.
B) 8.f4?! This was Wiemer, P – Deglmann, L Bayern 1997. 8...Bb4!N Putting pressure on e4. 9.Bd3 h6
10.Bxf6 Bxc3+ 11.bxc3 gxf6³ and we have the better pawn structure.
Position after: 11...gxf6³
C) 8.f3 c6 Preparing ...b5.

C1) 9.a3 h6 10.Be3 Bc5 11.Kf2 a5 Gaining space. 12.Nge2 Ke7=
297
As played in Dory, J – Jovanovic, Z Hungary 2008. The position is more comfortable to play as Black.
The plan is to transfer one knight to c5 and the other to d6.
C2) 9.a4 a5 10.Nge2 Nb6 11.Ba2 Nfd7= following the game Kuba, J – Neuman, P Pardubice 2015.
Now, we are able to play ...f6 and ...Nc5.
D) 8.Nf3 Bb4! 9.Bd2 c6 10.a3 [10.0-0-0 b5 11.Bd3 Bc5 12.Rhf1 Ng4 13.Be1 f6= followed by ...Nh6-f7
with a good position for us.] 10...Bd6
11.0-0-0 [11.Be3 Ke7 12.h3 Nb6 13.Bb3 Be6=] 11...Bc5 12.Rhf1 b5= And after ...Ke7 and ...a5, Black
will have the initiative.
298
8...Bb4
9.Nge2
9.Nf3 Bxc3 10.bxc3 h6 11.Bh4 Ke7 We are ready to play ...Re8 and ...Kf8. 12.Rhe1 [12.Bg3 Nxe4
13.Bxe5 Nxe5 14.Nxe5 Nd6= with an equal position.] 12...Re8 13.g4
The most aggressive. 13...Nb6! 14.Nxe5 Kf8 15.f4 Nxc4 16.Bxf6 gxf6 17.Nxc4 Bxg4= with a balanced
position.
9...c6
299
Threatening ...b5.
10.a4
10.Ng3 g6 11.a4 Bxc3 12.bxc3 h6 13.Bd2 Nc5 14.a5 Ke7= Although White has the bishop pair, their
queenside structure is deteriorated, so the position is balanced.
10...h6 11.Bh4 g5! 12.Bg3 Nh5
13.h4
300
13.f3 Nxg3 14.hxg3 h5! An important move to avoid g4 fixing the h6-pawn. 15.Rh2 Nf6 16.g4 h4
Making use of the fact that g3 is not a good move.
17.Rdh1 [17.g3?! Bxg4! is very important. 18.fxg4 Nxg4 19.Rh3 Nf2 20.Rh2 Nxd1 21.Nxd1 Bc5ƒ and
we have a strong initiative. We are ready to play ...Ke7 to connect the rooks.] 17...Nd7 Improving the
knight that aims to go to f8, and then to continue to either e6 or g6. 18.g3 Be7 19.Nd1 Nf8 20.Ne3 Be6=
We have the h4-pawn very well-defended and it provides for great counterplay.
13...Nxg3 14.Nxg3 g4
15.Nf5
301
15.Nce2 Nf6 16.c3 Bc5 17.Rhf1 Be6 18.Bxe6 fxe6= with a comfortable position for Black who has
managed to open the f-file, and now to place a rook on f8 and press hard on f2.
15...Nf6 16.f3
16.Nd6+ Bxd6 17.Rxd6 Ke7 18.Rhd1 a5 19.b3 Rb8= We can follow up with ...Nd7-c5, with equality.
16...h5
16...gxf3!? It is also possible to play in this way in order to exchange as many pieces as we can. 17.gxf3
Bxf5 18.exf5 Bxc3 19.bxc3 Ke7 20.Rhe1 Rhe8 21.Rxe5+ Kf8= White has an extra pawn but it is not so
significant because of their poor structure.
17.Nd6+
17.Rd3 Be6 18.Bxe6 fxe6 The doubled pawns on e5 and e6 are not problematic as we control all the
central squares. 19.Nd6+ Bxd6 20.Rxd6 Ke7 21.Rd3 gxf3 22.gxf3 Rhg8= and we have good activity. The
control we have over the open g-file seems much more important than White’s control over the d-file
because there are no entry points.
17...Bxd6 18.Rxd6 Ke7 19.Rdd1 Rg8=
302
Position after: 19...Rg8=
Although there is equality, it is Black who has the initiative, thanks to the fact that they can take on f3,
opening the file when it suits them best.
g) 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6 fxe6 – Various 8th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Bc4
Position after: 6.Bc4
This is White’s main line and it can be the most annoying move because it quickly heads for the weakest
pawn.
6...Be6
303
My favorite response that I’ve been using since my childhood, which I’ve never given up using – it has
brought me great results and I’m clearly convinced that it’s the best move.
A) 6...Bb4 The third main alternative attacking the central pawn but now, White can take on f7 and
isolate our e5-pawn. 7.Bxf7 Rf8 [7...Nxe4 8.Nge2 Bf5 9.0-0² and it is clear that White is better thanks
to their better pawn structure and the weak position of our very exposed king.] 8.Bb3! The best retreat.
8...Nxe4 9.Nge2 Bf5 10.Be3 Nd7 11.0-0-0²
Position after: 11.0-0-0²
Mastrovasilis, D – Yakubboev, N Batumi 2018. White has a more comfortable position to play, thanks to
better development, better pawn structure and a safer king.
B) 6...Ke8 Today this has become the main line and is the favorite of the engines. 7.f4!
Position after: 7.f4!
304
B1) 7...Bd6 8.Nb5 Ke7 9.fxe5 Bxe5 10.Nf3± White gained a clear advantage in Van Foreest, L –
Edouard, R chess24.com 2019.
B2) 7...Bb4 The most aggressive move, but not enough to equalize. 8.Bd3! Nbd7 9.Nf3 Nc5 10.0-0
White has plenty of activity. 10...Bxc3 11.bxc3 Nfxe4 12.Re1²
Position after: 12.Re1²
and White has a slight but very comfortable advantage due to their great piece activity and the
insecurity of our king.
7.Bxe6 fxe6
305
As I explained at the beginning of the book in the section on pawn structures, this is the most
characteristic structure of the Philidor Defense that we will see in the book. At first glance, the doubled
pawns on e5 and e6 look horrible but they have a great virtue: they control all the central squares. This is
very important because we will see that, except for the light-squared bishops, the remaining minor pieces
are on the board and, above all, the knights. This means that our e5- and e6-pawns control the white
knights very well and it is not easy for them to find strong squares from which they can hurt us. White’s
plan is usually to improve the knights by looking for squares from which to attack the e5-pawn, since the
e6-pawn is not targetable. Those squares are usually d3 and c4. Therefore, the most repeated maneuvers
will be Nh3-f2-d3 and Nb1-d2-c4. Even if White manages to place their knights in the ideal way, the e5-
pawn will be very well-defended, usually with a bishop on d6 and a knight on d7 or c6. Even so, we
cannot defend everything. However, this structure gives plenty of counterplay on the queenside through
...a6, ...b5 and ...c5. It is also possible to do it on the kingside, because there is only one open file for the
rooks: White will not be able to take advantage of it and, on the contrary, the black rooks will be free to
support the launch of their pawns on both sides.
8.Be3
A) 8.Nge2 does not lead to an independent line. 8...Nc6 9.Be3 Bd6 10.f3 Ke7 and we transpose to 8.f3
followed by 10.Nge2.
B) 8.Bg5 h6 9.Bh4 g5 to leave the bishop with little space. 10.Bg3 Nc6 11.Nf3 Bd6 12.0-0-0 Ke7=
as in Etxagibel Larranaga, A – Sagar, S Paleochora 2017. We will follow with ...Nh5 and the position is
easier to play for Black due to the initiative that we have on the kingside.
C) 8.Nf3 Nc6 9.Be3 [After 9.Bg5 h6 this would transpose to the line above with 8.Bg5.] 9...Bb4
Attacking the central pawn.
306
C1) 10.Nd2 b6! Taking control of the c5-square to capture on c3 and to play ...Ke7. 11.f3 Bxc3
12.bxc3 Ne8 Considering our opponent’s poor queenside structure, we aim to exploit the weakness of
the c4-square by installing a knight there. To do so, one will be set to d6 and the other to a5. 13.h4
White’s only reaction is to try to gain space on the kingside. 13...Nd6 14.h5 Rg8 15.Bf2 Na5= With a
balanced position.
Position after: 15...Na5=
We have control of the c4-square and now we want to play ...Kc8-b7.

C2) 10.0-0-0+ Ke7 11.Nd2 Bxc3 12.bxc3 as played in Thorfinnsson, B – Maurizzi, M chess.com
2018.
307
Position after: 12.bxc3
12...b6N Taking control of c5. 13.f3 Na5 14.Bf2 Nh5= taking advantage of the f4-square with an equal
position.
D) 8.Nh3 Bb4 9.Bd2 This was Handl, M – Vlach, K Czechia 2012. [9.f3 Bxc3+ 10.bxc3 Ne8 To transfer
the knight to c4. 11.Nf2 Nd7 12.Nd3 Nd6= To continue with ...a5 so as to activate the rook to a6 and
then move it to c6.] 9...c5N Gaining space. 10.f3 [10.0-0-0 Ke7 11.a3 Ba5 12.Be3 Rc8= with a balanced
position. One idea is to play ...Nbd7 followed by ...c4 and ...Nc5.] 10...Nc6
D1) 11.0-0-0 Ke7 12.Be3 [12.a3 Ba5 13.Be3 Nd4„ and we have a great knight. Now we can try to
strike on the queenside.] 12...Rhc8 drumming up counterplay on the queenside. 13.Nf2 Na5 14.Nd3
Nc4 15.Bf2 Bxc3 16.bxc3 Nd7=
308
D2) 11.Nf2 c4 Controlling d3. 12.Nb1 Bc5 We should retain the bishops, as ours have more activity.
13.c3 [13.Na3 Bxa3 14.bxa3 b5 15.a4 a6=] 13...Rf8 14.Rf1 Na5 With the idea of transferring the
knight from a5 to c5. 15.Ke2 Ke7 16.Be1 Bd6 17.Nd2 b5 18.b4 Nb7 19.a4 a5!
Taking advantage of our superior piece coordination. 20.axb5 axb4 21.Rxa8 Rxa8 22.Nxc4 Ra2+= and
we have the initiative.
8...Nc6 9.0-0-0+ Bd6 10.Nf3
309
The only way to differ from other variations.
10...Ng4 11.Bg5+
As in Spassky, B – Ree, H Amsterdam 1970.
11...Kd7N
Better than 11...Ke8.
12.Bh4
12.Rhf1 h6 13.h3 Nxf2! opening up the f-file. 14.Rxf2 hxg5 15.Nxg5 Raf8 We have a great square on f4
for our rook. 16.Rxf8 Rxf8 17.Rd3 Rf4= with good activity; we can install the knight on f4.
12...Raf8
310
Position after: 12...Raf8
To play ...Rhg8 and expand on the kingside.
13.Nb1
To play c3 and take control of d4.

13.h3 Nf6 14.Ne1 [14.Nd2 going to c4. 14...Kc8 15.f3 Nh5 16.Nc4 Bb4= We are going to follow up with
...Nf4 with a good position.] 14...Nh5 15.f3 Kc8= Following up with ...Nf4 and ...g5 and the position is
easier for Black.
13...Rhg8 14.h3 Nf6 15.Nbd2 h6
311
To play ...g5 and ...Nd4.
16.c3 g5 17.Bg3 Nh5 18.Bh2 Nf4
And it is Black who has the initiative.
19.Bxf4 gxf4 20.Rhg1 b5
Striking on both sides!
21.a4 a6 22.Kc2 Ke7
To play ...Bc5.
23.Ne1 bxa4!
Following up with ...a3.
24.Nc4 a3 25.b3 a5 26.Ra1 h5! 27.Rf1
27.Nxa3 f3! 28.g3 h4=
27...Ra8! 28.Nxa3 Nb4+!
To improve our knight, by moving it to c5.
29.Kb2 Na6 30.Nc4 Nc5=
312
With a great position for us. We are preparing to play ...Rgb8.
h) 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.f3 Nc6 9.Be3 Bd6 – Various 10th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.f3
The main line. The idea is to clear the f2-square in order to transfer the knight from g1 to d3 via h3 and f2.
8...Nc6 9.Be3 Bd6
313
To play ...Ke7 and look for expansion on the queenside using ...a6 and ... b5. Now, White has several
options.
10.0-0-0
The most played move.

A) 10.Nb5 is a rare move that we saw in Ufimtsev, V – Andreev, A Novokuznetsk 2003. 10...Bb4+!N To
provoke c3. 11.c3 Bf8 Now, the knight does not have a good retreat after ...a6. 12.a4 Na5= Trying to
exploit the weak squares.
B) 10.Nb1 as was played in Prie, E – Reinderman, D Brussels 1993. The idea is to play c3, controlling
the d4-square and to move the knight to d2, in order to transfer it to either b3 or c4. 10...Nd7!N
Position after: 10...Nd7!N
(The main move is 10...Ke7 which I have used several times, but it’s better to play the text move with
the idea of continuing with ...Bc5 and to obtain quick counterplay on the queenside.) 11.c3 Bc5 12.Ke2
Bxe3 13.Kxe3 Na5 We can follow this with ...c5 and ...b5. 14.Nd2 c5 15.Nh3 Ke7 16.Nf2 a6 17.h4 b5
314
We have already reached the first phase of our plan. The second is to create weaknesses on the
queenside. To do so, we will play ...Nb6 forcing White to play b3. 18.h5 h6 Stops White’s expansion on
the kingside. 19.g4 Kf6! 20.Rag1 Rad8 21.Nh3 The only way to progress is by playing g5 but now the
d3-square is very weak. 21...Nb6 22.b3 c4! Threatening ...Rd3+ and taking on c3.
23.g5+ hxg5 24.Rxg5 Rd3+ 25.Ke2 Rxc3 26.Rg6+ Ke7! 27.Ng5 Nc6 Best, to move on to d4. 28.Rxg7+
Kf6 29.Rg6+ Ke7 30.h6 White could have repeated. 30...Nd4+ 31.Kd1 Rc2= And we have a strong
attack against the king.
C) 10.Nge2 Ke7 Once we have connected the rooks, we are ready to expand on both sides.
315
C1) 11.0-0 It is unusual for White to castle short, as in the game Medvegy, Z – Anistratov, D Austria
2006. 11...Rag8!N 12.Rad1 g5 13.Bf2 a6= to follow up with ...Ke8, ...h5 and ...g4.
C2) 11.Nb1 Rag8 12.Nd2 g5 13.h3 Nd7 We want to exchange bishops to weaken the dark squares.
14.Nc1 Bc5
15.Nf1 [15.Nc4 b5! 16.Bxc5+ Nxc5 17.Ne3 h5„ It’s clear that Black’s worse pawn structure is
compensated for by their great piece activity.] 15...h5 16.Nd3 Bb6„ Now, we can continue with ...Kf6
and ...g4. It is also possible to transfer the knight from d7 to g6.
C3) 11.0-0-0 Rhb8 The plan is very clear: ...b5 and attack.
316
Position after: 11...Rhb8
C3.1) 12.Na4 Nd7! Controlling the c5-square. 13.c4 b6 Once we have avoided the opponent’s threat,
the idea is to play ...Nc5 and to take full control of the d4-square. 14.Kb1 a6 15.Rc1 Nc5! 16.Nxc5
Bxc5 17.Bxc5+ bxc5=
Position after: 17...bxc5=
And having control of the d4-square makes up for the poor pawn structure.
C3.2) 12.Kb1 b5 13.Nc1 Nd7 The aim is to remove the knight from c6 and to play ...c5. 14.Nd3 Nd8
15.Rd2 Nf7 16.Rhd1 Rb7 Before playing ...c5, we have to defend the knight on d7. Now, we will
continue with ...Rc8. 17.Ne2 Rc8 18.Rc1 c5
317
The goal is accomplished: we have expanded and we have the initiative. 19.c4 bxc4 20.Rxc4 Nb6
21.Rc1 c4= With good counterplay.
10...Ke7
11.Nh3
11.Nb5 Considering that White has castled long, it doesn’t seem correct to aim to capture on d6. 11...a6
12.Nxd6 cxd6 13.Ne2 b5= with an easier position for us.
11...a6
318
Preparing ...b5. White has three reasonable options.
12.Nf2
Transferring to d3.
A) 12.Bf2 as in Timoscenko, G – Beim, V Austria 2006. 12...g5!N The right moment. 13.Nb1 [13.Nxg5
Rag8 14.Bh4 Bc5! 15.Rde1 h6 16.Nh3 Rxg2= and our pieces are very active.] 13...g4 14.fxg4 Nxg4
15.Bh4+ Kd7=
Position after: 15...Kd7=
We will gain control of the two open files, so the initiative is in our hands.
319
B) 12.Na4 as tried in Sokolova, V – Konenkin, D St Petersburg 2008. 12...Nd7N 13.b3 b5 14.Nb2 a5
15.c3 a4 16.b4 Rhc8!
Position after: 16...Rhc8!
The plan is to remove the knight on c6 and to play ...c5. 17.Nd3 This avoids our plan but now the c4-
square is very weak. 17...Nb6 18.Bxb6 cxb6 19.Kb2 Ra7= with a balanced position. We can choose
between doubling the rooks on the c- or d-file.
12...b5
To follow up with ...Na5 and ...c5.
320
13.Nd3
The main move.

A) 13.Ne2 as was played in Mamedov, R – Ftacnik, L Saint Vincent 2005. 13...Na5N Playing according
to our plan. 14.Nd3 Rhc8 Preparing ...c5. 15.Nc5 Nd7! 16.Nxd7 Kxd7 17.Kb1 c5„
Position after: 17...c5„
We have achieved our objective, obtaining great counterplay on the queenside.

B) 13.Nb1 Na5 To play ...c5 and to jump to c4.
B1) 14.b3 c5! 15.Rd2 c4 We keep moving forwards. 16.Rhd1 Nb7 17.Rxd6 The best try. 17...Nxd6
18.Bc5 Nfe8! 19.Ng4 Rc8 20.Bb4 h5 21.Nxe5 Kf6 22.Nd7+ Ke7 23.Nb6 Rc6=
321
Position after: 23...Rc6=
White has compensation for the exchange but the position will be more comfortable to play as Black,
thanks to the activity of their pieces. Now, a possible idea is to continue with ...h4 and ...Rh5 followed
by ...Rg5 attacking the weaknesses.
B2) 14.Nd2 h6 To play ...Nd7 without White being able to check from g5. 15.Nd3 Nd7 16.b3
following the game Fluvia Poyatos, J – Magem Badals, J Barcelona 2008. 16...c5N
Position after: 16...c5N
Threatening ...c4. 17.c4 stops the threat but now the d4-square is very accessible. [17.c3 c4 18.bxc4
Rhc8!ƒ] 17...Nc6 18.Kb2 Rhc8„ Then either ...Nd4 or ...Nb4, with great counterplay.
13...Na5
322
Although the knight can go to c4, that is not our main idea. We actually want to play ...c5 or prepare it
with ...Rhc8.
14.h4
Since Black is going to expand on the queenside, the best strategy for White is to create counterplay on
the other side.
14.b3 White played in this way against me in Miguelez Garcia, E – Trigo Urquijo, S Bergara 2010.
14...c5!N
Position after: 14...c5!N
323
There is no reason to delay this move. We are going to analyze the two captures but against either, we will
obtain great counterplay through the c-file. 15.Nxc5 The best. [15.Bxc5 Bxc5 16.Nxc5 Rhc8 17.b4 Nc4„
We have managed to activate our pieces and are ready to continue with ...a5, with plenty of counterplay.]
15...Rhc8
Position after: 15...Rhc8
A) 16.b4 Nc4 17.Bf2 Nd7! to eliminate the king’s best defensive piece. 18.Nxd7 Kxd7 19.Bc5 It is by
far the best way to proceed to take on d6. 19...Ke7 20.Rxd6 Nxd6 21.Rd1
Position after: 21.Rd1
Now, it is best to return the exchange and capture the weak c-pawn. 21...Rxc5 22.bxc5 Nb7 23.c6 Nd6=
and after ...Rc8 and ...Rxc6, the position will be favorable for Black.
B) 16.Rxd6! The best try. 16...Kxd6 17.Rd1+ Ke7
324
White has compensation for the exchange but we have good counterplay due to the c-file and control of
the d4-square. 18.a4! [18.Kb2 Rc7 19.a4 Rac8 To take the knight. 20.axb5 axb5 21.Ra1 Nb7 22.Ra7
Nd6 23.Rxc7+ Rxc7= with approximate equality although it seems easier to play as Black] 18...Nc6
going to d4. 19.axb5 axb5 20.Nxb5 Nd4 21.Bxd4 exd4 22.Nd3 e5!
Position after: 22...e5!
Black exploits the fact that White cannot capture because of ...Ra5. 23.Kb2 Nd7=
14...Rhc8
325
Position after: 14...Rhc8
15.Nc5
15.h5 c5 16.h6 c4! A key move clearing the c5-square for the bishop. 17.Nf2 Bc5 18.Bxc5+ Rxc5
19.hxg7 Rg8 20.g4 Rxg7=
Position after: 20...Rxg7=
With a balanced position. We have good counterplay on the queenside and the possibility of installing a
knight on d4.
15...Nd7 16.Nxd7 Kxd7
Once we play ...Ke8 and ...Be7, we are ready to play ...c5.
326
17.b3 Ke8 18.h5 Be7
We can continue with ...c5.
19.f4

19.Rh3 c5 20.Rg3 Bf8 21.f4 [21.Ne2 Nc6 Transferring to the center. 22.f4 Ra7 23.fxe5 Nxe5 24.Nf4
Rc6= with a fully balanced position.
327
The idea is to play ...Rd7 and then continue with ...c4.] 21...c4 22.Kb2 exf4! 23.Bxf4 b4 24.Na4 Ra7= and
Black has nothing to worry about because of our great counterplay on the queenside.
19...exf4 20.Bxf4 c5 21.Bd6 c4
We are ready to play ...b4 and ...Rc6, clearing the way for the a8-rook to go to d8.
22.b4 Nc6 23.e5
23.a3 a5=
Position after: 23.e5
An interesting pawn sacrifice, which Black can accept.

328
23...Nxb4 24.h6 g6
Now, the idea is ...Rc6 followed by ...Rd8. As we have an extra pawn, we can return it by playing ...Nd5
to exchange knights.
25.Ne4 Nd5 26.Rdf1 c3!
It is vital to be able to play ...Rc4.
27.Rf3 Rc4 28.Bxe7 Kxe7
Position after: 28...Kxe7
329
29.Ng5
White is penetrating onto f7 and then taking on h7, but we don’t have to be afraid because we have great
counterplay against the opponent’s king who is very weak.
29.Nd6?? Rf4–+
29...Ra4! 30.Kb1 Rb4+ 31.Ka1 Rf8 32.Rxf8 Kxf8 33.Nxh7+ Kg8 34.Ng5 Rf4 35.Nxe6 Rf5=
Position after: 35...Rf5=
With an equal endgame.
i) 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.f3 Nc6 9.Be3 Bd6 10.Nh3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.dxe5 dxe5 5.Qxd8+ Kxd8 6.Bc4 Be6 7.Bxe6 fxe6 8.f3 Nc6 9.Be3 Bd6
10.Nh3
330
Position after: 10.Nh3
The main move.
10...Ke7 11.Nf2 a6
To expand on the queenside.
12.Nd3
We have reached a very common position which has been played in several games. One of the most
noteworthy in terms of the strength of the players is the game played between the Grandmasters
Rublevsky, S – Comas Fabrego, L Lugo 2006.
12...Rhc8!N
331
Position after: 12...Rhc8!N
To play ...Nd4 followed by ...c5, or to play ...Nd7 followed by ...b5. It depends on how White plays. In
any case, the rook will be useful on this square.
13.Na4
A) 13.Nc5?? Nd4–+
B) 13.Nb1 to transfer to c4 but now, we can play energetically: 13...Na5 14.Nd2 c5 threatening ...c4.
15.c4 [15.Nb3 Nc4 16.Bxc5 Bxc5 17.Nbxc5 Nxb2=] 15...b6 We defend the pawn and have the d4-
square accessible for our knight. 16.b3 Nc6 with a comfortable position.
C) 13.0-0-0 b5 to follow up with ...Na5 and ...c5. 14.Nb1 Nd7 Taking control of the c5-square. 15.h4
Na5 16.h5 h6 17.Nd2 c5
332
As we can see, we have plenty of counterplay and the position is easier to play as Black. 18.f4! c4
19.fxe5 cxd3 20.exd6+ Ke8 21.c3 b4 Go on the attack! 22.Nf3 bxc3
Position after: 22...bxc3
23.Rxd3 [23.b3 d2+ 24.Kc2 e5= To follow with ...Nb7.] 23...cxb2+ 24.Kxb2 Nc4+ 25.Ka1 Rab8= With
all the pieces active, a balanced position is maintained.
13...Nd7
333
14.0-0-0
A) 14.c3 b6 to play ...Na5 and ...c5. 15.b3 Na5 16.0-0-0 c5 threatening ...c4. 17.Ndb2 Rc6 18.c4 b5!
19.Bd2 Bc7 20.Nc3 Rb8„
Position after: 20...Rb8„
And we have good counterplay on the queenside.

B) 14.Kf2 Nd4 Black is preparing ...b5. 15.c3 b5! 16.cxd4 [16.Rac1 c5!=] 16...bxa4 17.dxe5 Nxe5
We’re ready to counter with ...Rab8 and then ...c5. 18.Rhd1 Rab8 19.Bd4 Nxd3+ 20.Rxd3 c5
334
21.Bc3 [21.Bxg7 c4 22.Rd2 a3! puts huge pressure on b2 and now we threaten ...e5, leaving the white
bishop out of play. 23.Bc3 axb2 24.Rb1 Ba3= and the pawns on b2 and c4 give us plenty of play.] 21...c4
22.Rd2 a3 23.bxa3 Bxa3 24.Rad1 Ke8 We want to play ...Bb4. 25.Bxg7 c3 26.Rc2 Rb2 27.Rdc1 Kf7!
28.Be5 Rd8 29.Bxc3 Rb5= With a balanced position.
Position after: 29...Rb5=
The c1-rook must move and then we will seize the initiative by playing ...Rc8, pinning the white pieces
and piling on pressure.
14...b5 15.Nac5 Nxc5 16.Nxc5 a5
With the idea of ...a4 followed by ...Na5.
335
17.h4
Looking for counterplay on the kingside.
17...a4 18.Nd3 Na5 19.h5 Nc4
Once we have executed our plan, the idea is to continue with ...c5 and ... b4.
20.Bg5+ Ke8 21.h6 g6 22.Nf2 Be7
336
As we have seen in some line previously, the exchange of bishops favors us because we can greatly
weaken the dark squares that are close to the white king, and our knight will become more active.
23.Bxe7 Kxe7 24.Ng4 c5
25.b3
This seems the best.

25.Rhe1 b4 Threatening ...b3. 26.b3 axb3 27.cxb3 Nd6 To play ...c4 or to transfer to d4 via b5. 28.Kb2 c4
This pawn is not important. 29.Nxe5 c3+ 30.Ka1 Ra5=
337
We have great compensation due to the poor situation of White’s king, the activity of our rooks and the
passed pawn on c3.
25...axb3 26.cxb3 Nb6 27.Kb1 Nd7
After defending the e5-pawn, we are ready to play ...c4.
28.Rd2
28.Rc1 c4 29.Rc3 Nc5 Activating all the pieces. 30.Nxe5 Kf6! 31.Ng4+ Kg5„ Threatening ...Nxe4 with
ample counterplay. The aim is to continue with ...Ra3 followed by ...Rca8 with pressure on the a-file.
28...c4 29.Rhd1
29.bxc4 bxc4 30.Rc2 [30.Rhd1 Nc5! 31.Nxe5 c3 32.Re2 Ra4= with real counterplay.] 30...Nc5 Once
again the e5-pawn is unimportant.
338
31.Nxe5 [31.Rxc4 Rcb8+ 32.Kc1 Rxa2! Threatening ...Ra1+. 33.Rxc5 Kd6 34.Rxe5 Ra1+ 35.Kd2 Rxh1=
White has compensation for the exchange but the position is easier to play as Black.] 31...c3! 32.Rxc3
Rcb8+ 33.Kc1 Rxa2 34.Nc6+ Kd6 35.Nxb8 Ra1+ 36.Kd2 Rxh1=
Position after: 36...Rxh1=
29...Ra7 30.bxc4 bxc4
339
31.Rc1
31.Rc2 c3 32.Ka1 Ra3 33.Rb1 Nc5! Sacrificing, once again, the e5-pawn. 34.Nxe5 Rca8=
Position after: 34...Rca8=
Threatening ...Nb3+ with a good attack.
31...c3 32.Rb2! Rac7 33.Rb5 c2+ 34.Ka1 Nc5
340
Threatening ...Nd3.
35.Nxe5
The only way to stop the threat but now, the knight can be attacked.
35...Kd6 36.Nc4+ Ke7=
We continue threatening ...Nd3 so the best strategy for White is to repeat moves again by placing the
knight on e5.
The Exchange Variation of the Philidor Defense is one the most unique and popular lines. White
exchanges queens and leaves Black without the chance to castle but, as we have seen, this is not a
problem.
One of the most aggressive options for White is 6.f4 but after 6...Nbd7! followed by ...Bd6, we gain
strength in the center. Our plan is to take on f4, to leave the e4-pawn isolated and install a knight on e5.
Against 6.Bg5, which is a very popular move, my view is that the best response is 6...Nbd7, continuing
with ...Bd6 and we place the king on e7, where he will be very safe.
Finally, the main line is 6.Bc4, to which I am convinced that 6...Be6 is a great answer. The doubled pawns
on e5 and e6 allow us to control all the central squares and that makes it difficult for the white knights to
come into play. Once the pawns are doubled, our standard plan is to play ...Nc6, ...Bd6 and ...Ke7. With
this piece configuration already achieved, we are ready to launch our pawns on the queenside with ...a6
and ...b5.
In either case, Black is very well-prepared and we will obtain very good positions in which our king will
be an active and vital piece in the endgame.
341
Chapter 9
Rare 5th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7
Chapter Guide
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7

a) 5.a4
b) 5.Be3
c) 5.Bd3
d) 5.Bg5
e) 5.h3
f) 5.Be2 Be7 – Various 6th Moves
g) 5.Be2 Be7 6.0-0
h) 5.g3
i) 5.Rg1
a) 5.a4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7
Now let’s look at the less common options. The main line is 5.Bc4, discussed in Chapter 11 and onwards.
5.a4
A rare option but its popularity is increasing. White’s idea is to gain more space on the queenside and
continue with a5 to make it more difficult for Black’s pawns to move around. However, this will curtail
White’s development and we can exploit this.
342
5...Be7 6.a5 0-0
7.Bc4
7.a6 The only other threatening move as tried in Misailovic, N – Colovic, D Sabac 2014. 7...bxa6N I
believe that it is best to open up the b-file. 8.Bxa6 [8.Bd3 Bb7 9.0-0 exd4 10.Nxd4 Nc5=] 8...Bxa6
9.Rxa6 exd4
To control the c5-square and be able to install a knight, so as to attack the center and the rook on a6.
A) 10.Nxd4 Re8! To defend the bishop against the threat of Nc6 and with the aim of undertaking a quick
attack on the e4-pawn. 11.Nc6 Qc8 12.Rxa7
343
Position after: 12.Rxa7
White recoups the pawn but we have more development so we manage to put substantial pressure on the
center. 12...Rxa7 13.Nxa7 Qb7 14.Nab5 Nxe4 15.Qd5 Rb8=
B) 10.Qxd4 Nc5 11.Ra1 Nfd7! This clears the f6-square for the bishop and thus take control of e5.
12.Nd5 Re8 13.0-0 Bf6 14.Nxf6+ Qxf6 15.Qxf6 Nxf6
and the activity of our pieces compensates for our worse pawn structure. 16.e5 A sad necessity. 16...dxe5
17.Be3 Nb7 18.Bxa7 Ne4= with an equal position.
7...exd4
344
8.Qxd4
The main move.

8.Nxd4 Ne5
White has two reasonable options.

A) 9.Be2 as in Filipovic, B Biti, O Rabac 2003. 9...c5N Removing the knight from the center. The idea is
to pressure the central pawn through ...Re8 and ...Bf8. 10.Nb3 [10.Nf3 Nc6 11.a6 Nb4=] 10...Nc6 11.0-
0 Re8 12.Bf4 Bf8 13.f3 Be6=
345
And Black’s position seems more comfortable. The plan is ...d5 and there is also the threat of taking on
b3 followed by ...Nxa5.
B) 9.Ba2 c5 10.Nde2 This was Kuehn, P – Georgiev, V Vaduz 2003. [10.Nf5 Bxf5 11.exf5 c4!=]
10...Nc6N Attacking the a5-pawn and threatening ...Nb4. 11.a6 Nb4 12.Bc4 Nxa6 13.Bxa6 bxa6
Position after: 13...bxa6
Although it is true that we have a bad pawn structure, in return, we have an extra pawn, a pair of bishops
and greater development. 14.Nf4 Bb7 15.f3 Re8 16.0-0 Bf8= without any problems for Black.
8...c6
346
To install the queen on c7 and exert control over the e5-square in the hope of establishing a knight there.
9.0-0
9.Bf4 putting pressure on the weak d6-pawn but now, as White has placed the bishop on f4, we can bring
a knight to e6. 9...Nc5 10.0-0 Ne6 11.Bxe6 Bxe6= And Black is fine here. We have the bishop pair and
are ready to play ...d5.
9...Qc7
Position after: 9...Qc7
10.Bf4
347
10.Rd1 Ne5
A) 11.Bf4 is a rare move that leaves the white queen very tied to the defense of the bishop, so we can
exploit it. 11...c5! 12.Nb5 Qd8 13.Qxe5 The only move that manages to keep all the material. 13...dxe5
14.Rxd8 Bxd8 15.Bxe5 a6 16.Nd6 Be6=
and White has an exchange and one pawn for the rook and good piece coordination, which compensates
for the material deficit.
B) 11.Be2 Ng6 The aim is to move the queenside pieces and play ...d5. 12.Be3 Re8 13.h3 h6 14.b4 Be6
We are ready to follow up with ...d5. 15.b5 d5=
10...Nh5
To gain control of the e5-square.
11.Be3 Ne5 12.Be2 Bg4!
348
Position after: 12...Bg4!
To exchange some minor pieces.
13.Nxe5
13.Qd1 Nf6 14.Nxe5 Bxe2 15.Qxe2 dxe5=
13...dxe5 14.Qc4 Bxe2 15.Nxe2 b5! 16.axb6 axb6 17.Nc3
White threatens Nd5.
17...Bd6=
Position after: 17...Bd6=
349
Defending the queen to stop White’s threat, with a balanced position.
b) 5.Be3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Be3
A natural developing move but it doesn’t seem like the best square for this piece. Now we can attack the
bishop.
5...Ng4!
Of the 356 games registered in my database with the position after 5.Be3, only three of them have been
played in this way.
6.Bg5
The only logical move and, apparently, the drawback of 5...Ng4.

6.Bd2 The bishop on d2 brings White nothing. 6...Be7 7.h3 Ngf6 8.g4 The most aggressive way to play
but we are well-prepared. 8...c6 9.g5 Nh5
350
The knight is not badly placed on h5; we have the f4-square under control and the idea is to put the knight
there. 10.Be3 0-0 The king is very safe and now our hands are free to expand on the queenside. 11.Be2 b5
12.a3 Rb8= with good counterplay on the queenside.
6...Be7
The exchange of the dark-squared bishops favors us as Black.
7.Bxe7
7.Qd2 is not a problem. 7...Bxg5 8.Qxg5 Qxg5 9.Nxg5 c6=
351
7...Qxe7 8.Qd2N
Position after: 8.Qd2N
The best plan for White is to castle long and to generate an offensive on the kingside. With this in mind,
Black should lunge on the queenside.
8...0-0 9.0-0-0
9.h3 Ngf6 10.Bd3 White’s play by castling short is not a problem for us. 10...a6 11.a4 b6 12.0-0 Bb7
We have achieved the removal of one minor piece so the lack of space doesn’t worry us much. The plan is
to transfer the d7-knight to the kingside. 13.Rfe1 Rfe8 14.Rad1 Nf8 15.Bc4 Ng6= with equality.
352
9...c6 10.h3 Ngf6 11.g4 b5
Come on, pawns!
12.g5
12.dxe5 Nxe5! 13.Bg2 Nc4 14.Qd3 Nd7ƒ with great chances of attack.
12...b4! 13.gxf6 Qxf6 14.Be2 bxc3 15.Qxc3 Qf4+
Position after: 15...Qf4+
16.Qe3
353
Seems best.
16.Kb1?! Nf6 17.Qxc6 Nxe4! 18.Qxa8 Ba6 19.Qxf8+ Kxf8–+
16...Qxe3+ 17.fxe3 exd4
18.exd4
18.Rxd4 is not the best way for White to play because of their poor structure. 18...Nf6 19.Bd3 [19.Rxd6??
Nxe4 20.Rxc6 Ng3 21.Re1 Nxe2+ 22.Rxe2 Bb7µ] 19...d5=
18...g6
We have no difficulties in this position; we only need to develop our pieces.
19.h4 Re8 20.Nd2 Nf6 21.Bd3 Be6=
354
With equal possibilities for both.
c) 5.Bd3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bd3
The idea is to defend the pawn with the bishop in order to free the c3-knight from that task, and thus it can
be transferred to the kingside. However, this does not give Black any trouble.
5...Be7 6.0-0 0-0
355
7.h3
A) 7.b3 to play Bb2 and put the e5-pawn under pressure. 7...c6 8.Bb2 Re8 To follow up with ...Bf8.
9.Ne2 exd4 10.Bxd4 Bf8 11.Ng3 Ne5=
B) 7.Re1 c6 8.Ne2 is a very logical move as essayed in Baramidze, D – Ponkratov, V Heraklio 2004.
8...d5!N Exploiting the poor coordination of White’s pieces. 9.dxe5 dxe4 10.exf6 Nxf6= with a fine
position for Black.
C) 7.Ne2 d5! The right moment. 8.Nxe5 as in Schmall, J – Schrepp, M Germany 1995. [8.dxe5 dxe4
9.exf6 Nxf6= This was seen in Berezjuk, S – Michalik, P Slovakia 2009. The position is totally equal.]
8...dxe4!N
Position after: 8...dxe4!N
The best move. 9.Bc4 Bd6 10.f4 exf3 11.Nxf3 c5³ and Black has a slight advantage because the
opponent’s king is weaker than ours.
7...c6 8.Re1 exd4 9.Nxd4 Re8
356
To follow up with ...Bf8 and a rapid attack on the e4-pawn.
10.Nf5
10.Bf4 Bf8 11.Bf1 [11.Qf3 Ne5= with a balanced position, as was played in Ortega Lopez, M –
Argandona Riveiro, I San Sebastian 2013.] 11...Nc5
Transferring to e6 and attacking the bishop. 12.Qf3 Ne6 13.Nxe6 Bxe6 14.Rad1 Qb6 15.Bc1 Rad8 and
Black is fine.
10...Bf8 11.Bg5 Ne5
357
With the aim of ...Bxf5.
12.Ne3 b5 13.a3
13.f4 Ng6 14.Qf3 h6 Forcing White to hand over the bishop pair. 15.Bxf6 Qxf6 16.e5 Qxf4 17.Qxc6
Be6= with an easier position for Black.
Position after: 13.a3
We have reached the game between Grandmasters Gashimov, V – Berg, E Gibraltar 2009.
13...h6N
A great move.
14.Bh4 g5!
In sequence with the previous move. The idea is to knock out that bishop and strengthen the position of
our knight on e5, thus compensating for the weaknesses we have generated.
15.Bg3 Bg7 16.Ne2
16.f4 gxf4 17.Bxf4 a5
358
In addition to earning space on the queenside, this move serves to allow the a8-rook to head to the center
via a7. 18.Bg3 Ra7 19.Rf1 Ng6 20.Qf3 Rae7= and the position seems more comfortable to play as Black,
who has all their pieces well-coordinated.
16...Nc4=
Taking advantage of the weakness of the e4-pawn, which renders Black’s position more comfortable to
play.
d) 5.Bg5
359
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bg5
This is the most natural development of the bishop with castling long in mind.
5...Be7 6.Bc4
6.Qd2 0-0 7.0-0-0 c6 to expand on the queenside with ...b5.
A) 8.h3 b5 9.Qe1 Qc7 10.g4 Re8µ as in Mas, H – Akobian, V Los Angeles 2011. White’s attack on the
kingside is not as fast as Black’s, and furthermore, Black has better development, so our position is
advantageous.
360
B) 8.Bxf6 Bxf6 9.g4 as tried in Zminda, B – Sernecki, F Poland 2014. 9...exd4!N 10.Nxd4 Nc5 11.Rg1
g6 In order to keep our bishop on the h8-a1 diagonal. 12.h4 Re8 13.g5 Bg7³ with a better position for us.
Position after: 13...Bg7³
We have the bishop pair and crucially, our dark-squared bishop is very strong.
C) 8.g4 b5 9.Bxf6 Nxf6
Black has managed to get hold of the bishop pair and their queenside attack is much more promising
than White’s. 10.g5 Nh5 11.h4 f6µ and once the f8-rook comes into play, Black’s advantage will be
clear. We also have control of the f4-square and the bishop pair.
6...0-0
361
7.Qd2
This seems the best option.

A) 7.h3 c6 Threatening ...d5 and ...b5. 8.a4 Nxe4! 9.Nxe4 d5³ with a better position.
B) 7.Qe2 c6 8.a4 as in Biros, R – Klemanic, E Slovakia 2010. 8...exd4N to put the knight on e5. 9.Nxd4
Ne5³ White must allow the light-squared bishop to be captured, otherwise Black can take on e4.
7...c6
With the idea of expanding on the queenside but this also serves to threaten ...d5 or ...Nxe4.
362
8.a4
A) 8.0-0-0? b5 9.Bd3 a5µ with a great attack.

B) 8.0-0 b5 9.Bd3 [9.Bb3?! b4 10.Bxf6 Nxf6 11.Ne2 a5³] 9...h6 10.Bh4 This was Stojanovski, S –
Tratar, M Skopje 2013. 10...exd4N 11.Nxd4 Ne5=
8...exd4
9.Qxd4
9.Nxd4? A mistake because of tactics. 9...Nxe4 10.Nxe4 as played in Denoyelle, A – Zawadski, S

Montpellier 1991. 10...Nc5!!N
363
Position after: 10...Nc5!!N
The best move by far. Now, Black recovers the material and obtains a great position. 11.Bxe7 [11.Nxc5
Bxg5 12.f4 Bh4+ 13.g3 dxc5µ] 11...Qxe7 12.f3 d5 13.0-0 Nxe4 14.fxe4 dxc4µ and Black has the
advantage due to the extra pawn and better structure.
9...Nc5
10.e5
A move that forces events but it is clear that Black is well-prepared because their king is already clearly
safer.
A) 10.Nd2? is a strange way to play that only serves to defend the central pawn. Now, we can develop
our pieces without any concerns. 10...Be6 11.0-0-0 [11.0-0 Bxc4 12.Qxc4 Ne6³] 11...Bxc4 12.Qxc4 b5µ
with a powerful attack on the queenside.
B) 10.0-0 Ncxe4! Seizing the moment. 11.Nxe4 Nxe4 12.Bxe7 Qxe7 13.Rfe1 d5
364
As we can see, Black does not have any difficulties whatsoever. 14.Bd3 Re8³
C) 10.0-0-0 Ncxe4! 11.Nxe4 Nxe4 12.Bxe7 Qxe7 13.Rhe1 Bf5 We have everything under control.
14.g4 Bg6 15.h4 h6! Keeping the bishop on the h7-b1 diagonal. 16.g5 d5 17.gxh6 Qf6 18.hxg7 Kxg7³
Position after: 18...Kxg7³
And although the black king seems weak, the poor position of the white pieces together with the bad
pawn structure, render Black’s position advantageous.
10...dxe5 11.Qxe5 Be6!
365
All the pieces are perfectly coordinated.
12.Bxf6
The best try.
12...Bxf6 13.Qxc5 Be7
Now, we recover the piece.
14.Qd4 Qxd4 15.Nxd4 Bxc4³
Position after: 15...Bxc4³
366
As played in the game Rocha, S – Oratovsky, M Lisbon 2000. It is clear that Black has an advantage in
this position because of the bishop pair.
e) 5.h3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.h3
The idea is to be able to place the bishop on e3 without it being attacked.
5...Be7 6.Be3 c6
Trying to expand on the queenside with ...b5 and looking for ...d5.
7.g4
The most aggressive way to play.

7.a4 0-0 8.Be2 d5!
367
Trying to exploit the fact that the white king is still in the middle of the board. 9.exd5 e4 10.Nd2 [10.Ne5
Nxd5 11.Nxd5 cxd5=] 10...cxd5 11.g4 Nb8=
Position after: 11...Nb8=
To improve the knight, following the game Bojovic, D – Suc, T Paracin 2011. White’s expansion on the
kingside does not seem dangerous. The idea is to play ...Nc6 and complete our development, keeping in
mind that we have a strong pawn center.
7...h6!
368
An important move.
8.a4
We are following Rodriguez Guerrero, E – Bertona, F Linares 2005.

8.Qd2 b5 9.a3 Sobolevsky, L – Janoszka, A Germany 2011. 9...a5N
Position after: 9...a5N
The plan is ...Bb7 followed by ...b4. 10.Rg1 Bb7 11.g5 hxg5 12.Nxg5 b4 13.Ne2 c5 14.d5 Ba6= and I
think that Black’s position is easier to play. Now, the aim is ...Nb6 to jump to c4.
8...Qa5N
369
Position after: 8...Qa5N
Threatening ...Nxe4.
9.Qd2
9.Nd2 Qb4=
9...a6 10.Bd3 Rb8
In order to expand with more force.
11.0-0
11.Ne2 Qxd2+ The exchange of queens does not have to concern us. 12.Nxd2 0-0 13.f4 exd4 14.Nxd4
Re8 15.Nf5 Bf8
370
Position after: 15...Bf8
Putting the e4-pawn under substantial pressure. 16.Kf2 g6 17.Ng3 b6 18.Rhe1 Nc5= with a good position
for Black.
11...g5!
Capitalizing on the fact that we have not castled yet whereas White has done so – the idea is to transfer the
d7-knight to the weak f4-square. Once the knight is installed there, we can try to react with ...h5 and attack
on the kingside.
12.Bc4
12.dxe5 Nxe5 13.Nxe5 dxe5 14.Bc4 Nh7„ As the knight that was heading for f4 has disappeared, the
plan is to use the other one, via f8 and g6.
12...Nf8 13.Rfd1 Ng6„
371
Position after: 13...Ng6„
Black’s king is in the center but is not suffering. Now, the aim is to bring the knight to f4 and then play
with ...h5. The black king can also always hide on g7. Taking all this into account, Black’s position is
easier to play.
f) 5.Be2 Be7 – Various 6th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Be2
The idea here is to play in a similar way as with the main move 5.Bc4, with the difference being that the
bishop on e2 cannot be attacked by the pawn expansion on the queenside. However, the bishop on e2 is
much more passive than on c4, so it is not problematic for Black.
372
5...Be7 6.g4!?
This is a move option that I find interesting and against which we have to be careful. It would not be
prudent for Black to take this pawn because, unlike the 5.g4 line (that will be discussed in the next
chapter), the g7-pawn is not defended here, and so Rg1 would be strong.
6.h3 To place the bishop on e3. 6...0-0 7.Be3 c6 with the same idea as for all the lines: ...b5 and ...d5.
8.0-0 [8.a4 d5 would transpose to the 5.h3 line discussed in the previous subchapter.] 8...b5 Threatening
...b4. 9.a3 a5! So as to play ...Bb7 and ...b4. 10.d5 Bb7 11.dxc6 Bxc6 We have significant pressure on the
e4-pawn. 12.Bxb5 Bxb5 13.Nxb5 Nxe4
373
Clearly, we should trade a lateral pawn for a central pawn. 14.Nd2 [14.c4 a4! Fixing the pawn structure.
15.Nd2 Nef6 16.Nb1 Nb6 17.Qe2 Qb8= with the idea of ...Rc8 pressing hard on the weak c4-pawn, and
hence Black’s position is more pleasant to play.] 14...Nef6 15.c4 d5 This extra option is also good. [15...a4
transposing to 14.c4.] 16.cxd5 Nxd5 17.Nc4 Nxe3 18.Nxe3 Nc5= with a good position for us as Black.
6...h6!
As White has weakened their kingside, it is best that we delay our castling and mobilize our forces on the
queenside to open up the center.
7.Rg1
Setting up g5, so it would not be a good idea for Black to castle. It is best to play with ...c6 and react in the
center.
7.g5 The most aggressive move but Black will have great counterplay. In addition, the h8-rook will come
into play quickly. 7...hxg5 8.Nxg5 c6
374
A) 9.Be3?! Ng4! 10.Bxg4 Bxg5 11.Qd2 Bxe3 12.Qxe3 Qh4³ as played in Khairullin, I – Mihajlovskij,
S St Petersburg 2007. White’s king is more exposed and the plan is to capture on d4 with the idea of
bringing the knight into play.
B) 9.Bc4 is a logical choice but meets with a great reply. 9...d5! 10.exd5 Nb6 11.dxe5 Nxc4 12.exf6
Bxf6 Now, it is Black who has the most active pieces and better pawn structure. 13.Qe2+ Qe7 14.dxc6
Qxe2+ 15.Kxe2 bxc6©
Position after: 15...bxc6©
Black has good compensation for the pawn. We have the bishop pair, more active pieces and the plan is
to castle long so as to have both rooks playing.
C) 9.a4 as in Ganguly, S – Morris, J Canberra 2016. 9...d5!N
375
C1) 10.dxe5 Nxe5 11.Qd4 Ng6 12.exd5 Nxd5 Attacking the g5-knight. 13.Nxd5 Qxd5 [13...cxd5!?]
14.Qxd5 cxd5= and Black has a good position thanks to the activity of the h8-rook.
C2) 10.exd5 Nxd5 11.Nxd5 cxd5 12.Rg1 e4 To take the knight and exploit the activity of our rook.
13.Bh5 Bxg5 14.Bxg5 Qc7„
Position after: 14...Qc7„
and Black has great counterplay in exchange for the bishop pair. Besides attacking the h2-pawn, one
possible idea is to play ...Nf8 followed by ...Ne6.
7...c6
376
Here, White has three options.
8.h4
This position was reached in Negi, P – Akshayraj, K Paris 2009.

A) 8.Be3 Intending to castle long. 8...Qc7 9.Qd2 b5 10.a3 as tried in Perez Pietronave, C – Lorenzini, M
Villa Martelli 2013.
10...Nb6!N To continue with ...a5 and ...b4. 11.g5 hxg5 12.Nxg5 [12.Rxg5? Ng4! and we catch the rook.
13.Rxg7 Bf6³] 12...a5„
377
Position after: 12...a5„
Black has ample counterplay on the queenside. We do not have to be concerned that our king is in the
center. Indeed, a good square for the king is f8, leaving the rook very active on h8.
B) 8.a4 avoiding ...b5, so now, we must continue with ...d5. 8...exd4 9.Nxd4 [9.Qxd4 Nc5 10.h3 Ne6=]
9...Nc5 10.f3 This was Amin, B – Khukhashvili, S Dubai 2012. 10...d5!N 11.e5
B1) 11...Nfd7!? is very interesting. 12.f4 g5! To weaken the central e5-pawn. 13.a5 gxf4 14.Bxf4 Bh4+
15.Kf1 Nf8 Improving the knight, transferring it to the kingside and activating our light-squared
bishop. 16.Bg3 Ng6„
378
Position after: 16...Ng6„
Black has great counterplay. One possibility is to move the king to g7 and bring the h8-rook into play.
B2) 11...Nh7 12.Nf5 Bxf5! 13.gxf5 d4 14.b4 seems the best reaction. 14...Nb3! is an important move
to give our bishop play. 15.cxb3 Bxb4 16.Kf1 Bxc3 17.Ra2
Position after: 17.Ra2
17...d3 18.Bxd3 Bxe5 19.Re2 Qd5= and after castling long, our position will be easier to play due to
the poor situation of the white king.
8...Nf8!N
An important move. We capitalize on the fact that we have not yet castled to bring the knight very quickly
to the kingside, transferring it to f4.
379
Position after: 8...Nf8!N
9.g5
9.dxe5 Nxg4 10.exd6 Qxd6= and we have the better pawn structure.
9...hxg5 10.hxg5 Ng4 11.a4
Trying to avoid ...b5.
11...Ng6 12.a5 b5! 13.axb6 Qxb6„
Position after: 13...Qxb6„
With great activity for our pieces.
380
g) 5.Be2 Be7 6.0-0
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Be2 Be7 6.0-0 0-0
Here, White has several moves. In my opinion, 7.a4 is the best reaction for White.
7.a4
A) 7.Bg5 h6 8.Bh4 c6 This serves both to expand with ...b5 and to play with ...d5, or ...Nxe4 taking
advantage of the bishop’s position on h4. 9.a4 a5!
381
To play ...Qb6 attacking the center. 10.Qd2 Nxe4! 11.Nxe4 Bxh4 12.Nxd6 [12.Nxh4?! d5!³] 12...Bf6=
as in Bruned Segura, M – Torrecillas Martinez, A Spain 1999. The position is balanced.
B) 7.Re1 The aim is to place the bishop on f1 and to defend e4 with more pieces. 7...b6 8.Bf1 Bb7 9.d5
Closing the center as in Rosen, W – Braun, G Freudenstadt 1996. 9...c6N
Position after: 9...c6N
We need to open up the position! 10.dxc6 Bxc6 11.Bg5 h6 12.Bh4 b5! The best move, in order to play
...b4. 13.Bxb5 Bxb5 14.Nxb5 Qb6 In exchange for the pawn, we have plenty of counterplay on the
queenside. 15.Bxf6 Nxf6 16.Qd3 d5!=
Position after: 16...d5!=
Although there is equality, the position is much easier to play as Black.
382
C) 7.Be3 b6 8.d5 Bb7 9.Nd2 c6 We have to open up to give play to our pieces. 10.dxc6 Bxc6 11.Bc4
Rc8
In exchange for weakening the d5-square, we obtain counterplay on the c-file and a good attack on the
e4-pawn. 12.Qe2 [12.f3 Nb8!= and we are ready to play ...d5.] 12...Bb7 13.Ba6 [13.Rad1 Nc5 14.f3
Qc7 15.b3 Ne6= Transferring to f4 with a good position.] 13...Bxa6 14.Qxa6 d5!
15.exd5 [15.Nxd5 Nxd5 16.exd5 f5„ with good counterplay on the kingside.] 15...Nc5 16.Bxc5 Bxc5
17.Rad1 Bd4= We want to take on c3 with a comfortable position for us.
D) 7.h3 The main move. 7...b6
383
To play ...Bb7 and exert pressure on the e4-pawn.

D1) 8.Bg5 h6 9.Bh4 Bb7 10.Bd3 Nh5! To exchange bishops and exploit the weakness of the f4-square.
11.Bxe7 Qxe7=
D2) 8.d5 Bb7 9.Re1 a6 With the idea to continue with ...c6. 10.a4 c6 11.dxc6 Bxc6 12.Bf1 Qc7=
D3) 8.Re1 Bb7 9.Bf1 Re8 10.d5 c6 11.dxc6 Bxc6 12.Bg5 h6 13.Bxf6 Nxf6 and Black has nothing to
fear in this position.
D4) 8.Be3 Bb7 9.d5 c6 10.dxc6 Bxc6 All our pieces point to the e4-pawn; we only need to improve our
queen and b7 is the best square. 11.Bd3 Qc7 [11...Nc5!? 12.Bxc5 bxc5=] 12.Re1 Qb7= and Black’s
position seems easier to play. Now, the plan is to bring the rooks into play and, if possible, play ...d5.
7...b6!
384
The best way to bring the bishop into play and attack the center.
8.a5N
The only critical move.

A) 8.Re1 a6 9.Bf1 Bb7 10.d5 as tried in Shvayger, Y – Nevednichy, V Kavala 2016. 10...a5N
Arriving at a very standard structure that is described in the Introduction to this book, in which the plans
for Black are indicated. These all lead to creating counterplay on the kingside.
B) 8.d5 Nc5 9.Nd2 a5! Playing in the same way as after 8.Re1.

385
Once the queenside is closed, Black prepares to create counterplay on the kingside. 10.b3 [10.Re1 Nfd7!
To play ...Bg5 and exchange our bad bishop, then ...f5. 11.Nf1 Bg5=] 10...g6 To play ...Ne8-g7 followed
by ...f5. 11.Bb5 Nh5 12.Bc6 Rb8 13.Nc4 Bg5 14.Ba3 Nb7„ Black is ready to initiate actions on the
kingside, gaining plenty of counterplay.
8...bxa5!
Even if we weaken the structure, it’s the best way to play. The idea is that while White is engaged in
recovering the pawn, we will create counterplay along the b-file and also quickly attack the center.
9.Be3
A) 9.d5 Bb7 10.Nd2 Nc5 11.f3 c6 12.Nc4 cxd5 13.exd5 a4= and our pieces are well-coordinated.
B) 9.Bc4 is not problematic for us. 9...Bb7 10.Re1 h6!
386
Once the white bishop is on c4, it is crucial to play ...h6, so as to bring the rook into play from e8.
Otherwise, White would have the option of Ng5 attacking f7. 11.h3 Re8 12.dxe5 dxe5 13.Nh4 Nb6=
and Black has no problems in this position where they are already prepared to exchange queens.
C) 9.dxe5!? To recover the pawn but there is an interesting hidden exchange sacrifice. 9...dxe5 10.Rxa5
Bb4!
11.Nxe5 The idea behind 9.dxe5. 11...Bxa5 12.Nc6 Qe8 13.Nxa5 Nc5! 14.f3 Ba6© To eliminate the
opponent’s bishop pair. White has compensation for the exchange but Black will be more comfortable.
9...c6
387
To defend the a5-pawn and prepare ...d5.
10.Qb1
The best move.

A) 10.dxe5 dxe5 11.Nd2 Qc7 12.Nb3 Bb4 It turns out that it is not simple for White to regain the pawn.
13.f3 Nh5 14.g3 Nb6 with a balanced position.
B) 10.Nd2 d5! The right moment. 11.exd5 [11.dxe5 Nxe5 12.Bd4 Ng6 All our pieces are well-placed.
13.exd5 Nxd5 14.Nxd5 Qxd5 15.Bc3 Bb4 Black’s position seems more comfortable to play and we
have an extra pawn. 16.Bf3 Qb5=] 11...cxd5 12.Nb3 Bb4 13.Nb5
Position after: 13.Nb5
388
The best move to expel the bishop from b4 so as to take the pawn. 13...a6 14.c3 Be7 15.Rxa5 Bb7=
C) 10.Ra2 Preparing Qa1. 10...Re8 As the a5-pawn cannot be defended, we must counterattack the
center very quickly. 11.Qa1 exd4 12.Nxd4 Qc7 13.Rxa5 Bf8 14.b4 Bb7!
15.Rd1 Nxe4 16.Nxe4 Rxe4 17.Rxa7 Ree8= without any difficulties for us.
D) 10.h3 A typical move but it doesn’t make much sense now. 10...Qc7 11.Nd2 Rb8 12.Nc4 d5!
13.dxe5 [13.exd5 Nxd5 14.Nxd5 cxd5 The exchange of pieces favors us. 15.Nxe5 Nxe5 16.dxe5
Rxb2=] 13...Nxe5 14.Nxe5 [14.exd5 and now we can exchange knights. 14...Nxc4 15.Bxc4 cxd5
16.Nxd5 Nxd5 17.Bxd5 Rxb2=] 14...Qxe5 15.Bd4 Qg5
389
Position after: 15...Qg5
The queen enters the fray, with the threat of ...Bxh3. 16.exd5 [16.f4?! only weakens the White position.
16...Qg6 17.f5 Qg5 18.e5 Nd7³ and the plan is to introduce the dark-squared bishop into play through
the maneuver ...Bd8-c7, with an advantageous position for Black.] 16...Bxh3 17.Bf3 Nxd5 18.Nxd5
cxd5 19.Rxa5 Be6= with a balanced position.
10...Qc7
To defend the e5-pawn.
11.Qa2 Rb8
Position after: 11...Rb8
390
12.Rfb1!
The best try.

12.b3 d5! 13.exd5 e4 14.Nd2 cxd5= and 12.Qxa5 Qxa5 13.Rxa5 Rxb2= both lead to equality.
12...Bd8 13.dxe5!
To take control of the c5-square.
13...Nxe5 14.Nxe5 dxe5 15.Bc5 Re8 16.Qa3
Threatening Bd6.
16...Qb7 17.Bd6 Ra8
Black has a poor structure but an extra pawn.
Position after: 17...Ra8
18.f3
The idea is to free the knight from having to defend the central pawn in order to transfer it to c5.
18...Qb6+ 19.Kh1 Qe3 20.Qc5 Qxc5 21.Bxc5 Nd7=
391
With a balanced position. The extra pawn makes up for the poor pawn structure. Now our idea is to play
...Bb6 and look for quick piece development.
h) 5.g3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.g3
An idea that seems harmless but is gaining popularity. The point of this move is to use the bishop to
defend the central pawn and thus, free the knights from that task. In addition, the bishop on g2 will not
interfere with the rook, which will be on e1.
392
5...Be7 6.Bg2 0-0 7.0-0 c6
8.a4
The main line avoiding our idea of ...b5.

A) 8.Nh4 as in Csapo, Z – Vujosevic, V Budapest 2000. 8...exd4N Taking advantage of the fact that the
knight is on h4. 9.Qxd4 d5! 10.exd5 Nb6=
Black’s position is easier to play. Now, we will capture on d5 with a knight without any problems.
393
B) 8.h3 b5 9.a3 Re8 10.Be3 This was Ziatdinov, R – Strikovic, A Dos Hermanas 2003. 10...a5N To play
...Bb7 followed by ...b4. 11.Nd2 Bb7 12.Re1 Bf8=
The position is balanced, all our pieces are well-placed and it’s slightly easier to play as Black.
C) 8.Re1 b5 9.b3 The a1-h8 diagonal is probably the best for the bishop. 9...Bb7 10.Bb2 Re8 The rook
comes into play, exerting pressure on the e4-pawn. 11.a4 a6
12.Nb1 [12.Qd2 Bf8 13.axb5 axb5 14.Rxa8 Qxa8= with equality, as in the game Visser, Y – Cifuentes
Parada, R Hoogeveen 2000.] 12...Bf8 13.Nbd2 Following the game Markovic, M – Popchev, M Novi
Sad 2019. 13...exd4N The idea is to press in the center so as to give life to the bishop on f8 through the
diagonal a1-h8. 14.Nxd4 g6= with a balanced position.
394
The dark-squared bishop will have a good diagonal into which to come into play and the plan is to play
...c5 and keep attacking the central pawn.
8...b6
Avoiding a5. Now the main line is 9.b3, but White has several alternatives.
9.b3
A) 9.Be3 The aim is to defend the pawn and to transfer the knight to the queenside. 9...a6 To expand
with ...b5. 10.Nd2 Bb7 11.f4 b5 12.Qf3 [12.h3 b4 13.Ne2 a5= Onischuk, V – Kunin, V Riga 2019]
395
12...h6
Avoiding a possible Bg5 and freeing the h7-square for the knight if necessary. 13.h3 Re8 14.g4 exd4 The
aim is to improve the f6-knight by transferring it to g6 or e6. 15.Bxd4 Nh7 16.Ne2 c5 17.Bf2 Nhf8=
with an equal position. White has difficulties attacking on the kingside and we are ready to play ...Bf6
and ...Ng6.
B) 9.d5 This is not a problem for Black because we can activate the light-squared bishop and create
counterplay through the c-file. 9...cxd5 10.exd5 [10.Nxd5 Nxd5 11.Qxd5 Ba6 12.Rd1 Rc8 13.Qd2 Qc7
14.Ne1 Nc5= as in Jussupow, A – Kogan, A Puhajarve 2018. The position is balanced.] 10...Bb7
11.Nd2 Rc8 Avoiding Nc4.
396
12.Re1 [12.a5 a6! 13.axb6 Nxb6 We have control of the c4-square and can powerfully attack the central
pawn. 14.Nb3 Nc4 15.Re1 Qd7= The plan is to transfer the dark-squared bishop to b6.] 12...a6 13.Nf1
This was Williamson, R – Haslinger, S Port Erin 2009. 13...Ne8N Intending ...f5 and ...Bf6. 14.f4 exf4
15.Bxf4 Bf6=
C) 9.Nh4 A typical maneuver to place the knight on f5. 9...g6
C1) 10.f4? exd4 11.Qxd4 d5!³ and the weakness of the white king gives Black an advantage. Now the
threat is ...Bc5.
C2) 10.Bg5 Re8 11.dxe5 dxe5 12.Qf3 as played in Kovalevskaya, E – Sanal, V Moscow 2020.
12...Kg7N The king is a piece that can help us in defense. The idea is to activate the d7-knight.
13.Rad1 Qc7 14.Qe3 Nf8³
397
Position after: 14...Nf8³
The position is more comfortable for Black. The plan is to play ...Ne6 followed by ...Nd4.
C3) 10.Bh6 Re8 11.h3 This was Klawa, P – Braun, G Germany 2009. 11...Bb7N
Position after: 11...Bb7N
We are ready to play ...d5.

C3.1) 12.Kh2 d5! 13.exd5 cxd5 14.dxe5 Nxe5=
C3.2) 12.Qd2 d5! 13.exd5 cxd5 14.dxe5 Nxe5 Activating all the pieces. 15.Rad1 Rc8„
Position after: 15...Rc8„
The isolated pawn is more than compensated for by the great counterplay that exists, thanks to our
control of the c-file and the e4-square for the f6-knight.
398
D) 9.Re1 Re8 10.Nb1N White’s standard idea in this 5.g3 line is to place the knight on d2 in order to
clear the a1-h8 diagonal, so that the bishop, from b2, has more activity. [10.Nh4 as in Antoniewski, R –
Jovanovic, Z Sibenik 2012. 10...g6N 11.Bh6 Bb7 Transposing to 9.Nh4.] 10...Bf8 11.Nbd2 Bb7 12.b3
Qc7 13.Bb2 Rad8
Position after: 13...Rad8
We have all our pieces on good squares, so we are ready to play ...d5. 14.c4 exd4! 15.Nxd4 d5! 16.Qc2
[16.cxd5 cxd5 17.exd5 Bxd5=] 16...Qb8! Removing the queen from the line of fire. 17.N4f3 [17.Nf5 g6
18.Ne3 Ne5=] 17...dxe4 18.Nxe4 Rxe4 19.Rxe4 Nxe4 20.Qxe4 Nc5 21.Qc2 Threatening Ng5.
21...Qd6 To play ...Qd3. 22.Nd4 a5= with a balanced position. The plan is to activate the dark-squared
bishop with ...g6 followed by ...Bg7.
399
Let’s return to 9.b3.
Position after: 9.b3
9...Re8!
We must attack the e4-pawn quickly so as not to allow White a harmonious transition of their pieces.
9...a6 is the main move in the position but allows White to rearrange their pieces. 10.Bb2 Re8 11.Re1 Bb7
12.Nb1! White arrives in time to place their knight on d2. 12...Bf8 13.Nbd2
Position after: 13.Nbd2
Following the game Henderson de la Fuente, L – Kadric, D Evora 2019. 13...b5 The best try. 14.c3! [14.c4
exd4 15.Nxd4 bxa4 16.bxa4 Rb8„ The plan is to improve both the d7-knight through ...Nc5 and the f8-
bishop by playing ...g6.] 14...g6 15.Qc2 Bg7 16.b4
400
Although the engines say that the position is balanced, it seems to me much more comfortable to play as
White, thanks to the space advantage.
After 9...Re8! White has a choice.
Position after: 9...Re8!
10.Re1
A) 10.Ba3 is not a problem. 10...Bb7 11.dxe5 dxe5 As we have been reiterating in many chapters,
whenever possible it is better to take on e5 with a pawn. In this way we gain the c5-square for our
knight. 12.Bd6 Bxd6 13.Qxd6 Nc5 14.Qxd8 Raxd8 15.Rad1 Rxd1 16.Rxd1 Kf8= with a totally equal
endgame.
401
B) 10.d5 cxd5 11.exd5 Nc5 12.Nxe5 The best try. 12...dxe5 13.d6
B1) 13...Bb7 14.Bxb7 Nxb7 15.dxe7 Qxe7 It seems that Black has come out well; the exchange of
pieces has only served to weaken the white king. 16.Bg5 Qc5 17.Qf3 [17.Bxf6 Qxc3 18.Qg4 g6=
Following by ...Re6 without any problem for us.] 17...e4 To exchange queens. 18.Qe3 Qxe3 19.Bxe3
Rac8
Position after: 19...Rac8
Black’s position is easier to play. 20.Nb5 [20.Bd4 Red8 21.Bxf6 gxf6 22.Nxe4 f5 23.Nf6+ Kg7
24.Nh5+ Kh6 25.Nf4 Rxc2=] 20...Rxc2 21.Nxa7 Nd5=
B2) 13...Bg4!? is also possible. 14.dxe7 Qxe7 15.Nd5 Qe6 Now, it is Black who has more
development so we have nothing to worry about. 16.Nxf6+ gxf6 17.Qd2 Rad8 18.Qh6 Bf5=
402
Even if the black king seems weak, the bishop will be placed on g6 and there will be no way to attack
it.
10...Bb7
11.a5

A) 11.Bb2 Bf8! with the idea of taking on d4.
403
Position after: 11...Bf8!
A1) 12.d5 a6 13.Nd2 b5 14.dxc6 Bxc6=

A2) 12.Qd2 a6 13.Rad1 Qc7 14.Nh4 g6 15.Ba3 as played in Garagulya, K – Ivanov, T Tomsk 2001.
15...exd4N Exploiting the fact that White has to recapture with the queen. 16.Qxd4 c5 17.Qd3 Rac8
18.Bb2 c4 19.Qd4 Qc5= with a comfortable position.
A3) 12.Nb1N 12...exd4 13.Nxd4 c5! Attacking the central pawn with all available pieces.
A3.1) 14.Nf5?! Bxe4 15.Bxe4 Nxe4 16.c4 [16.Qg4? h5!µ] 16...g6 17.Ne3 Bg7 18.Bxg7 Kxg7µ and
White does not have enough compensation.
A3.2) 14.Nb5 Bxe4 15.Bxe4 Nxe4 16.Nd2 a6! 17.Nxe4 [17.Rxe4 axb5 18.axb5 Rxa1 19.Bxa1 d5=]
17...axb5 18.axb5 [18.Qh5 h6!³] 18...Rxa1 19.Bxa1 Qa8=
404
Position after: 19...Qa8=
With a fully balanced position, although the central pawn gives Black a position with greater
potential.
B) 11.d5 Qc7 12.dxc6 Bxc6 13.Nd2 a6 getting ready to play ...b5. 14.Nc4 b5 15.Ne3 bxa4 16.bxa4
Bb7=
11...Rb8
12.Be3
405
A) 12.axb6 axb6 13.Bb2 Bf8 14.Nb1 b5 15.Nbd2 exd4! Opening the a1-h8 diagonal to activate our
bishop. 16.Nxd4 g6 17.c4 b4=
B) 12.a6 doesn’t seem worrisome. 12...Ba8 13.Bb2 Bf8 14.Nb1 b5 15.Nbd2 exd4! To put the knight on
e5. 16.Nxd4 c5 17.Nf5 g6 18.Ne3 Ne5= with a balanced position.
12...Qc7
13.a6
13.Nd2 exd4 14.Bxd4 Bf8 15.a6 [15.b4 bxa5 16.Bxa7 Ra8 17.Rxa5 c5!„] 15...Ba8„ with great
counterplay on the queenside by playing ...c5 and ...b5.
13...Ba8 14.d5 b5 15.dxc6 Bxc6 16.Nd2 Nb6!
406
Position after: 16...Nb6!
Besides improving the knight, the idea is clear: to play ...d5.
17.Qe2 b4 18.Nb5 Qd7 19.c4 bxc3 20.Nxc3 d5!
And we finally break free.
21.Bxb6 Rxb6 22.exd5 Nxd5 23.Nxd5 Bxd5
Position after: 23...Bxd5
As we can see, we have reached a totally balanced position in which our pieces have great play.
24.Nc4
407
24.Bxd5 Qxd5 25.Qxe5 To make a draw. 25...Qxd2 26.Rad1 f6!
A crucial move. 27.Qh5 g6! 28.Qxh7+ Kxh7 29.Rxd2 Kg8= White has good compensation for the piece.
24...Bxc4 25.Qxc4 Rc8=
With a totally equal position, thanks to the activity of the pieces and the fact that there are opposite-
colored bishops.
i) 5.Rg1
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Rg1

408
Position after: 5.Rg1
A move that was introduced into practice by Grandmaster Alfonso Romero Holmes in 2003 and, since
then, has become popular. It has been used by very high-level players such as the Grandmasters Richard
Rapport and Ivan Saric. The idea is very clear: to play g4 but, unlike in the line with 5.g4 that we will
analyze in the next chapter, here the pawn is not left undefended.
5...c6 6.g4 h6!
The best response is to stop the pawn’s advance.
7.Be3
409
A) 7.g5? is a bad decision. 7...hxg5 8.Nxg5 [8.Bxg5 Qb6µ] 8...exd4 Luring the white queen to the
middle of the board. 9.Qxd4 Qb6!
Position after: 9...Qb6!
It is clear that Black should exchange queens due to their clearly superior pawn structure.
A1) 10.Qe3 Ne5 Trying to exploit the weakness of the g4-square. 11.f4 Qxe3+ 12.Bxe3 Nfg4! 13.Bd2
f6 14.fxe5 Nxe5µ
A2) 10.Qd2 as in Edouard, R – Savina, A Chartres 2017. 10...Ne5!N 11.Na4 Qd8 Threatening ...Nxe4.
12.Be2 [12.f4 Nxe4µ] 12...Be7 13.f4 Ng6µ and Black has a clear advantage, thanks to the superior
position of the king and the activity of the pieces.
410
A3) 10.Be3 Qxb2 No fear! 11.Rb1 Qa3 12.f4 Nb6 13.Rb3 Qa5³ and White does not have enough
compensation for the pawn.
B) 7.h4 exd4
B1) 8.Qxd4 Qb6! We want to remove queens from the board. 9.Be3 Qxd4 10.Bxd4 Nc5 A great
square for the knight from which it can attack the center. Additionally, the g4-pawn is now very weak.
11.e5 Nxg4 12.exd6 Bxd6 13.Bxg7 Rg8 14.Bd4 Be6 15.0-0-0 0-0-0= with a good position for Black.
B2) 8.Nxd4 Ne5 Trying to play ...d5. 9.g5 [9.f3?? is a horrendous move played in Ochedzan, T –
Calin, A chess.com 2020. 9...Nfxg4!N 10.fxg4 Qxh4+ 11.Kd2 Qf2+ 12.Nce2 Bxg4 13.Rg2 Qf6–+]
9...hxg5 10.hxg5 Nfg4 Installing our pieces in the opponent’s territory. 11.Be2
411
B2.1) 11...Rh2!? is an interesting idea. 12.f4 Qb6! A great piece sacrifice. 13.fxe5 dxe5 14.Bxg4 exd4
15.Bxc8 Rxc8 16.Bf4 dxc3! 17.Bxh2 cxb2©
Position after: 17...cxb2©
Despite the big material deficit, the precarious situation of the white king gives us ample
compensation.
B2.2) 11...Nh2 To follow up with ...Rh3. 12.f4 Qb6! 13.Rg3 Nhg4! Launching our h8-rook into play.
14.Kf1 Rh1+ 15.Rg1 Rh2 Our rook is a vital piece for our attack, so we don’t want to exchange it.
16.fxe5 dxe5 17.Bxg4 Bxg4 18.Qxg4 Qxd4 19.Qg3 Rxc2©
Position after: 19...Rxc2©
We have plenty of compensation for the sacrificed piece: two white pawns and a very weak white
king. Now the idea is to castle long.
412
7...b5
We must expand on the queenside, threatening ...b4.
8.a3
8.g5 hxg5 9.Nxg5 b4 10.Nb1 d5!
11.Nd2 [11.Qe2 exd4 12.Bxd4 c5 13.exd5+ Qe7 14.Bxf6 Qxe2+ 15.Bxe2 gxf6 and we are able to
activate all the pieces. 16.Nf3 Nb6 17.Nbd2 Bb7 18.Bb5+ Kd8= with a good position.
413
Position after: 18...Kd8=
The king will be safe on c7 and we have the bishop pair.] 11...exd4 12.Bxd4 c5 13.Be3 d4 14.Bf4 Nh5 It
is important to remove that bishop and hence, take control of the e5-square. 15.Qf3 Nxf4 16.e5 f6!
17.exf6 gxf6 18.0-0-0 Qe7 19.Bb5 Rb8
A) 20.Rde1 fxg5! The best way is to sacrifice the queen. In return, we will capture many pieces.
21.Rxe7+ Bxe7 22.Qe4 Rb6 Black has one rook and two minor pieces against the white queen, more
than enough compensation. 23.Rxg5 Kd8! 24.Qxf4 Rf8 25.Qg3 Rxb5=
414
Position after: 25...Rxb5=
and we don’t have any problems in this position.

B) 20.Bxd7+ Kxd7 21.Qxf4 Qd6 Forcing the exchange of queens. 22.Qxd6+ Bxd6 23.Nf7 Rf8
24.Nxd6 Kxd6= with an equal endgame.
8...Qc7
The idea is to defend the e5-pawn, and allow us to improve our d7-knight.
9.h4
9.Qd2 as in El Jawich, A – Goutali, T Doha 2011. 9...Be7N
415
Position after: 9...Be7N
A) 10.Be2 Nb6 11.h3 Nc4 12.Bxc4 bxc4= The position seems easier to play as Black, thanks to the
bishop pair and the counterplay that we have on the b-file.
B) 10.g5 hxg5 11.Nxg5 Rxh2 12.0-0-0 [12.d5?! does not solve White’s problems. 12...cxd5 13.Nxd5
Nxd5 14.Qxd5 Bxg5! Exploiting the fact that White cannot take the rook. 15.Qxa8?? Bxe3 16.fxe3
Qxc2–+] 12...a5= The position is balanced, but more comfortable to play with Black, due to the
queenside counterplay with greater attacking possibilities.
C) 10.h4 Nb6 Attacking g4. 11.g5 hxg5 12.hxg5 Ng4 A great square for the knight. 13.0-0-0 [13.g6 f6
14.d5 Nxe3 15.fxe3 a6 to hold the b5-pawn and now the plan is to castle long. 16.0-0-0 Bd7=] 13...Nxe3
14.Qxe3 g6
416
Once we have stopped our opponent on the kingside, it is time to develop our light-squared bishop and
castle long. 15.Be2 Bd7 16.Rh1 0-0-0= The position is more pleasant to play as Black, thanks to the
bishop pair.
9...Nb6!
Rapidly attacking the g4-pawn.
10.Nd2
10.g5 hxg5 11.hxg5 Ng4 To capture the bishop. 12.Bd2 a6 13.Qe2 g6 14.0-0-0 a5= Once White has
castled, it is the perfect moment to launch a queenside offensive.
10...h5
The idea is to obtain the g4-square or activate our rook, depending on White’s decision.
11.gxh5
11.g5 Ng4 12.d5 Nxe3 13.fxe3 a6= The position looks great for Black.
11...Rxh5 12.Bg5 Rh8 13.d5 a6
417
To ensure that the b5-pawn is well-defended.
14.Qf3 Be7 15.0-0-0
This position was reached in the correspondence game Egner, M – Giesel, M email 2015.
15...Bd7N
Position after: 15...Bd7N
Given that the white king is already castled, the plan for us is to attack, so we clear the c8-square for the
rook.
418
16.Kb1
16.dxc6 Qxc6 17.Kb1 Rc8 18.Rc1 Kf8!
Position after: 18...Kf8!
The king is very safe on f8 from where he protects the weak g7-pawn. 19.Be2 [19.Bh3 Bxh3 20.Qxh3
a5=] 19...Be6 20.Qg3 g6= with equality. Now, the idea is to play ...Na4 to eliminate one of White’s best
defensive pieces.
16...Rc8 17.Rc1 Qb7
Exerting substantial pressure.
18.dxc6 Qxc6 19.Bh3 a5
419
It’s time to attack!
20.Nd5
20.Bxd7+ Qxd7 21.Ne2 b4 22.axb4 axb4= with the initiative for Black.
20...Nbxd5 21.Bxd7+ Qxd7 22.exd5 b4 23.c4!
Position after: 23.c4!
White has to react if they do not want to be ferociously attacked.
23...bxc3 24.Rxc3 Rxc3 25.Qxc3 Nxd5
It is best to take the central pawn. It seems dangerous because we have the king in the middle and we are
opening up lines but actually, White has no way of assembling a clear attack.
26.Qb3 Bxg5 27.hxg5 Nf4=
420
Position after: 27...Nf4=
With a balanced position, although it is White who has to show that they have full compensation for the
sacrificed central pawn. The black king will be safe on e7 and now, the idea is to bring the rook into play.
We have seen that White has several reasonable options to the main move, which is 5.Bc4.
5.a4 and 5.Bd3 are very unusual lines against which Black has simple equalizing mechanisms, such as
strengthening in the center by the standard maneuver ...Re8 followed by ...Bf8, with the idea of taking on
d4 and exerting pressure on the central e4-pawn.
5.Be3 does not seem dangerous for us either, because we have the great riposte 5...Ng4!, to which the best
answer is 6.Bg5, and after 6...Be7, Black’s position is easy to play.
5.Bg5 and 5.h3 aim for a plan to castle long, so the standard plan for Black is to expand on the queenside
with ...c6 and ...b5.
5.Be2 and 5.g3 are becoming very popular. Against both, our plan is very similar: very quickly pressure
the e4-pawn with ...Re8 and ...Bf8. If necessary, we can also include the light-squared bishop to attack
with ...b6 followed by ...Bb7.
Finally, the most critical option seems to be 5.Rg1: the idea here is to play g4 exerting pressure on the
kingside, which sometimes leads to lines with very concrete moves, including some sacrifices. We have to
be especially careful with this variation from White, but as we can see from our study, Black will obtain
good positions.
421
Chapter 10
5.g4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.g4
Chapter Guide
Chapter 10 – 5.g4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.g4 Nxg4 6.Rg1 Ngf6
a) 7.Be3
b) 7.Bc4 h6 8.Be3 c6 – Rare 9th Moves
c) 7.Bc4 h6 8.Be3 c6 9.dxe5 dxe5 – Various 10th Moves
d) 7.Bc4 h6 8.Be3 c6 9.dxe5 10.Qd3
a) 7.Be3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.g4
422
This is a very interesting option for White that was made fashionable by the elite Grandmaster Alexei
Shirov in his game against Grandmaster Zurab Azmaiparashvili at the European Team Championship on
2003. Since then he has used it several times with great results and the popularity of 5.g4 has grown
tremendously. We must recognize that it is possibly the most aggressive line for White against the Philidor
Defense and if we are not well-prepared, this variation will land Black in serious trouble.
5...Nxg4
The best way to fight against a gambit is to accept the challenge.
6.Rg1
This is White’s idea. Now, the rook occupies the open file and prevents the development of the f8-bishop,
thus exerting pressure on the g7-pawn.
6...Ngf6 7.Be3
423
Although the main line is 7.Bc4 which will be discussed later, this move deserves consideration because it
has been used many times by elite players such as the Grandmasters Anish Giri and Shakhriyar
Mamedyarov. The idea behind 7.Be3 is to castle long as soon as possible.
7...c6
Even though this is mainly aimed at gaining control of the d5-square, it can also be used in the future to
expand on the queenside.
8.Qd2 g6
With White’s g-pawn missing, a solid way to defend our king is to castle short with a fianchetto.
9.0-0-0 Qe7
424
White is threatening to take on e5 so it’s best to play in this fashion to keep control of the center. One plan
is to place a knight on h5 and to transfer the other to f3. Now, White has two main options.
10.Ng5
The best. The idea is to provoke ...h6 so that the pawn can be attacked and this will make it difficult for
Black to castle.
10.dxe5 dxe5 As we have already reiterated, whenever possible it is better to take with the pawn. 11.Nh4
Preparing f4. 11...Nh5! 12.Bg5 Ndf6= as played in the game Barrenechea Bahamonde, G – Paunovic, D
Elgoibar 2013. Black will continue with ...h6 followed by the development of their bishops with a position
that is more comfortable to play.
10...h6
Although White’s intention was to force this move, we have no choice. We can’t allow the knight to stay
on g5 because a possible threat is Bc4, attacking the f7-pawn.
11.Nf3 Bg7 12.a4
425
This position was reached in Giri, A – Driessens, P Netherlands 2013.
12...Kf8!N
A very good move. The king goes to h7. Meanwhile, White seems to have no way of taking advantage of
it.
13.dxe5
It seems best to open up the position.
13...Nxe5
Now, it is important to capture with the knight. The idea is to transfer it to g4.
14.Nxe5 dxe5
426
15.Bc4
Avoiding ...Kg8.
15.f4 is an active move but Black is well-prepared. 15...exf4 16.Bxf4 Kg8 The king will be very safe on
h7. 17.Bd6 Qe6
18.e5! [18.Re1 Ng4 and it is best for White to continue with e5, transposing to 18.e5.] 18...Nd7
Threatening the e5-pawn. 19.Re1 Nxe5 20.Bxe5 Bxe5 Threatening ...Bf4. 21.Bc4 There isn’t anything
better. 21...Qxc4 22.Rxe5 Be6
427
Black is managing to develop their pieces while keeping two extra pawns. 23.Qf2! A very precise move
that threatens b3 and then to take the bishop with the rook, once it is not defended by the queen.
23...Rh7!= White has compensation for the two sacrificed pawns but not much more. The h7-rook defends
our king very well and now we can develop our other rook.
15...Be6 16.Bxe6 Qxe6
Position after: 16...Qxe6
With equality. Now, White cannot prevent our king maneuver, so Black has an extra pawn and it is White
who must act.
17.a5
428
The best try.
17...Kg8 18.Qd6! Qc4 19.Qe7
19.Qxe5 Ng4! 20.Qc5 Nxe3 21.Qxe3 Re8=
19...Kh7
Position after: 19...Kh7
Black is ready to complete their development.
20.Qxb7
A) 20.Rd6 Rhe8 21.Qxb7 Reb8=

B) 20.Rd3 Rhe8 21.Qxb7 Rab8 22.Qc7 Rbc8 23.Qxa7 Ra8=
20...Rhb8 21.Qe7
429
21...Rxb2!
This is Black’s best attempt to fight for the win.
22.Kxb2 Rb8+ 23.Kc1
23.Bb6 axb6 24.a6 Ra8 25.Ra1 b5‚ with a strong attack.
23...Qxc3 24.Qxf7!
Position after: 24.Qxf7!
White must take to threaten the g6-pawn.
430
24...Qb2+
This is the safest option, which forces a draw.

We can also play 24...Qa3+!?, if we are seeking to win. 25.Kd2 Qb4+
Position after: 25...Qb4+
26.Ke2 [26.Kc1 Qb1+ 27.Kd2 Rd8+ 28.Ke2 Qxc2+ 29.Rd2 Rxd2+ 30.Bxd2 Qxe4+ 31.Be3 Nd5‚ with
a great position.] 26...Qxe4 27.Rd3 a6© with good compensation for the exchange.
25.Kd2 Rd8+ 26.Ke1 Rxd1+ 27.Kxd1 Qa1+ 28.Bc1 Qd4+=
Position after: 28...Qd4+=
Black draws by perpetual check – the white king cannot hide.
431
b) 7.Bc4 h6 8.Be3 c6 – Rare 9th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.g4 Nxg4 6.Rg1 Ngf6 7.Bc4
The main move exerting pressure on our weak pawn.
7...h6
We need to avoid Ng5.
8.Be3
As we have seen in previous lines, White’s idea is to castle very quickly.

A) 8.dxe5? is a dangerous move for Black, but if we know it well, it can give us an advantage. 8...dxe5
9.Bxf7+ Kxf7 10.Nxe5+ Kg8 11.Ng6 Qe8 12.Nxh8 Kxh8–+ and Black has a decisive advantage.
432
Position after: 12...Kxh8–+
We have two minor pieces against a rook and better development.

B) 8.Qd3 c6 9.a4 exd4 10.Qxd4 Qe7µ White has no compensation for the pawn. The plan is to place a
knight on e5, followed by the development of the c8-bishop.
8...c6
An important move that serves two purposes: to control d5 and to expand on the queenside with ...b5.
Here, we will analyze the alternatives to the main line 9.dxe5, which we will see later.
9.Qd3
433
I think this is the best of the alternatives but now we are ready.
A) 9.a4 Avoiding our idea. 9...exd4! 10.Qxd4 as in Abdusattorov, N – Gurvich, V chess.com 2020.
[10.Nxd4 Ne5 11.Be2 g5!= and Black manages to keep a great knight on e5.] 10...Qe7N
Position after: 10...Qe7N
The idea is to keep the central squares under control and thus allow us to play ...Ne5. 11.0-0-0 Ne5
12.Nxe5 [12.Be2 Nfg4³] 12...dxe5 13.Qd3 Be6=
B) 9.Qe2 b5 This is our moment. 10.Bb3 Qa5
Position after: 10...Qa5
11.d5 A poor move but White’s position is not easy. 11...b4 12.dxc6 bxc3 13.cxd7+ Bxd7–+ as played in
the game Balogh, C – Gyimesi, Z Budapest 2004. Black has a decisive advantage.
434
9...b5
10.Bb3
It is necessary to play in this way; any sacrifice on b5 would be fatal for White because they would not
have enough compensation for the piece.
10...Qa5 11.0-0-0 Ba6
Bringing into play all the pieces. Now the idea is to castle long.
12.Ne2
435
Position after: 12.Ne2
The best.
12...c5!
Exploiting the poor coordination of the white pieces. The idea is ...c4 with a double attack. White can only
prevent this by playing c4 himself.
13.dxc5 dxc5 14.c4 b4³
Position after: 14...b4³
As played in the game Dann, M – Pelletier, Y Basel 2013. Black has a slight advantage. Now, the plan is
to castle long.
c) 7.Bc4 h6 8.Be3 c6 9.dxe5 dxe5 – Various 10th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.g4 Nxg4 6.Rg1 Ngf6 7.Bc4 h6 8.Be3 c6 9.dxe5 dxe5
436
Here, we will analyze the alternative options to the main move 10.Qd3, which we will see later.
10.Qe2
Compared to the main line 10.Qd3, this move is used much less but it is no less dangerous for that.
Players such as Grandmaster Gawain Jones, among others, have used it successfully.
10.Bxf7+? A bad move. 10...Kxf7 11.Nxe5+ Kg8 12.Ng6 Qe8
13.Qd4 as in Walter, T – Rausch, W Nuremberg 2015. [13.Nxh8? Kxh8–+ and White’s position collapses.
Added to the weakness of the e4-pawn is the threat of moving the bishop to b4 and Black’s maneuver
...Ne5-f3.] 13...Nb6N Avoiding Qc4+. 14.0-0-0 Ng4µ
437
10...b5
Seeing that White is going to castle, the best we can do is to expand on the queenside.
11.Bb3
11.0-0-0 Qa5! A key move. [11...bxc4?! 12.Nxe5 Qc7 13.Nxf7 Kxf7 14.Qxc4+© White gains plenty of
play for the piece.]
Position after: 11...Qa5!
12.Bd3 [12.Bb3 Ba6 Transposing to the main line.] 12...a6 To defend the b5-pawn, so as to play ...c5.
13.Nd2 Qc7³ Followed by ...Bb7 and ...0-0-0, with a better position for us as Black.
438
11...Qa5
12.0-0-0
12.Nh4? is a poor decision. 12...Ba6! 13.Qf3 b4 14.Ne2 [14.Nb1 perhaps is a better option. 14...g6
Avoiding Nf5. 15.Nd2 Rh7=
Position after: 15...Rh7=
We use the rook to defend f7 which gives our king the freedom to castle.] 14...c5 15.Bxf7+ Kxf7 16.Ng6
This was Jones, G – Illingworth, M Parramatta 2010. 16...Kg8!N It is best to hide the king. 17.Nxh8
Kxh8–+ with a decisive advantage.
439
12...Ba6
13.Nb1
This position was reached in Dobrowolski, P – Butkiewicz, L Teplice 2017. Now, White’s idea is to
regroup their pieces while the black king is in the center. Black should castle long but we would leave the
f7-pawn defenseless. How do we solve this?
13.Qe1 b4! 14.Nb1 Qc7µ followed by ...c5 and ...Qb6 with advantage.
13...g6!N
Position after: 13...g6!N
440
An excellent move. The plan is to play ...Rh7 to defend the f7-pawn and so allowing Black to castle long.
This appears to be a slow maneuver but White has no way of exploiting it.
14.Nbd2 Qc7 15.Nh4 Rh7³
Position after: 15...Rh7³
Once Black castles, the position will be easier to play and let’s not forget that we also have an extra pawn.
d) 7.Bc4 h6 8.Be3 c6 9.dxe5 10.Qd3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.g4 Nxg4 6.Rg1 Ngf6 7.Bc4 h6 8.Be3 c6 9.dxe5 dxe5 10.Qd3
Position after: 10.Qd3
441
The main move. Our response is exactly the same as we have seen before with the 10.Qe2 line.
10...b5 11.Bb3
11.Bxf7+? Again, this is a bad sacrifice. 11...Kxf7 12.Nxe5+
Position after: 12.Nxe5+
12...Nxe5!! It is best for Black to surrender the queen in exchange for substantial material. 13.Qxd8 Nf3+
14.Kd1 Nxg1µ and in exchange for the queen, we have one rook and two minor pieces, so we have a clear
advantage.
11...Qa5
442
12.0-0-0
12.Nh4?? A terrible move as played in Mroziak, M – Bosiosic, M Tornelo 2020. 12...Ba6 13.Qd2 b4!N
[Much better than 13...Nb6, as played in the aforementioned game.] The idea is to displace the knight on
c3 and leave the e4-pawn defenseless. 14.Ne2 0-0-0 Threatening to move the knight and attacking the
queen. 15.0-0-0 Bc5–+ and it appears the e4-pawn will fall.
12...Ba6
In this position, White has several alternatives.
443
13.Nd2
This is the main line and the best.

A) 13.Qf1? A bad decision already played in the game Grigoryan, K – Oratovksy, M Elgoibar 2019.
13...b4!
14.Qh3 [14.Ne2 Bb5µ Followed by ...c5.] 14...bxc3 15.Bxf7+ Kd8 16.Qf5 Kc7–+ White has no
compensation for the sacrificed piece.
B) 13.Ne2?! is not a good answer. 13...c5! 14.c4 b4³ Once the bishop on b3 is out of play, Black is free
to castle, making their position preferable.
C) 13.Nb1 This does not solve the problems either. 13...c5

444
14.Bd5 [14.c4 b4 15.Qc2 0-0-0µ as in Pap, M – Solak, D Novi Sad 2009.] 14...Rd8³ This was
Stromboli, E – Rusev, K Campobasso 2010.
13...g6!
A move with two ideas: the first reason is to have the pawn defended in order to allow the bishop to be
moved, and the second reason will be discussed with the next move.
14.f4
As played in Eric, J – Djukic, S Belgrade 2016. This seems to be the most energetic way to play with
White hitting the center.
14...Rh7!N
445
Position after: 14...Rh7!N
Here, we can see the second reason for the main idea behind 13...g6. Now, we use our rook to defend the
f7-pawn prior to castling.
15.Kb1
15.Qf1 b4 16.Ne2 [16.Nc4 Bxc4 17.Qxc4 Bc5³] 16...Bc5 17.Qf3 Bxe3 18.Qxe3 Qc5³ and we are well-
prepared to castle.
15...b4!
Now comes a forced sequence for both, from which Black emerges successful.
16.Nc4 Bxc4 17.Qxc4 Bc5
446
Now, White has to find a very difficult move on the board, in order to stay in the game.
18.Rxg6!
By far, the best move.

A) 18.Bxc5? A mistake. 18...Qxc5 19.Qxc5 Nxc5 20.fxe5 Nfd7 21.e6 Ne5 22.exf7+ Ke7³ Black has a
much more pleasant endgame, thanks to the great knight on e5.
Position after: 22...Ke7³
B) 18.fxe5?! does not solve White’s problems. 18...Bxe3! 19.Qxc6 Rd8 20.Rgf1 Qxe5
447
It is true that our king is still in the middle of the board, but we retain an extra piece and White does not
seem to have a way to break through our defense. 21.Nd5 Nxd5 22.Rxd5 Qxe4 23.Ba4 Kf8³
18...fxg6 19.Qe6+
The rook sacrifice is based on this, leaving the king in the center.
19...Re7 20.Qxc6 Rb8
21.Nd5
The only move to continue the attack.

21.fxe5?? Qb6! 22.Qxb6 Rxb6 23.exf6 Bxe3–+
448
Position after: 23...Bxe3–+
21...Nxd5 22.Qxd5
Although White is down a rook, Black’s pieces are poorly coordinated and the king is weak.
22...Bb6 23.Qg8+ Nf8©
Position after: 23...Nf8©
In my opinion, Black has nothing to fear in this position. White has some compensation for the rook but is
obliged to play very precisely to avoid defeat. Now Black’s plan is to exchange pieces with ...Rd8.
As we have seen, 5.g4 is a very serious move option that we have to take into account. It is one of the
most dynamic ways of playing against the Philidor Defense and is quite popular; I personally have had to
face it in many games.
In all the lines, White’s idea is to castle quickly and exert significant pressure on the black king who is
stood in the middle of the board. To counteract this, Black usually expands on the queenside with ...c6 and
...b5, followed by ...Qa5 and ...Ba6.
In positions where White’s light-squared bishop is usually placed on b3, we need to have the f7-pawn
defended in order to castle long, and the best way to do so is by ...g6 and ...Rh7.
With these ideas in mind, we will be able to obtain good positions that allow us to fight for advantage.
449
Chapter 11
Rare 6th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7
Chapter Guide

a) 6.Bb3
b) 6.g4
c) 6.Qe2
d) 6.Be3
e) 6.h3
a) 6.Bb3
Here, we are going to analyze the less common options, before discussing the main line which has a
significant difference, which is 6.0-0.
6.Bb3
450
This is a very rare move. The idea is to wait for Black to castle, and then to push with g4.
6...0-0
But Black should not fear this because this idea is dubious.
7.g4?
A poor move but one that has been put into practice by some Grandmasters. Instead, 7.0-0 c6 transposes to
lines that we will discuss in Chapter 13.
7...Nxg4
As we have seen in the previous chapter, it is best for Black to accept the challenge and take the pawn.
8.Rg1
451
Position after: 8.Rg1
8...exd4! 9.Nxd4
The best answer.

9.Qxd4?? Nde5 10.Nxe5 Nxe5–+
9...Nde5
A good move. The aim is to transfer all our pieces to the kingside, so now Black would like to continue
with ...Bh4.
10.h3
The best move, as played in Svensk, I – Carlhammar, M Sweden 2011.
10...Nh2!!N
452
Position after: 10...Nh2!!N
A very neat knight jump that immobilizes the d4-knight, so the threat is ...c5.
11.f4
11.Bf4 does not solve the problems. 11...c5! 12.Bxh2 cxd4 13.Nd5 Be6
Black’s position is clearly superior due to the extra pawn and the position of the minor pieces. 14.Qh5 Bf6
15.0-0-0 The only way for White to gain counterplay on the kingside. 15...Bxd5 16.Bxd5 Rc8µ with a
clear advantage for us.
11...Bh4+ 12.Ke2
453
Position after: 12.Ke2
12...c5!
A key move.
13.fxe5 cxd4 14.Qxd4
14.Bh6 Ng4! 15.Bxg7 Qg5µ
14...Bxh3µ
Position after: 14...Bxh3µ
As we can see, Black has a clear advantage due to the terrible position of the white king.
454
b) 6.g4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.g4?!
A dubious move that nevertheless has decent statistics for White and has been employed by strong
Grandmasters such as Rauf Mamedov and Viktor Bologan.
6...Nb6!
The aim is to try to capture with the bishop on g4, taking advantage of the fact that we are attacking the
bishop on c4.
7.Bb5+
The best option.

A) 7.dxe5 Nxc4 8.exf6 Bxf6 9.g5 Bxc3+ 10.bxc3 as tried in Schulte, T – Adler, J Germany 2009. 10...0-
0N
455
Position after: 10...0-0N
As we are not moving the pawns on the kingside, White’s attack is very slow and Black can take
advantage of this by opening up the center.
B) 7.Be2 doesn’t look like a good bishop retreat. 7...Bxg4! 8.Rg1 Bxf3 9.Bxf3 g6 White does not have
sufficient compensation for the pawn.
10.Bh6 This was Moeller, J – Begna, B Dortmund 2011. 10...Bf8!N We want to exchange the dark-
squared bishops. 11.Bxf8 [11.Bg5 Bg7µ] 11...Kxf8 12.Qd2 Kg7 Our king seems to be very safely
ensconced on g7, so now we can complete our development. 13.0-0-0 Qe7 14.h4 exd4 15.Qxd4 Qe5µ
C) 7.Bb3 is the bishop’s natural retreat but Black will obtain a clear advantage. 7...exd4! 8.Nxd4 Bxg4
456
C1) 9.Qd3 as essayed in Aabling Thomsen, J – Torner Planell, J Copenhagen 2010. 9...c5!N A good
move threatening ...c4. 10.Nde2 [10.Nf5 Bxf5 11.exf5 d5–+] 10...Rc8 11.Bc4 Nxc4 12.Qxc4 Be6–+
and White doesn’t have any compensation for the pawn.
C2) 9.f3 Bh3 10.Be3 This was Requejo, O – Gomez Ledo, R Bogota 2013. 10...0-0N
Position after: 10...0-0N
Black shouldn’t be afraid of castling because White doesn’t have a feasible attack on the kingside. We
are ready to strike at the center. 11.Qd2 c5 12.Nf5 Bxf5 13.exf5 c4–+
7...c6
457
8.g5
8.dxe5 Nxg4 9.exd6 Bh4µ as played in the game Mamedov, R – Dyachkov, S Moscow 2009. Black has a
clear advantage due to the better position of their king (we are going to castle) and our pieces are better
placed to start an attack.
8...Nxe4! 9.Nxe4 cxb5 10.dxe5
This position was reached in Doncea, V – Foisor, S Vaujany 2013.
10...d5!N
458
This is much better than capturing 10...dxe5 as White played in the game. Now, we are going to castle.
11.Ng3
11.Nc3 b4 12.Ne2 0-0µ
11...0-0³
Position after: 11...0-0³
The pair of bishops, added to the better position of the king, renders the position favorable for Black.
c) 6.Qe2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.Qe2
White’s idea is to castle long quickly, and exert pressure on the center.
6...0-0
459
Here, White has several options but all of them are aimed at castling long. If they decide to castle short,
then it will transpose to the lines that will be discussed below in Chapter 13.
7.Bg5
The most natural choice.

A) 7.Be3 is not a good square for the bishop because we can attack it. 7...Ng4! 8.0-0-0 is very consistent
with the spirit of the line, as played in Denisov, S – Vorobyov, Y Nalchik 2015. [8.Bd2 exd4 9.Nxd4
Nb6 10.Bb3 Bf6=] 8...c6N Now that White has castled and the bishop cannot be removed from e3, it is
time to initiate a queenside expansion via ...b5. 9.Bb3 Nxe3 10.fxe3 Qc7³
Position after: 10...Qc7³
460
Black has a more comfortable position to play. The expansion on the queenside will be inevitable and
very straightforward to carry out while White does not have a clear way of attacking on the kingside.
B) 7.h3 trying to play Be3 but without Black having the option of ...Ng4. However, now is the time to
take advantage of this pawn move and put pressure on the center. 7...exd4! 8.Nxd4 as in Flaata, A –
Martinsen, S Bergen 2001. 8...Re8N Now, the plan is ...Bf8 and to exert pressure on the e4-pawn.
Position after: 8...Re8N
B1) 9.Bxf7+?? is a blunder. 9...Kxf7 10.Ne6 [10.Qc4+ d5–+] 10...Kxe6 11.Qc4+ d5 12.exd5+ Kf7
13.d6+ Kf8–+
B2) 9.Bf4 Bf8 10.0-0-0 c6 Expanding on the queenside and threatening ...d5. 11.Rhe1 d5! 12.Bd3
Nc5= with a comfortable position for us as Black.
C) 7.dxe5 To castle with the d-file open. 7...dxe5 8.Bg5 c6! Trying ...b5. 9.a4 We have forced White to
play in this way, which means that when they castle long, the castled position is vulnerable. 9...h6
10.Bh4 Nh5!
461
Position after: 10...Nh5!
We are interested in exchanging the dark-squared bishops. Also, the knight wants to settle on f4. 11.g3
[11.Bxe7 Qxe7 12.g3 Nhf6=] 11...Nhf6 and the bishop is locked on h4. 12.0-0-0 Qa5‚ Black has very
good attacking chances on the queenside.
7...exd4!
To transfer the knight to e5.
8.Nxd4 Ne5 9.Bb3
462
The most natural square for the bishop, as played in the game Fuentes Barrientos, C – Hinarejos Montano,
A Barcelona 2017. Here, there is a very precise move by Black.
9...Nxe4!N
Now, there will be several exchanges of pieces, and Black will reach a totally equal middlegame.
10.Bxe7 Nxc3 11.Qxe5 dxe5 12.Bxd8 exd4 13.Bxc7 Re8+!
To push the king onto a bad square.
14.Kf1 Ne4=
With a balanced position. White has a pair of bishops but we can eliminate it either from d2 or from c5,
which will result in an endgame with opposite-colored bishops. We also have the better king, so we have
nothing to fear.
d) 6.Be3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.Be3
White’s idea is to prepare for castling long as soon as possible, but now we will see that e3 is not the best
square for the white bishop.
6...Ng4!
463
7.Nxe5N
The best.
A) 7.Bd2 0-0 8.h3 Ngf6 and the bishop on d2 is not useful, so for White, it may be best to transpose to
the lines with h3 analyzed in 6.h3, which we will see in the next subchapter.
B) 7.0-0 Nb6! The bishop is not going to move from e3, so we should not be in such a rush to take it.
B1) 8.Bd3 Nxe3 9.fxe3 Bf6 Putting pressure. 10.Qe1 Trying to attack but Black has nothing to fear.
10...0-0 11.Qg3 Qe7 12.Rf2 g6 13.Raf1 Bg7=
464
With a balanced position, although in the long term, it is easier to play with the black pieces, thanks to
the bishop pair and a better pawn structure.
B2) 8.Bb3 The most natural square. 8...exd4! 9.Qxd4 [9.Bxd4 c5! Threatening ...c4. 10.Be3 Nxe3
11.fxe3 c4 12.Ba4+ Nxa4 13.Nxa4 0-0³ with Black having the advantage due to the bishop pair against
a pair of knights, and better structure.] 9...Bf6 10.Qd3 Nxe3 11.Qxe3 0-0= with equal chances for both.
C) 7.Ng5 as tried in the game Gamback, B – Moulas, G Porto Carras 2009. 7...Bxg5!N 8.Qxg4 Bxe3
9.fxe3 [9.Qxg7 is not problematic for us. 9...Bxf2+! 10.Kxf2 Qf6+ 11.Qxf6 Nxf6 12.Rhf1 Be6=] 9...0-0
10.Qg3! [10.0-0?? exd4 11.exd4 Ne5 12.Qe2 Bg4–+] 10...c6 11.a4 [11.0-0 b5 12.Bb3 Qe7=] 11...Qf6
To prevent White castling short.
465
We want to force our opponent to castle long in order to attack on the queenside, especially if we have
managed to provoke the weakening a4. 12.0-0-0 a6 To play ...b5. 13.Rhf1 Qe7 14.Rf3 b5ƒ and Black has
a strong initiative on the queenside.
7...Ndxe5 8.dxe5 Nxe3 9.fxe3 dxe5
Black has a pair of bishops and the better pawn structure. On the other hand, White has better
development and the possibility of assembling a quick attack that will win a pawn.
10.Qh5!
466
Attacking the f7- and e5-pawns.
10...0-0 11.0-0
Generating more pressure on f7.

11.Rd1 Qe8 12.0-0 c6 [12...Bd6!? is also possible. 13.Nb5 Be6 14.Nxd6 cxd6 15.Bxe6 Qxe6=] 13.Qxe5
Bf6 14.Qxe8 Rxe8= Even if Black is a pawn down, the bishop pair and superior pawn structure is
sufficient compensation.
11...g6 12.Qxe5
Position after: 12.Qxe5
White has won a pawn. However, the bishop pair and the better pawn structure give us more than enough
compensation.
12...Bd6 13.Qd4 Qe7
Avoiding e5.
14.Nd5 Qe5
467
The e5-square is very weak and is a great square on which to place one of our pieces, especially our
bishop. We are interested in exchanging queens but on e5, not on d4 because this would improve White’s
pawn structure.
15.Nf4
15.g3 Kg7 16.Nf4 f6 17.Rad1 Qe8! To install a bishop on e5.
Position after: 17...Qe8!
18.b3 Be5© with ample compensation, thanks to the two bishops and the better pawn structure.
15...Bd7 16.Bd5
468
16.Qxe5 Bxe5 17.Nd3 Rae8 18.Nxe5 Rxe5© We have nothing to fear.
16...c6 17.Bb3 Rad8
Position after: 17...Rad8
All our pieces are very active.
18.Rad1
18.Rf2 Bc8 19.Raf1 Rde8 20.Qxe5 Rxe5 21.Nd3 Re7 22.e5 Bc7 23.Rf6 Bb6© and White’s structure is
horrible.
18...Bc7
469
Threatening ...Bg4.
19.Qxe5
A) 19.h3 Qe7 20.Qxa7 Qxe4 21.Qc5 Bf5©

B) 19.Rd3 Qe7 20.Qxa7 Qxe4 21.Qxb7 Qe5ƒ and now, we are ready to play ...g5 with a real attack.
19...Bxe5 20.Rd3
Threatening Rfd1.
20...Bc7!
The aim is to be able to move the d7-bishop and, if necessary, put pressure on e3 with ...Bb6.
Position after: 20...Bc7!
21.e5
Exploiting the fact that Black cannot capture. Another option is 21.Rfd1 Bg4 22.Rxd8 Bxd8!© and Black
is not worse in the endgame.
21...Kg7! 22.e6 Bxe6 23.Rxd8 Rxd8 24.Nxe6+
24.Bxe6 Bxf4=
24...fxe6=
470
Position after: 24...fxe6=
The endgame is totally balanced because of the opposite-colored bishops.
e) 6.h3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.h3
White’s main idea is to play Be3 without the bishop being disturbed, although this can also be used to
launch into the kingside via g4.
6...0-0 7.Be3
471
With the aim of castling long.
A) 7.0-0 b6 transposing to the 7.h3 line analyzed in Chapter 13 below.
B) 7.g4 It seems very hasty to play like this considering that White still have the king on e1. In such
cases, it is usually best to react in the center, enforcing the saying “lateral action, central reaction.”
7...c6! To break with ...d5 and also with the aim of ... b5. 8.a3 Nxe4! 9.Nxe4 d5 10.Nxe5 as played in
Berchtenbreiter, M – Plat, V Germany 2013. 10...f5!N
Position after: 10...f5!N
is much better than taking on e5 as Black did in the game. The white king is in the center and we have to
take advantage of this by opening up lines. 11.Bxd5+ [11.gxf5 Nxe5 12.dxe5 Bxf5³] 11...cxd5 12.Ng3
Nxe5 13.dxe5 d4³ Black has a much more comfortable position due to the bishop pair and the insecurity
of the white king.
7...c6
472
As always, this move serves two ideas: to play ...d5 and ...b5.
8.a4
The main move.

A) 8.0-0 b5 9.Bd3 Qc7 The idea is to take on d4 and then play ...b4, followed by ...c5 and ...c4. 10.Ne2
d5!
A great move. 11.dxe5 dxe4 12.exf6 Nxf6= as played in the game Gersamia – Blagidze, A Georgia
1956. Black will recover the piece and the position will be more pleasant to play due to the bishop pair.
473
B) 8.Bb3 exd4 9.Nxd4 Nc5 Attacking the e4-pawn. 10.Qf3 as essayed in Garro, P – Garrel, A France
2005.
Position after: 10.Qf3
10...a5N 11.0-0 a4 12.Bc4 Nfd7! 13.Qg3 Ne5 14.Be2 Bh4 15.Qh2 Re8 16.Rad1 Qb6= and all the pieces
are very active.
8...Nxe4!
The best move, to blow up the position.
9.Nxe4
474
9.Bxf7+? is a bad answer. 9...Rxf7 10.Nxe4 exd4 11.Qxd4 This was Ruperez Benito, A – Perez de
Aranda, L Linares 2014. 11...d5!N Giving space to our dark-squared bishop.
12.Nfg5 dxe4 13.Nxf7 Kxf7 14.Qc4+ Kf8 15.0-0-0 Qa5 16.Qxe4 Nf6µ and Black has a clear advantage
because we have two minor pieces for a rook.
9...d5
10.0-0
A) 10.Nxe5 dxc4 11.Nxc4 f5ƒ and Black had the initiative in Van de Wynkele, E – Verduyn, F Belgium
2009.
475
B) 10.Bb3?! A dubious option. 10...dxe4 11.Nxe5 Nxe5 12.dxe5 Qa5+ 13.Qd2 Qxe5 14.0-0-0 Re8³
White has no compensation for the pawn. Now, the plan is to play ...Be6, eliminating the white piece that
best defends his king.
10...exd4 11.Qxd4 dxc4 12.Qxc4 Nb6=
With a fully equal position, as played in the game Srija, S – Kuzubov, Y Sharjah 2017. Black has the
bishop pair and a healthy position that counteracts White’s greater piece development. The plan is to
continue with ...Bf5 and ...Re8.
As we have discussed, White has several options to the main line 6.0-0 but almost all of them are directed
towards either a goal of castling long, or a quick attack on the kingside with g4.
6.Bb3 followed by g4 and 6.g4 are two very dubious options; if Black is well-prepared, they will gain a
clear advantage.
6.Qe2, 6.Be3 and 6.h3 have the same idea in common: to castle long. In all these cases, our plan is
similar: playing with ...c6, threatening ...d5, or to expand on the queenside by ...b5. The most typical move
is 6.Be3, then we have to play 6...Ng4 with a good position for Black.
476
Chapter 12
Sacrifices on f7
Chapter Guide
Chapter 12 – Sacrifices on f7

a) 6.Bxf7+ with 10.0-0
b) 6.Bxf7+ with 10.Nxa8
c) 6.Ng5 0-0 7.f4
d) 6.Ng5 0-0 7.Bxf7+ with Various 11th Moves
e) 6.Ng5 0-0 7.Bxf7+ with 11.dxe5
f) 6.dxe5 dxe5 7.Ng5
g) 6.dxe5 dxe5 7.Bxf7+
a) 6.Bxf7+ with 10.0-0

In this chapter, we are going to analyze all the lines that involve a sacrifice on f7, either directly with the
bishop or with the support of the knight.
477
6.Bxf7+?
A sacrifice that seems very spectacular but is actually bad, so Black will soon gain a good advantage.
White’s idea is that they will be able to take the a8-rook and, with that, they will have the advantage of the
exchange. However, Black will gain plenty of counterplay.
6...Kxf7 7.Ng5+ Kg8 8.Ne6 Qe8
9.Nxc7
This is the basis of White’s sacrifice on f7.

478
9.dxe5 does not make sense because now the black pieces are activated. 9...Nxe5 10.Nxc7 Qg6–+ We
already have a decisive advantage because we gain tempi over the main line.
9...Qg6
The problem for White is that the black queen quickly comes into play, attacking the g2-pawn.
10.0-0
Although the main move is to take the rook, White can play like this too. The idea is clear: the black
queen does not take on g2, so White has two pawns for the sacrificed piece. However, it is not enough.
10...Rb8
Now, the plan is to play ...h6 followed by ...Kh7.
11.f4
The most active way to play.
11...h6
479
I consider this position a decisive advantage for Black because White does not have enough activity to
compensate for the piece. Having only the two pawns seems insufficient.
12.N7d5
12.f5 Qf7 13.d5 Nc5 14.Qf3 Qh5–+ as in Marzoll, W – Roesch, A Wiesbaden 1990. Black has a decisive
advantage.
12...Nxd5
Black should exchange pieces, since we have an extra one.
13.Nxd5 Bd8 14.Qd3 Kh7–+
480
Position after: 14...Kh7–+
Following the game Lorincz, I – Gara, A Hungary 2009. A possible plan for Black is to develop the light-
squared bishop to b7.
b) 6.Bxf7+ with 10.Nxa8
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.Bxf7+ Kxf7 7.Ng5+ Kg8 8.Ne6 Qe8 9.Nxc7 Qg6
10.Nxa8
White has gained an exchange but now Black will obtain ample counterplay and a great attack.
10...Qxg2 11.Rf1 exd4!
Position after: 11...exd4!
A very important move. The idea is to transfer the knight to e5.
12.Qxd4
The only move.

A) 12.Ne2?? Ne5 13.Nxd4 [13.Nf4 Nf3+ 14.Ke2 Ng1+–+ followed by ...Bg4+.] 13...Bg4 14.f3
Nxe4!–+
481
Position after: 14...Nxe4!–+
followed by ...Bh4+ with a decisive advantage.

B) 12.Qe2? with the aim of Qc4 but this is a mistake. 12...dxc3! 13.Qc4+ d5 14.Qxc8+ Kf7!! The key
move for Black.
Position after: 14...Kf7!!
15.Qxc3 [15.Qxh8 is a losing move. 15...Qxe4+ 16.Kd1 Qf3+ 17.Ke1 cxb2–+ Threatening ...Bb4+.]
15...Qxe4+–+ as in Baules, J – Narciso Dublan, M Mexico City 2010. Black has a winning position.
12...Ne5
482
13.f3
13.f4?? It seems incredible to me that this move is the main line in this position and has been used more
than 70 times, considering that it is a losing move. 13...Nfg4! Threatening ...Bh4+. 14.Qd5+ Nf7 15.Qc4
Bh4+ 16.Kd1
Position after: 16.Kd1
16...Be6 [16...Bd7 is also great.] 17.Qe2 Nf2+–+
13...Nfg4!
To check on h4.
483
14.Qd5+
14.Bf4? Bh4+ 15.Bg3 Nxh2–+
14...Nf7
15.Qc4
A) 15.Bf4 Bh4+ 16.Bg3 Nxh2–+

B) 15.Qb5 Bh4+ 16.Kd1 Bd7! 17.Qe2 Nf2+–+
15...Bh4+ 16.Kd1 Be6! 17.Qe2 Nf2+ 18.Rxf2 Bxf2³
484
Position after: 18...Bxf2³
As played in Cunha, E – Vaz, D Rio de Janeiro 2013. Black has an advantage due to the poor position of
the white king. Now, one of our ideas is to activate the f7-knight and the e6-bishop.
c) 6.Ng5 0-0 7.f4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.Ng5
Position after: 6.Ng5
This scheme has been used by various Grandmasters, such as the Lithuanian Sarunas Sulkis and the
Bulgarian Julian Radulski. It is a better alternative than 6.Bxf7+. The idea is similar, take on f7 with the
bishop and win an exchange. The difference here is that the black queen will not be able to go on the
attack. However, the knight will be trapped on a8 giving us two minor pieces for a rook.
6...0-0 7.f4
A rare move. The main line is 7.Bxf7+ that we will see later.
7...exd4 8.Qxd4 c6!
Giving the queen an escape route thus avoiding White’s threat.
485
9.e5

9.a4? is a mistake that was played in Ortega Valle, J – Paunovic, D Seville 2006. White wants to avoid
Black’s queenside expansion by ...b5 but allows the central reaction: 9...d5!N
10.exd5 Bc5 11.Qd3 Nb6–+ and Black has a decisive advantage due to the better coordination of their
pieces and the poor position of the white king.
9...dxe5 10.fxe5 Nd5 11.h4
486
11.Bxd5 Bxg5µ
11...Bc5 12.Qd3 g6³
The weaker white king gives us a very comfortable slight advantage.
d) 6.Ng5 0-0 7.Bxf7+ with Various 11th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.Ng5 0-0 7.Bxf7+
Position after: 7.Bxf7+
The main line and the consequence of White’s previous move.
487
7...Rxf7 8.Ne6 Qe8 9.Nxc7
Unlike the 6.Bxf7+ line that we have seen before, the black queen cannot go to the g6-square.
9...Qd8 10.Nxa8
Here, Black has several reasonable options.
10...b5
This is my recommendation. The aim is to develop the light-squared bishop in order to take the knight,
either by developing it to b7 or a6. With this, Black would obtain two minor pieces for a rook and two
pawns, with a position that is more comfortable to play. Now, we will analyze the different options before
the main move 11.dxe5 that we will see later.
11.0-0
A) 11.Nxb5? is a mistake that neglects the center, and Black will gain a clear advantage. 11...Qa5+
12.Nc3 Nxe4 13.0-0 Nxc3 14.bxc3 Bb7 15.Qg4 Bf8µ as in the game Roy, P – Oratovsky, M Barcelona
2015.
B) 11.f3 Defending the e4-pawn but now, Black obtains quick development. 11...Ba6 12.a4 is best for
White. The aim is to attain the b5-square and eliminate our bishop. 12...b4 13.Nb5 Qxa8 14.Nc7 Qb7
15.Nxa6 Qxa6=
488
Position after: 15...Qxa6=
Although there is equality, it seems easier to play with the black pieces.
11...Bb7 12.f3
12.dxe5 as in my game Guilarte Simon, R – Trigo Urquijo, S Zornotza 2006. 12...Nxe5 I captured with
the pawn but it is best to take with the knight, transposing to the 11.dxe5 line that we will see later.
12...d5!
13.Nxb5
489
The best answer.
13.Be3 as tried in the correspondence game Lampon, M – Bandiera, A IECC email 2011. 13...Qxa8!N
Hitting the center with more pieces. 14.dxe5 Nxe5 15.Bd4 Ng6³
13...a6 14.Nbc7 dxe4 15.fxe4 exd4=
Position after: 15...exd4=
Black’s position seems more comfortable to play.
e) 6.Ng5 0-0 7.Bxf7+ with 11.dxe5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.Ng5 0-0 7.Bxf7+ Rxf7 8.Ne6 Qe8 9.Nxc7 Qd8
10.Nxa8 b5 11.dxe5
The main line.
11...Nxe5!
490
The best answer. Here, White has a few possibilities.
12.0-0
A) 12.Nd5? is a poor move. The exchange of this knight benefits Black. 12...Nxd5 13.Qxd5 Qd7!
Threatening ...Bb7. 14.a4 Bb7 15.Qxb5 as was played in Mardell, J – Skovgaard, T Helsingor 2019.
Position after: 15.Qxb5
15...Qg4!N Go for the attack! 16.Qxb7 Qxg2 17.Rf1 Nf3+ 18.Ke2 Nd4+–+
B) 12.Bf4 White wants to take the knight with the idea of exchanging queens. 12...Bd7 13.Bxe5 dxe5
14.Nd5 Bc5! Aiming for f2, one of the weakest pawns in the enemy field.
491
Position after: 14...Bc5!
15.Nxf6+ Qxf6 16.f3 Bc6µ We are following the game Kozel, J – Kraus, T Kouty nad Desnou 2014.
Black has a clear advantage, thanks to the bishop pair and a safer king.
12...Bb7 13.f4 Ned7 14.Nxb5 Bxa8µ
This position was reached in Pilnik, H – Najdorf, M Buenos Aires 1941. Black has managed to obtain two
minor pieces for the rook and will be able to take the central pawn.
Position after: 14...Bxa8µ
f) 6.dxe5 dxe5 7.Ng5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7
492
5.Bc4
5.dxe5 If White decides to take now, Black can recapture with 5...dxe5 and it is best for White to develop
the light-squared bishop. 6.Bc4 Be7 transposing to the lines that we will analyze.
5...Be7 6.dxe5
Here, we will analyze the same sacrifices that we have seen before, but interspersing this pawn capture,
which has its importance.
6...dxe5
493
Whenever possible, it is preferable to recapture with the pawn on e5 in order to keep the four minor pieces
on the board. Also in this type of position, it is important to have the knight on d7 because it can go to c5;
the d7-knight has more mobility than the f3-knight.
7.Ng5
With the same idea as 6.Ng5 that we have seen before. The main difference here is that White has already
resolved the central pawn tension.
7.0-0 0-0 transposing to the lines that are analyzed in the later chapters, related to the 6.0-0 move.
7...0-0 8.Bxf7+ Rxf7 9.Ne6 Qe8 10.Nxc7 Qd8 11.Nxa8 b6!
As White has resolved the central tension, and we cannot take on e5 with the knight as we did in the
6.Ng5 line, my recommendation is to play in this way.
12.Be3
The best way to play.

12.Nd5? is a bad move but it turns out to be the main line in this position. 12...Nxe4 13.Be3 as tried in
Raud, I – Tartakower, S Parnu 1937. [13.Nxe7+ Qxe7 14.Be3 This was Faccia, S – Bianchi, A Venice
2005. 14...Ba6!N The idea is that the white king stays in the middle of the board. 15.Nc7 Bc4–+ and now
the queen is going to go to h4 to attack.] 13...Bd6!N
494
Position after: 13...Bd6!N
White does not have any way to prevent Black from taking the knight. 14.f3 Nef6 15.Nc3 Bb4 16.Qd3
Bb7 17.Nxb6 e4! [17...axb6!?] 18.fxe4 Bxe4µ
12...Ba6
It is essential to appreciate the strength of the bishop on a6 – it keeps the white king stranded in the center.
13.Nxb6 axb6
Threatening ...Bb4.
495
14.a3
As in Argandona Riveiro, I – Magem Badals, J Andorra 2004.

14.f3 Bb4 15.Qd2 Qf8 16.0-0-0 Bc4= Berthelot, Y – Bourget, L Angers 2017.
14...Qf8!N
Position after: 14...Qf8!N
The aim is to keep the c5-square under control and at the same time, exert pressure on the f-file.
15.f3
This is necessary in order to move the queen, otherwise Black could jump with the knight to g4.
15...Nc5 16.b4 Ne6
16...Ng4!? is an interesting move that leads to a draw. 17.fxg4
496
Position after: 17.fxg4
17...Rf1+! 18.Rxf1 Qxf1+ 19.Kd2 Nb3+ 20.cxb3 Qd3+ 21.Ke1 Qxe3+ 22.Ne2 Bxe2=
17.b5
White manages to block the f1-a6 diagonal but surrenders the c5-square.
17...Bc5 18.Qd2 Bxe3 19.Qxe3 Nd4 20.0-0 Qc5=
Position after: 20...Qc5=
Although there is equality, Black’s position is easier to play.
g) 6.dxe5 dxe5 7.Bxf7+
497
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.dxe5 dxe5 7.Bxf7+
Position after: 7.Bxf7+
With the same idea that we have seen in the 6.Bxf7+ line. The main difference here is that White has
already resolved the central pawn tension and thus, this is an advantage for White that strengthens the
sacrifice in this case.
7...Kxf7 8.Ng5+ Kg8 9.Ne6 Qe8 10.Nxc7 Qg6 11.Nxa8
11.0-0 Rb8 12.f4 h6–+ White does not have enough compensation for the sacrificed piece.
11...Qxg2 12.Rf1 Nc5!
A very important move. Unlike 6.Bxf7+ seen earlier, here, Black cannot take on d4.
498
However, we can place the knight on c5, leaving the bishop’s diagonal free and threatening ...Bh3.
13.Be3
A) 13.f3?! as was played in Heikkila, A – Del Rey, D San Sebastian 2006. 13...Ne6!N To prevent the
white a8-knight from escaping. 14.Qe2 [14.Qd2 Qh3 15.Qd3 Kf7 16.Be3 Bd7³] 14...Qxe2+ 15.Nxe2
Bd7³
Position after: 15...Bd7³
Now, we will place the king on f7, obtaining a more pleasant position.
B) 13.Nc7 Bh3 14.Qe2 Qxf1+ 15.Qxf1 Bxf1 16.Kxf1 Ncxe4 transposing to 13.Be3.
13...Bh3 14.Qe2 Qxf1+ 15.Qxf1 Bxf1 16.Kxf1 Kf7
499
17.Nc7
17.Bxc5?! Although this is not bad, we are now aiming for an endgame where we have a chance to
squeeze. 17...Bxc5 18.Nc7 Rc8 19.N7d5 Bd4!
Position after: 19...Bd4!
Now, we can exert pressure in the endgame because all our pieces are more active than the opponent’s.
20.Nxf6 Bxc3! Aiming for a rook endgame. 21.bxc3 [21.Nxh7 Bxb2 22.Rb1 Rxc2 23.Ng5+ Kf6 24.Nf3
Ba3 25.Rxb7 Bc5³ and all the black pieces are more active.] 21...Kxf6 22.Rd1 Rxc3 23.Rd7 Rxc2 24.Rxb7
Rxa2=
500
Position after: 24...Rxa2=
Although the endgame should be a draw if White plays correctly, Black can press.
17...Rc8 18.N7d5 Ncxe4 19.Nxe7 Kxe7 20.Nxe4 Nxe4=
Position after: 20...Nxe4=
As happened in the game Ma, Z – Motylev, A China 2013. The endgame seems totally equal.
The sacrifices on f7 must be considered and, although we can see that Black obtains good positions, we
must study them because there are very critical lines where on many occasions, we have to make some
very precise moves for our lines to work.
501
6.Bxf7+ seems bad and even in the best case scenario for White, Black ends up with a comfortable
advantage. The only important thing to remember here is that, when White takes the rook on a8, we must
take on d4 with ...exd4 to transfer the knight to e5, bringing all our minor pieces to the kingside.
6.Ng5 seems to be a more serious option but here also, Black obtains a more comfortable position to play.
The most important thing to remember is that, after the capture of the a8-rook, we have to play ...b5. The
idea is to develop our light-squared bishop to take the knight on a8.
White can also try to play these same two themes, but by exchanging the central pawns first. In this case,
we must remember two things: if White continues with 7.Ng5, we will have to play 10...b6 instead of ...b5
as we did in the 6.Ng5 line. If White continues with 7.Bxf7+, the key move to remember is 12...Nc5.
In any case, we have seen that Black not only has mechanisms to equalize in many lines, but we obtain a
slight advantage and it is White who has to be very careful.
502
Chapter 13
Various 7th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0
Chapter Guide
Chapter 13 – Various 7th Moves
a) 7.a3
b) 7.Bb3
c) 7.Bg5
d) 7.Be3
e) 7.dxe5
f) 7.h3
g) 7.Qe2
a) 7.a3
Here, we will see the less common options before the main line 7.Re1 which is analyzed in the next
chapter, and 7.a4 which is analyzed in Chapter 15.
7.a3
503
A very rare option. It has the same idea as the move 7.a4, creating a hole on a2 to hide the bishop.
However, now Black can expand on the queenside via ...c6 and ...b5.
7...c6 8.Ba2
8.Re1 b5 9.Ba2 a6! This is a key move in this scheme. The idea is to defend the b5-pawn and thus have
the freedom to take on d4 with the aim of ...c5 and ...c4, locking in the bishop on a2.
10.h3 To develop the bishop to e3. 10...Qc7 In order to carry out the aforementioned plan of ...c5, the c6-
square must be defended. 11.Qd3 as played in Sanchez Aller, F – Gines Esteo, P Linares 2016. White’s
aim is to transfer the f3-knight to f5 with Nh4. 11...h6N Black is ready to take on d4. 12.Nh4 exd4
504
13.Qxd4 [13.Ng6 is not a problem for us. 13...Ne5 14.Nxe7+ Qxe7 15.Qxd4 Be6= Black does not have
any worries in this position.] 13...Ne5 and the f5-square is under control. 14.f4 Nc4!
In exchange for the pawn, we will gain the bishop pair and greater security for our king. 15.Bxc4 bxc4
16.Qxc4 Be6 17.Qf1 d5! 18.e5 Ne4 19.Nf3 Nxc3 20.bxc3 Bf5= The position is balanced, although it is
easier to play as Black.
8...b5 9.Bg5 a6!
With the same idea that we have already seen: capture on d4 and play ...c5 and ...c4.
505
10.Qe2 h6 11.Be3
11.Bh4 Nh5 12.Bxe7 Qxe7=
11...Ng4 12.Bd2
This position was reached in Ganguly, S – Sareen, V Nagpur 2002.
12...Qc7N
Once again, our idea is to take on d4 followed by ...c5.
13.Rad1 Re8!
Exerting pressure on the center with the idea of transferring the knight from d7 to the kingside.
14.h3 Ngf6 15.Rfe1 Nf8=
506
Position after: 15...Nf8=
The position is equal.

Our idea is to move the knight from f8 to g6, from where it will hold the e5-pawn well, then try to move it
to f4 in the future.
The knight on f8 can also help us play ...Be6 if necessary.
b) 7.Bb3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Bb3
A very rare bishop retreat because we are not threatening to expel it from c4.
7...c6
507
Either to play ...d5 or to play ...b5, and expand on the queenside.
8.a4
The most natural move, avoiding our idea of ...b5.

A) 8.Bg5 h6 9.Bh4 Nh5= Richards, H – Collins, S Bunratty 2007. The plan is to exchange bishops and
go to the f4-square. If White decides to retreat with the bishop to g3, we can gain the advantage of the
bishop pair.
B) 8.Qe2 to bring the rook to d1 very quickly and put pressure on the center. Because of this, it is best to
take on d4. 8...exd4 9.Nxd4 Nc5= as in Tryggestad, A – Chittka, J Helsingor 2017.
Now, in addition to being able to take the b3-bishop, our plan is to play with ...Re8 and ...Bf8, putting
pressure on the e4-pawn.
C) 8.h3 b5 Threatening ...b4. 9.a3 a6! Defending the b5-pawn, followed by ...c5 and ...c4. 10.Be3 Qc7
Threatening ...exd4 and ...c5-c4. 11.Qe2 exd4 12.Nxd4 Re8 Bringing all the pieces into play and
pressing in the center. 13.Nf5 Bf8=
508
D) 8.Re1 b5
D1) 9.a3 a6 10.Bg5 If White had played 10.d5, then it would be best to close the center with ...c5.
10...h6 To determine where White takes the bishop. 11.Bh4 Nh5 To exchange bishops and to install the
knight on f4. 12.Bxe7 Qxe7= as in Montilla Carrillo, E – Sergeev, V Katowice 2017. The position
seems more comfortable to play as Black.
D2) 9.d5 Bb7 10.Qe2 as tried in Tagnon, N – Cifuentes Parada, R Dieren 1998.
509
10...cxd5!N is a good move. The idea is that White must end up putting the e4-pawn on d5. With this,
not only will the d6-pawn no longer be a weakness, but since there is no pawn on e4, we have the
option of expanding on the kingside with ...f5. 11.Nxd5 Nxd5 12.Bxd5 Bxd5 13.exd5 Qb6³
Position after: 13...Qb6³
Black’s position is more comfortable to play. The plan is to expand on the kingside with ...f5. We can
also put pressure on the queenside as well.
8...exd4
510
The aim is to gain control of the c5-square for our knight, attacking at the same time the e4-pawn and the
b3-bishop.
9.Nxd4
9.Qxd4 Nc5 10.Ba2 Bg4= This was played in the game Goldsworthy, P – Kunin, V Fuerth 2016.
9...Nc5 10.Re1 Bg4
Forcing f3 and slightly weakening the white king.
11.f3 Nxb3 12.Nxb3 Be6=
511
As played in Javakhishvili, L – Netzer, J Predeal 2007. The position is balanced, although the bishop pair
gives Black a comfortable game.
c) 7.Bg5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Bg5
A natural development of the bishop.
7...h6!
To determine where the bishop will be located and thus act accordingly.
8.Bh4
8.Be3 This retreat does not make much sense; it compares to having played 7.Be3 but here, giving us the
extra time on ...h6 that is generally favorable for Black. 8...exd4 gaining control of the e5- and c5-squares.
512
9.Nxd4 [9.Qxd4 Ng4! To transfer to e5. 10.Bf4 Bf6 11.Qd2 Re8=; 9.Bxd4 Nb6 10.Bd3 c5 11.Be3 d5=]
9...Ne5 10.Be2 Re8 Preparing ...Bf8 to attack the central pawn. 11.f4 Ng6 12.Qe1 Bf8 13.f5 Ne5 14.Qg3
Kh8= Black has no concerns in this position.
8...c6 9.a4 Nh5!
Position after: 9...Nh5!
Whenever the bishop retreats to h4, this idea is always good for us as it allows the exchange of bishops
and for us to take control of the f4-square.
10.Bxe7
513
10.Bg3 Nxg3 11.hxg3 a5³
10...Qxe7 11.Re1
11.a5 Ndf6 12.Re1 Nf4=
11...Nf4 12.Ne2
12.Bf1 Nf6= We are ready to play ...Nh7, followed by ...Ng5 and attack on the kingside.
To exchange the annoying knight on f4.
12...Nxe2+ 13.Qxe2
As was played in Villiers, T – Wall, T Hastings 2017. Now, Black should put his rook on the e-file, putting
pressure on the center. The plan is to develop our pieces.
13...Re8N 14.a5 exd4 15.Nxd4 Nf6 16.Bd3 Bd7=
514
The position is balanced. Black’s position is very healthy and we only need to bring the a8-rook into play.
d) 7.Be3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Be3
A natural square for the bishop.
7...exd4 8.Bxd4
This position was reached in Pechac, J – Volna, L Zilina 2013.
515
A) 8.Nxd4 Ne5 9.Be2 Re8 10.f4 Ng6= Van Wijgerden, C – Lambert, H Amsterdam 1978.
B) 8.Qxd4 Ng4! Pursuing the same plan as we have seen in the previous 7.Bg5 subchapter. The idea is
to gain control of the e5-square. 9.Bf4 Bf6 10.Qd2 Re8 11.Rae1 Nge5
Position after: 11...Nge5
Black doesn’t seem to have any problems at all.

12.Nxe5 dxe5 13.Be3 c6 14.Rd1 Nf8= transferring the knight to the kingside and providing the option to
play ...Be6.
8...Nb6N
Position after: 8...Nb6N
We are ready to play ...d5.

516
9.Bd3 c5! 10.Be3 d5
Once we have achieved the move ...d5, our position is comfortable.
11.e5 Ne8
The plan is to improve the e8-knight.

In exchange for having it temporarily misplaced, we have obtained a great pawn center.
12.Bf4
A) 12.Bc1 a5 13.a4 Nc7=

B) 12.b4 d4 13.bxc5 dxe3 14.cxb6 exf2+ 15.Kh1 axb6=
12...Nc7 13.a4 a5 14.b3
14.Nb5 Nxb5 15.Bxb5 Bd7 16.Qe2 Qe8=
14...Bd7=
517
Controlling the b5-square, with an equal position. The plan is to play ...Bc6 and ...Qd7, then bring the
rooks to the center and, with this, Black’s position is easier to play.
e) 7.dxe5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.dxe5
Removing the central pawn tension. The idea is to open up the d-file, and very quickly place the rook on
d1 to generate pressure.
7...dxe5
518
8.Qe2
A) 8.a4 c6 White will transpose to 8.Qe2, which we will analyze as our main move in this subchapter.
B) 8.Bg5 It doesn’t seem to make much sense to play in this way, having taken on e5. 8...c6 9.a4 h6
10.Bh4 Nh5 11.Bxe7 Qxe7=
C) 8.h3 c6 Controlling the d5-square and expanding on the queenside with ...b5. 9.Be3 b5 10.Bd3 a5
11.a4 b4 12.Ne2 Qc7= as was played in Praggnanandhaa, R – Wei Yi chess.com 2019.
8...c6 9.a4
9.Rd1 Qc7 10.a4 Nc5 11.Nh4 White directs their pieces to the kingside but Black is well-prepared.
11...Re8 12.Nf5 Bxf5 13.exf5 e4=
9...Qc7
Removing the queen from the open file and defending the pawn in order to move the d7-knight. Here,
White has several options.
10.h3
This is the main move.

A) 10.Be3 Nc5 Attacking the pawn. 11.Ng5 Defending the pawn and at the same time threatening to
gain material through a tactical blow: taking on f7 and then checking on c4. 11...b6! Avoiding the threat.
12.b4 Nb7
519
Now, the plan is to expel the g5-knight and develop our light-squared bishop. 13.Rab1 h6 14.Nf3 Bg4
15.h3 Bh5= with a balanced position, as played in the game Becerra Rivero, J – Karp, S Moscow 1994.
B) 10.Nh4 Trying to transfer the knight to f5 so we must move our knight from d7. 10...Nc5 11.Nf5
Bxf5 12.exf5 Rad8 13.Be3
This was Reyer, U – Plat, V Magdeburg 2012. 13...Nd5!N A key move to exchange pieces. 14.Bxd5
cxd5 15.Bxc5 [15.Nb5 Qc8 16.Bxc5 Qxc5 17.Qxe5 Bf6=] 15...Qxc5 16.Qxe5 Bf6 17.Qg3 d4 18.Ne4
Qxf5=
C) 10.a5 Nc5 11.h3 as tried in Rodriguez Vila, A – Papadopulos, D Buenos Aires 1993. [11.Nh4 Be6
12.Nf5 b5! 13.axb6 axb6 14.Be3 b5=] 11...Be6!N
520
The idea is to connect the rooks and play ...b5. 12.Be3 [12.b4 Bxc4 13.Qxc4 Ne6= is a great square for
our knight. We are ready to play ...b5.] 12...b5 13.axb6 axb6 14.Bxc5 Bxc4 15.Qxc4 Bxc5= with a
totally balanced position.
10...Nc5
11.Rd1
11.Nh4 Re8 12.Nf5 Bf8 13.Qf3 Be6! The aim is to take out the strong c4-bishop and additionally, to bring
the c5-knight to the kingside. 14.Bxe6 [14.Be2?! Bxf5 15.Qxf5 Ne6³] 14...Nxe6
521
A) 15.Nh6+?! is an apparently nice move but it doesn’t do much. 15...Kh8 16.Ne2 Rad8 and all the
black pieces are well-placed. 17.h4 Best, threatening Bg5. 17...Rd7! 18.Bg5 Ng8³ White has a problem
with their uncoordinated minor pieces.
B) 15.Ne2 g6! 16.Nh6+ Kg7 17.h4 Rad8= Black’s position is very healthy with all their pieces well-
placed.
11...Be6
12.Be3
522
12.b4 Gaining space but this will also leave weak squares. 12...Bxc4 13.Qxc4 Ne6 14.Be3 [14.Bb2 a5!
15.b5 Nd7=] 14...a5 15.b5 cxb5 16.Qxc7 Nxc7 17.Nxb5 Nxb5 18.axb5 Bb4= as in Erwich, M – Wuts, F
Amsterdam 2001.
12...Bxc4 13.Qxc4 Ne6
Black already has their minor pieces well-placed so we only need to introduce the a8-rook into the game.
14.Ng5
The only move that puts a bit of pressure.

14.a5 b5! 15.axb6 axb6 16.Ng5 Nxg5 17.Bxg5 Qb7=
14...Nxg5 15.Bxg5
Threatening Nd5 after capturing on f6.
15...Rac8!
Avoiding White’s idea.
16.Be3
We have reached the game Stany, G – Bocharov, D New Delhi 2010.
16...b6N
523
Position after: 16...b6N
We are ready to contest the only open file.
17.Rd2
A) 17.a5 b5 18.Qe2 Rfd8=

B) 17.Rd3 Rfd8 18.Rad1 Rxd3 19.Rxd3 Nd7 20.b4 h6= with equality. Our idea is ...Nf8 and ...Ne6,
improving the knight.
17...Rfd8 18.Rxd8+
18.Rad1 Rxd2 19.Rxd2 Nd7= followed by ...Nf8 and ...Ne6.
18...Rxd8
524
Position after: 18...Rxd8
19.a5
Threatening axb6 and Nb5.

19.b4 Ne8 20.Rd1 Nd6 21.Qa6 Qb7=
19...Rc8 20.axb6 axb6 21.Ra6
21.Qa6 Rb8=
21...b5 22.Qa2 h6=
The position is totally equal.
f) 7.h3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.h3
525
7...b6
This is the move that I recommend. The idea is to attack the e4-pawn very quickly with ...Bb7.
7...c6 is the most common way to play and the one recommended in some books. 8.a4 Nxe4
The idea behind 7...c6. This is recommended by both Grandmaster Christian Bauer in his book “The
Philidor Files” and International Master Vladimir Barsky in his book “The Modern Philidor Defense”. The
only problem is that White gains a slight but very comfortable advantage. 9.Nxe4 d5 10.Re1! exd4
11.Bxd5 cxd5 12.Ng3² as was played in the game Brkic, A – Laznicka, V Gjakova 2016.
526
Position after: 12.Ng3²
White has the better pawn structure, so the position is easier to play for them.
Let’s now focus on 7...b6.
8.Be3
A) 8.Qe2 To follow up with Rd1. 8...exd4! opens up the e-file and enables an attack on the e4-pawn with
the e8-rook. 9.Nxd4 Bb7 10.Nf5 Re8 11.Bg5 Bf8
527
We have attacked the center in the best possible way and now, White has difficulties defending it. They
will have no choice but to exchange the bishop for the knight on f6. 12.Rad1 h6 13.Bxf6 Nxf6 14.Qf3!
Prevents Black from taking on e4 because, in that case, there would be the possibility of Nxh6+.
14...Re5 15.Rfe1 g6 16.Ne3 Bg7=
With a good position for Black, thanks to the bishop pair.

B) 8.a4 Bb7
528
9.Qe2 as was played in Domingo Nunez, R – Iglesias Leon, F Linares 2018. [9.d5 c6! 10.dxc6 Bxc6
11.Re1 Nc5 12.Nd2 Qd7 All our pieces are active. 13.Bb5 a6 14.Bxc6 Qxc6 15.Qe2 Ne6= to continue
with ...Rfc8 and ...b5.] 9...exd4N The aim is to attack the e4-pawn with as many pieces as possible and,
for this, we should include the rook on e8. 10.Nxd4 Re8 11.a5 [11.Bxf7+?? Kxf7 12.Qc4+ d5 13.exd5
Ne5–+] 11...bxa5!
The best move. Even if we spoil our structure, White cannot recapture immediately, so we will have an
extra pawn. The idea is that, while White is dedicated to recovering it, we will be able to press hard in
the center. 12.Nb3 [12.Bb5 Qc8 To play ...c6. 13.Bc6 Bxc6 14.Nxc6 Bf8 15.Rxa5 Qb7=] 12...Bf8
529
B1) 13.Bg5 Qc8 14.Bxf6 Nxf6 Threatening ...d5. 15.Qf3 Rb8 16.Nxa5 Ba8= with very active pieces.
B2) 13.Bd3 a4! Forcing our opponent to capture the pawn with the rook. 14.Rxa4 Nb6 15.Ra5 d5
16.Rd1 [16.e5 Nfd7 17.f4 c5=] 16...Qc8=
B3) 13.Nxa5 The best. 13...Bxe4 14.Be3 [14.Qd1 Qc8 15.Nxe4 Rxe4 16.Be2 Re6 17.Bf3 d5=] 14...c5
Restricting the bishop’s activity and threatening ...d5. 15.Nxe4 Rxe4 16.Ba6 [16.Rfd1 Qc7 17.Bb5
Re6³] 16...d5!
An excellent move that implies an exchange sacrifice. However, Black will have compensation due to
the activity of the pieces and the good pawn center. 17.Bb7 Rb8 18.Nc6 Qc7 19.Nxb8 Qxb8 20.Bc6
530
Ne5 Bringing into play as many pieces as we can. 21.Qb5 [21.Qa6?? Rb4 22.Ba4 Nc4–+] 21...Qd6
22.Ba8
Position after: 22.Ba8
22...Neg4 [22...Nf3+!? 23.gxf3 Rxe3= with the aim of ...Qf4 and ...Bd6.] 23.hxg4 Nxg4 24.Rfe1 Rxe3
25.fxe3 Qg3= and it may be that White has nothing better than to accept perpetual check.
8...Bb7
9.d5
A) 9.dxe5 dxe5 10.Qd3 Nc5=
531
B) 9.Qd3 c6 10.a4 d5! Blasting the center into the air. 11.Ba6 dxe4 12.Nxe4 Bxa6 13.Nxf6+ Nxf6
14.Qxa6 e4 15.Ne5 Qc7 16.a5 Rac8= with an equal position.
9...a6
To continue with ...b5.
10.a4
This position was reached in Perales Galindo, E – Grigore, G Barbera del Valles 2004.
10...a5N
Avoiding b4 from White. Now that the center is closed, Black prepares to rearrange their pieces in such a
way that it can be activated on the kingside. This specific pawn structure is described at the beginning of
the book.
11.Bb5 Nc5 12.Bxc5 bxc5 13.Ra3 g6
Getting ready for ...f5.
14.Rb3 Kh8
532
Preparing to move the knight to g8 and unblock the f7-pawn.
15.Nd2
A) 15.Be2 Bc8 16.Nd2 Nd7! 17.Nc4 Nb6=

B) 15.Bc6 is not a problem for us, the pawn on c6 will be weak. 15...Bxc6 16.dxc6 Qe8 17.Nd5 Bd8
18.Nxf6 Bxf6 19.Qd5 Ra6
Position after: 19...Ra6
20.Nd2 Qxc6 21.Qxc6 Rxc6 22.Nc4 Ra8= and even though White has compensation for the pawn,
Black has a good position.
533
15...Ng8 16.Nc4 Bg5!
The idea is to leave the e7-square free for the knight so that, in the event that White wants to exchange
bishops on c6, we are well-prepared.
17.Qe2
17.Bc6 Bxc6 18.dxc6 Ne7 19.Nd5 Nxc6 20.Rb7 Rc8= The plan is to create counterplay on the kingside
with ...f5.
17...f5 18.Be8!
An excellent resource for White.
18...Ba6 19.Bc6 Bxc4 20.Qxc4 Rb8
534
Although we have a weakened queenside, we will obtain a lot of counterplay on the kingside.
21.Qa6
A) 21.Rb5 Bd2! 22.Rxa5 Rb4 23.Qe2 Qg5 24.Ra7 Nf6„ with substantial counterplay.
B) 21.Rxb8 Qxb8 22.Qb5 Nf6 23.exf5 gxf5 24.Qxb8 Rxb8 25.Nb5 To follow with b3. 25...c4!=
21...Rxb3 22.cxb3 Bd2 23.Qxa5 fxe4 24.Qb5 e3
Our counterplay is very powerful.
535
25.fxe3
25.Qe2 Qg5 26.Ne4 Qf4 27.Nxd2 exd2 28.Rd1 Ne7 29.Rxd2 Nf5!
We need all our pieces around the white king. 30.a5 Nd4 31.Qe1 Nxb3 32.Rd3 Qc4=
25...Bxe3+ 26.Kh2 Ne7
27.a5
27.g3 h5 28.a5 Nf5 Threatening ...Nxg3. 29.Qe2 Nd4! 30.Rxf8+ Qxf8 31.Qxe3 Qf1 32.Qh6+ Kg8
33.Qxg6+ Kh8=
536
27...Nf5!
To transfer our queen to the attack.
28.Ne4 Qh4 29.Qd3 Bf4+
Position after: 29...Bf4+
30.Kh1
30.g3?? A losing move. 30...Nxg3 31.Nxg3 c4!!
Position after: 31...c4!!
An impressive winning move. The idea being that now that many pieces are going to be exchanged, we
will reach an endgame with an extra exchange, and a passed pawn which we will strive to promote. This
537
move, 31...c4 serves to close the f1-a6 diagonal so that White cannot stop our pawn with Bb5. 32.bxc4
Bxg3+ 33.Qxg3 Qxg3+ 34.Kxg3 Rxf1 35.b3 e4! 36.a6 e3 37.a7 e2 38.a8=Q+ Kg7–+
30...Be3=
The engine suggests total equality but it feels easier to play with the black pieces. Our threat is ...Qxe4.
g) 7.Qe2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Qe2
538
The most critical line. The idea, as we have seen with other alternatives, is to bring the rook into play
quickly to d1 and generate pressure on the center.
7...exd4
To install the knight on e5.
8.Nxd4 Ne5!
9.Bb3
9.Bf4 is a strange move that allows Black to win the bishop pair. 9...Nxc4 10.Qxc4 c5!

539
A) 11.Ndb5?? A terrible move that was played in Melendez Fierro, J – Accattato Martin, M Aragon
2012. 11...a6!N 12.Nxd6 Bxd6 13.Rad1 Be6 14.Qe2 Bxf4! 15.Rxd8 Raxd8–+
Position after: 15...Raxd8–+
and Black has a decisive advantage because we have one rook and two minor pieces in exchange for the
queen.
B) 11.Nde2 Be6 12.Qd3 d5 13.exd5 Nxd5= with an equal position as was played in Barlov, D – Rivas
Pastor, M Mesa 1992.
9...c5! 10.Nf5

10.Nf3?! is a dubious choice. 10...Bg4 Now, it is Black who is putting pressure. 11.Bf4 Bxf3 12.gxf3 Nh5
540
13.Bg3 [13.Be3 Bg5 gains control of the f4-square. 14.Nd5 Ng6 15.Qd2 Ne5=] 13...Bg5 To establish a
piece on f4. 14.Nd5 Ng6 15.Kh1 Nhf4= as in Hansen, L – Alkaersig, O Aarhus 1993. I would find this
easier to play as Black.
10...Bxf5 11.exf5 Qd7
In exchange for surrendering control of the d5-square to our opponent, we are threatening ...Qxf5 and it is
not simple for White to defend it.
12.f4
The main line and most critical move.

12.Nd5 doesn’t give us trouble. 12...Rae8! 13.Rd1 [13.Ne3 as tried in Jerez Perez, A – Valdes Romero, L
Barcelona 2015. 13...b5N 14.f4 Neg4!
541
Position after: 14...Neg4!
An important move. We will recover the piece with ...c4. 15.Nxg4 c4 16.h3 cxb3 17.axb3 Qxf5ƒ and we
have a more comfortable position.] 13...Bd8
14.Nxf6+ [14.Ne3 b5 15.c3 c4 16.Bc2 Bb6 17.a4 a6³ and Black obtains a slight advantage as was played
in Kristjansson, S – Henrichs, T Reykjavik 2010.] 14...Bxf6 15.Be3 [15.Bd5 This was Unzicker, W –
Hartoch, R Amsterdam 1994. 15...Qxf5N 16.Bxb7 Ng6³] 15...Qxf5 16.Rxd6 Ng4=
542
Position after: 16...Ng4=
as was played in Espig, T – Braun, G Suhl 1979, with an equal position.
12...Nc6 13.g4
Although it seems very strange to play like this as White, there are more than 20 games with this position
in the database, and with very good results for White – it has been played with White by several
Grandmasters such as Zoltan Almasi, Liviu Dieter Nisipeanu and Gilberto Milos.
13...d5!
Considering that White is going to play g5, we must threaten to play ...c4.
543
14.g5 c4!
An excellent piece sacrifice.
15.gxf6 Bxf6 16.Ba4 Qxf5
Position after: 16...Qxf5
Black has sacrificed a piece but not without compensation. In return, we have two pawns, our opponent’s
king is very weak and our pawn structure is better.
17.Qg2
The best move.

A) 17.Nd1?? b5–+ with a decisive advantage because we will recover the piece.
B) 17.Qf3 This position was reached in Nisipeanu, L – Miltner, A Germany 1997. 17...Ne7!
544
B1) 18.Rd1?? is a horrible decision. 18...Rfd8 and now ...d4 is unstoppable. 19.Ne2 d4! The subtlety is
that we want to play ...b5. 20.Qxb7 Rab8 21.Qf3 Qa5 22.Bc6 d3–+ We have fully opened up the
position and pushed the pawn to d2.
B2) 18.Nd1 b5! 19.Bxb5 Rfb8! 20.Ne3 Qc8³
B3) 18.Ne2 b5! The plan is to gain a development tempo by introducing a rook into play. 19.Bxb5 We
are following the correspondence game Machata, M – Sedlacek, P Slovakia 2000. 19...Rfb8!N
Position after: 19...Rfb8!N
The idea is to hunt down the bishop since after going to a4, we will play ...Rb4 and it will not be easy to
defend it. 20.Ba4 [20.a4? a6 and the bishop has no space. 21.Ng3 Qc8 22.Nh5 Bd4+ 23.Be3 (or
23.Kh1 Nf5!–+) 23...Bxe3+ 24.Qxe3 Qg4+ 25.Ng3 Nf5³] 20...Rb4
545
B3.1) 21.Qa3?? Rxa4! The idea is to deflect the queen from the third rank. 22.Qxa4 Qg4+ 23.Ng3
Nf5
24.c3 Allowing the queen to go into defense via c2. [24.Kg2 does not solve the problems. 24...Bh4
25.Qa3 Bxg3 26.hxg3 d4!–+ followed by ...c3 with a decisive advantage.] 24...Nxg3 25.hxg3 Qxg3+
26.Kh1 Qh3+ 27.Kg1 Be7–+
B3.2) 21.Ng3 The only good move. 21...Qh3 22.b3 is a sad necessity. 22...Rxa4 23.bxa4 Bxa1 24.c3
h5!
546
25.Ba3 h4 26.Bxe7 [26.Ne2? Qxf3 27.Rxf3 d4!µ] 26...hxg3 27.hxg3 Bb2=

C) 17.Bxc6 White removes a piece that could be vital for our attack but improves our pawn structure
instead. 17...bxc6
C1) 18.Qg2? A mistake. 18...Rfe8µ It is incredible that a draw was agreed in the game Andres
Gonzalez, I – Figuero Toro, J Caldas da Rainha 2014. Black has a clear advantage and now the plan is
very simple: to double rooks on the open file. Also, by moving ...Re6, we have the idea of transferring
the rook to g6.
C2) 18.Nd1 Rfe8 19.Ne3 Bd4 Activating all the pieces.
547
20.c3 Bc5 21.Rf3 as in the correspondence game Saglione, E – Bristol, M ICCF email 2011. 21...Qe4N
with powerful compensation.
17...Ne7
Removing the possibility of White exchanging our bishop for their knight. Now, the idea is to play ...d4.
18.Ne2
The only move to survive.

18.Nd1? b5! 19.Bxb5 Rab8! 20.Ba4 Rb4 and the bishop cannot be defended. 21.Ne3 Qc8
548
We are well-prepared to take the bishop with great advantage. 22.Ng4 Bd4+ 23.Kh1 Rxa4 24.c3 Bc5µ as
in Jepson, C – Johansson, J Borlange 1992.
18...b5! 19.Bxb5
19.Ng3?? Qd7–+
19...Rab8!
Position after: 19...Rab8!
20.a4
549
White does not have any decent alternatives.
A) 20.Ba4? Rb4µ
B) 20.Ng3? A poor decision, played in Venkatesh, M – Srikanth, A New Delhi 2010. 20...Qc8!N We
will be able to hunt the bishop. 21.Ba4 [21.Nh5 Kh8! 22.f5 Rxb5 23.Bg5 Bd4+ 24.Kh1 Nxf5–+]
21...Rb4 22.f5
Now, we have to be vigilant. 22...Kh8! avoids White’s attack. The aim is to play ...Rg8. [22...Rxa4?! is a
dubious move that allows White to equalize. 23.Nh5 Qc6 24.Bg5 Bxg5 25.Qxg5 Qh6 26.Qxh6 gxh6
27.Rae1=] 23.Nh5 Rg8 24.Bg5 h6! 25.Bxf6 gxf6 26.Ng3 Rxa4µ
Position after: 26...Rxa4µ
20...Qc8
550
A draw was agreed in Sochacki, C – Neuman, P Pardubice 2013. Our next move will be ...a6. The game
could have continued with:
21.f5
A) 21.Ng3? a6 22.Nh5 Kh8! Stopping the attack. 23.f5 axb5 24.Bg5 Bd4+ 25.Kh1 Nxf5³
B) 21.Be3?! a6 22.Ba7 Ra8 is the safest option. [22...axb5!? is an interesting way to play. 23.Bxb8 Qxb8
24.c3 Nf5© and Black seems to have good compensation for the exchange.] 23.Bd4 Bxd4+ 24.Nxd4
axb5 25.axb5 Rxa1 26.Rxa1 Nf5= with a totally equal position.
21...a6 22.Bf4!
22.Bg5? Bxg5 23.Qxg5 f6³
22...Ra8 23.Bg5 Bxg5 24.Qxg5
551
Position after: 24.Qxg5
To continue with f6.
24...f6
24...Qc5+!? We can also consider this check, which can be annoying. 25.Kh1 f6 26.Qg4 axb5 27.Nd4
[27.Nf4 Qd4=] 27...h5! To deflect the queen.
28.Qf4 [28.Qxg7+? Kxg7 29.Ne6+ Kf7 30.Nxc5 bxa4µ and Black has a clear advantage in the endgame
due to their superior piece activity.] 28...Rxa4 29.Ne6 Qa7 30.Rxa4 bxa4 31.Nxf8 Kxf8© with good
compensation, two pawns and a safer king.
25.Qe3! Nxf5
552
26.Rxf5
The best try for our opponent.
26...Qxf5
It is clear that Black has nothing to fear; we have a rook and two pawns against a knight and bishop, and
the white king on g1 is vulnerable.
27.Bc6 Rab8 28.Nd4 Qg4+ 29.Kh1 Rfd8=
Position after: 29...Rfd8=
553
With a balanced position, although it is easier to play with the black pieces.
As we have seen, White has several reasonable alternatives to the two main moves: 7.Re1 and 7.a4.
In practice, against either of them, Black’s plan is similar: to expand on the queenside with ...c6 and ...b5.
Then we play ...a6 to defend our b5-pawn, so as to enable the further advance of our c-pawn, threatening
...c5 and ...c4.
The most critical option is 7.Qe2, leading to very concrete lines in which it is best to sacrifice a piece (the
f6-knight) in exchange for two pawns and a very weakened white king. We have to pay special attention to
this line but, as we have seen, it is White who has to walk on the wire to stay in the game and not be lost.
554
Chapter 14
7.Re1
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1
Chapter Guide
Chapter 14 – 7.Re1
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1 a6 8.a4 b6
a) 9.Qe2
b) 9.dxe5
c) 9.Ne2
d) 9.Bg5
e) 9.Nd5
f) 9.h3
g) 9.b3
h) 9.Ba2
a) 9.Qe2
We have arrived at one of the most important chapters in the book, as we are going to analyze White’s
main option against the Philidor Defense.
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1
555
This is the critical move for White.
7...a6
Although the main move is 7...c6, I personally prefer to play in this way so that, after playing ...b6, our
light-squared bishop can have more potential on the h1-a8 diagonal. Now, the idea is to play ...b5 and
expand on the queenside.
8.a4
White needs to respond like this.
8...b6
556
9.Qe2
9.d5 is supposedly the only way to exploit the fact that Black has not played ...c6. Still, we are well-
prepared. 9...a5
This structure has been explained at the beginning of the book. The idea is to close the queenside and
create counterplay on the kingside.
A) 10.Be3 does not seem to be the optimal square for the bishop. 10...Ng4 11.Bd2 Kh8 We are ready to
play with ...f5. 12.h3 Ngf6 13.Qe2 Nc5„
Position after: 13...Nc5„
557
Now, Black is ready to counterattack on the kingside. The plan is to play ...Ng8 followed by ...f5.
B) 10.Nd2 Nc5 11.Nb5 Ne8 12.c3 f5 We are already prepared, so why wait? 13.exf5 Bxf5 14.Qe2 Bg5
Of the two bishops, generally in this opening, the dark-squared bishop is the inferior one, so we are
interested in exchanging it. 15.b4 Nd7= with a balanced position, although it seems that Black has a
more comfortable position to play.
C) 10.Bb5 as in Luther, T – Schmaltz, R Lippstadt 1996. 10...Kh8N clearing the g8-square for the
knight. 11.Nd2 Ng8 12.Nc4 f5 13.exf5 Rxf5 14.Ne4 Rf8
Position after: 14...Rf8
f5 is not the best square for the rook, so we must return it. Now is the time to activate our pieces, starting
with ...Ndf6. 15.Ncd2 [15.Ra3 is White’s typical maneuver to activate the rook very quickly and lead it
558
into the attack. 15...Ndf6 16.Ng3 Bd7 17.Bxd7 Qxd7= with equality. One possible plan is to double the
rooks on f7 and f8.] 15...Ndf6 16.Nc3 Bb7=
9...Bb7
The advantage of having the pawn on c7 is that our bishop is active and attacking the e4-pawn.
10.Ba2
Surely the best square for the bishop as it cannot be attacked. It also clears the c4-square for a possible
attacking maneuver by placing the queen there.
A) 10.h3 as tried in Juhasz, B – Srebrnic, A Meissen 2013. 10...exd4N To exert pressure on the central
pawn. 11.Nxd4 Re8 12.Nf5 Bf8
559
13.Bg5 is best. [13.Qd1? Nxe4 14.Qg4 is the idea of 13.Qd1 but doesn’t work. 14...Ne5! 15.Nh6+ Kh8
16.Nxf7+ Nxf7 17.Bxf7 Nxf2! The key move, which makes this whole variation good for Black.
18.Rxe8 Qxe8³] 13...h6 14.Bh4 g5!
Weakening our king but for a very specific reason: we can now play ...d5. 15.Bg3 d5 16.Bd3 Nc5
putting the e4-pawn under considerable pressure. 17.Rad1 Ncxe4 18.Bxe4 Nxe4 19.Nxe4 Rxe4 20.Qh5
Rxe1+ 21.Rxe1 Qf6=
Black manages to arrive in time to defend their king and has the extra pawn, so there is nothing to worry
about.
560
B) 10.dxe5 Nxe5 Now is a good moment to take with the knight in order to exchange pieces. 11.Nxe5
dxe5
B1) 12.Qf3 Trying to transfer the knight from c3 to e3. 12...c6 13.Nd1 b5 14.Bf1 [14.Ba2?! c5! 15.Bg5
c4³] 14...c5 15.Bg5 c4= with ...c5 we have made it difficult for White to transfer the knight to f5 via
e3. To do so, White will have to surrender the bishop pair.
B2) 12.Rd1 Qc8 Intending ...Qg4. 13.f3 c6 Controlling the d5-square and to play ...b5. 14.Be3 b5
15.Bb3 Rd8 16.Qf2 [16.Rxd8+ Qxd8 17.Rd1 Qc7 18.Qf2 Rd8= without any problems for us.]
16...Rxd1+ 17.Rxd1 Qf8
561
Controlling the c5-square and to play ...Rd8. 18.Qg3 Bd6 19.Bg5 Qe7 20.Bh6 Ne8= with the idea of
...Bc7 and ...Rd8, with an equal position.
C) 10.Rd1 as essayed in Djukic, N – Kadric, D Sarajevo 2012. 10...exd4N To place the knight on e5.
Position after: 10...exd4N
C1) 11.Rxd4 h6 As we want to play ...Re8, we need to avoid the possibility of White playing Ng5.
12.Nh4 [12.Bf4 Re8 13.Rad1 Threatening e5. 13...Qc8 14.Nh4 Nc5 15.Nf5 Bf8= Squeezing the e4-
pawn.] 12...Ne5 Attacking the bishop, which cannot retreat.
If White retreats, we can use the tactic to our advantage and capture the central pawn, given the
position of the knight on h4. 13.Nf5 Re8 14.Bb3 Bf8 15.Bf4 Qd7= and Black has no concerns in this
position. Now, one idea is to play ...Ng6.
562
C2) 11.Nxd4 Re8 12.Nf5 Bf8 13.f3 Ne5 14.Bb3 c6 Controlling d5.
The aim is to counteract the strength of the b3-bishop by trying to exchange it through ...Bc8 followed
by ...Be6.
C2.1) 15.Bf4 Bc8! 16.g4 d5 The right moment. 17.Qg2 Bxf5 The knight must be eliminated because
it is White’s best piece. 18.gxf5 Nh5 19.Bd2 Qh4 20.exd5 Nf4„
Position after: 20...Nf4„
We have ample counterplay thanks to the weakness of the white king and because our pieces are very
active.
C2.2) 15.Bg5 h6 16.Bh4 [16.Be3 Bc8 17.Ng3 Be6=] 16...Ng6 17.Bf2 Bc8 18.Ne3 Be6=
563
Countering the strength of the light-squared bishop and obtaining a balanced position. The aim is to
play ...d5.
10...c6
A multi-purpose move: it controls the d5-square, allows expansion on the queenside with ...b5 and vacates
the c7-square for the queen with the aim of completing development.
11.dxe5
564
11.Rd1 Qc7 12.Nh4 Rae8 13.dxe5 [13.Nf5 exd4 14.Rxd4 d5! Activating our dark-squared bishop.
15.exd5 Bc5 16.Bf4 Rxe2 17.Bxc7 Rxc2= with equal chances for both.] 13...Nxe5 14.Nf5 b5
We are ready to play ...b4. 15.axb5 [15.Bf4 b4 16.Bxe5 dxe5 17.Nxe7+ Rxe7 18.Nb1 Rd8= and we don’t
have any difficulties.] 15...axb5 16.Bf4 [16.Bg5 b4 17.Na4 d5=] 16...Bc8 17.Nxe7+ Qxe7 18.h3 Rd8=
We are preparing to play ...Ng6 and ...Be6, maintaining a balanced position.
11...Nxe5!
The best move. Inferior is 11...dxe5? 12.Nh4 Nc5 13.Nf5²
565
12.Nxe5
A) 12.Nh4 Re8 13.f4 [13.Nf5?! Bf8 14.Bf4 b5 15.Rad1 b4 16.Nb1 Bc8³ with decent chances for us.
The plan is to capture the knight or play ...Be6.] 13...Ng6 14.Nxg6 hxg6=
B) 12.Bg5 b5 13.Rad1 Qa5 14.Nd4 Bc8 15.Nf5 Bxf5 16.exf5 Rae8=
Position after: 16...Rae8=
We have our pieces very well-placed. Now, a possible idea that we should try is to play ...d5, blocking
the bishop on a2.
C) 12.Be3 b5 13.Nxe5 dxe5 14.f3 Bb4 15.Red1 Qe7 16.Qf2 Rfd8= with equality.
566
D) 12.Bf4 This was Movsesian, S – Ftacnik, L Prague 1999. 12...Ng6N 13.Bg5 [13.Bg3 Nh5 14.Nd1
Bf6 15.c3 Re8=] 13...h6 14.Nh4 The most critical move. 14...Kh7 The best way to defend for us.
15.Nxg6 fxg6 We have the f-file opened and we can capitalize on it.
Position after: 15...fxg6
16.e5 hxg5 17.exf6 Bxf6 18.Be6 Threatening Qg4, followed by Qh3+. 18...Bc8! 19.Qg4 Bxe6 20.Rxe6
Bxc3 21.Qh3+ Kg8 22.Qxc3 Qd7=
12...dxe5 13.Nd1
Transferring to f5.
567
13...Qc7 14.Ne3 Bc8 15.Qf3 a5 16.Nf5 Bxf5 17.Qxf5 Rad8=
Position after: 17...Rad8=
The position is balanced. White has the bishop pair but in return, Black has better development and good
control of the open file. Now, the plan is to double up the rooks.
b) 9.dxe5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1 a6 8.a4 b6 9.dxe5
This is not usually a good option for White but they have a very specific idea and for that reason, Black
should not recapture with the pawn.
568
9...Nxe5!
9...dxe5?! A dubious move that will give White an advantage. 10.Nh4! heading to f5 and we can’t stop it.
Position after: 10.Nh4!
A) 10...Nxe4? 11.Nxe4 Bxh4 We have won a pawn but now White will have a great attack. 12.Qh5
Position after: 12.Qh5
A1) 12...Bb7 as tried in Weill, R – Pancevski, F Lille 2013. 13.Bg5!N is much better than 13.Ng5
played in the aforementioned game. 13...Bxg5 14.Nxg5 Nf6 15.Bxf7+ Like a jug of cold water!
[15.Nxf7? Qd4!=] 15...Kh8 16.Qh4± with a clear advantage.
A2) 12...Be7 is the best try. 13.Ng5! Bxg5 14.Bxg5 Nf6 [14...Qe8?? 15.Ra3+–] 15.Bxf6! Qxf6
16.Qxe5 Qxe5 17.Rxe5²
569
Position after: 17.Rxe5²
The endgame is more comfortable to play as White.

B) 10...Nc5 is perhaps the best choice after 10.Nh4. 11.Nf5 c6 12.Bf1²
Position after: 12.Bf1²
White’s position seems easier to play. Their plan is to move the pieces to the kingside using Qf3 and
Bg5.
10.Nxe5
Avoiding ...Bg4.
10.Ba2 Bg4 11.Bf4 Bxf3 12.gxf3 Nh5 13.Bg3 Bg5 14.Nd5 Ng6= with good control of the f4-square.
570
10...dxe5
11.Nd5
This position was reached in Hajdarevic, D – Pogan, N Austria 2014.

A) 11.Qe2 c6 12.Bg5 Nd7
The exchange of the dark-squared bishop favors us as Black.

A1) 13.Be3 Qc7 14.Red1 Nc5 15.b4 Ne6 We want to embed the knight on f4 or d4. On d4, we would
surrender a pawn in exchange for gaining the bishop pair and opening up the a1-h8 diagonal which can
be advantageous to us. 16.a5 b5 17.Bb6 Qb7 18.Bxe6 Bxe6= Our bishops control the position.
571
A2) 13.Bxe7 Qxe7 14.Nd1 Nc5 Intending ...Be6. 15.Qe3 a5 16.b3 Rd8= with equality as was played
in Tiviakov, S – Kosten, A Imperia 1992.
B) 11.Qxd8 Rxd8 12.Nd5 Nxd5 13.Bxd5 Rb8 14.Be3 a5 15.Red1 Kf8= with an equal endgame.
11...Bb7N
Position after: 11...Bb7N
12.Nxe7+
12.Nxf6+ It is evident that this move cannot cause problems for Black. The only pressure White has is
over the a6-pawn, but it is not enough to gain an advantage. 12...Bxf6 13.Qe2 Qe7 14.b3 Threatening
572
Ba3. 14...Rfd8 15.Ba3 Qe8
16.Bb2 [16.Rad1 Rxd1 17.Rxd1 Rd8! 18.Rxd8 Qxd8 19.Bb2 Qd6 20.g3 a5= with a drawish endgame.]
16...a5 17.Red1 Rxd1+ 18.Rxd1 Rd8=
12...Qxe7 13.Bd3 Rfd8
Position after: 13...Rfd8
We have very active pieces so we won’t have any trouble equalizing despite White’s pair of bishops.
14.Qf3
14.Qe2 Nd7 Improving the knight. 15.b3 Nf8

573
One of the best squares for the knight is e6, from where it will have access to d4 or to f4, whichever suits
us. 16.Ba3 [16.Bb2 f6 17.Bc4+ Kh8 18.Rad1 a5 To eliminate our weakness. 19.h4 Ne6 20.g3 h6= with a
balanced position. The plan is to double the rooks and end up installing a knight on d4.] 16...Qf6 17.Rad1
Ne6= Once we have the knight on e6, the position appears totally balanced or even somewhat more
comfortable to play as Black.
14...a5!
Eliminating the weakness and facilitating the exchange of bishops.
15.b3 Ba6 16.Bxa6 Rxa6 17.Ba3

574
17.Bg5 Raa8 18.Rad1 Rxd1 19.Rxd1 Rd8=
17...c5 18.Bb2 Raa8
Position after: 18...Raa8
19.Rad1
19.Qc3 Re8 20.Rad1 h6 21.f3 Rad8 It is best for us to take out the rooks. 22.Rxd8 Qxd8 23.Re2 Re6!
24.Rd2 Rd6 25.Rxd6 Qxd6 26.Kf2 Nd7= with a totally equal endgame.
19...c4! 20.Qc3 cxb3 21.cxb3 Qe6
The b3-pawn has also become a weakness.

575
22.Qxe5
22.f3 Rdc8 23.Qd3 h6=
22...Qxb3 23.Rxd8+ Rxd8 24.Qc7 Re8 25.Bxf6 gxf6=
Position after: 25...gxf6=
The endgame is totally equal. The black king is weaker but there is hardly enough material with which to
attack us. Furthermore, both the queen and the rook are active.
c) 9.Ne2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1 a6 8.a4 b6 9.Ne2
576
This move seeks to transfer the knight to the kingside from where it can launch an attack. Many
Grandmasters have used this line, such as Peter Svidler. However, Black has nothing to fear because we
have a tactical resource at our disposal.
9...Bb7
9...Nxe4?? 10.Bd5+–
10.Ng3 Nxe4!
A very important move in this line.
11.Nxe4 d5
Here, White has several options but Black is well-prepared against all of them.
12.Bb3
Probably best.
A) 12.Bd3?! is a dubious choice. 12...dxe4 13.Bxe4 Bxe4 14.Rxe4 f5 15.Re1 e4³ with an easier to
position to play for Black.
B) 12.Nxe5 Nxe5 13.dxe5 as was played in Sebag, M – Yudin, S Moscow 2010.
577
13...dxc4!N is better than 13...dxe4 that was played in the aforementioned game. 14.Qg4 Qc8 15.Qg3
Qf5= and although there is equality, the position seems more comfortable to play as Black due to the
bishop pair.
C) 12.Bxd5 Bxd5 13.dxe5 Nxe5!
A key move that serves to exchange several pieces and reach a balanced endgame. 14.Nxe5 Bxe4
15.Qxd8 Raxd8 16.Bf4 f5 17.Nc6 is the best attempt, which serves to win a pawn but will not be
enough. 17...Bxc6 18.Rxe7 Rf7 Once we exchange a rook, the opposite-colored bishops will grant the
equality we seek. 19.Rxc7 Rxc7 20.Bxc7 Rd2 21.Rc1 Be4= as was played in the game Svidler, P –
Mchedlishvili, M Germany 2012.
578
Although we are a pawn down, we have very active pieces and opposite-colored bishops, so the endgame
is totally balanced.
D) 12.dxe5 is perhaps the most critical move. 12...dxe4 13.e6 Opening up the position. 13...fxe6 14.Nd4
[14.Bxe6+ Kh8 15.Qxd7 exf3=] 14...Ne5
15.Ba2 as played in Franklin, S – Lorscheid, G Hastings 2010. [15.Bb3 c5! Seeking ...c4. 16.Nxe6 Qxd1
17.Rxd1 c4=] 15...Bd5!N A key move. 16.Nxe6 Bxe6 17.Bxe6+ Kh8
579
D1) 18.Be3 Bd6 To follow up with ...Qh4. 19.Qh5 Qe8= with an equal position.
D2) 18.Bd5 Bc5 19.Be3 [19.Rxe4?! Ng4!‚] 19...Bxe3 20.Rxe3 Qh4 Activating all the pieces. 21.g3
Qf6= with a good attack for Black.
D3) 18.Qxd8 Raxd8 19.h3 [19.Be3 Rd6! 20.Bb3 Ng4=] 19...Bb4 Forcing c3 and thus enabling access
to the d3-square, which will be weakened.
20.c3 [20.Rxe4 Rd1+ 21.Kh2 Bd6 22.f4 Re8=] 20...Nd3! 21.Rxe4 Bc5 Exerting considerable pressure
on the f2-pawn. 22.Be3 Bxe3 23.Rxe3 Nxb2=
580
Position after: 23...Nxb2=
Black doesn’t have any kind of problem in this endgame.
12...dxe4 13.Nxe5 Nxe5 14.dxe5 Qxd1 15.Rxd1
We have been following Satyapragyan, S – Koshy, V Aurangabad 2011.
15...Rad8N
Position after: 15...Rad8N
16.Bf4
581
16.Be3 a5 17.e6 [17.c3 g5! acquiring more space on the kingside and allowing an exit for the king to the
center. 18.h4 h6=] 17...fxe6 18.Bxe6+ Kh8 19.Bg4 Bf6 20.c3 g5=
We avoid a possible Bf4 and gain space on the kingside. Clearly, Black has managed to equalize.
16...g5! 17.Bg3 Bc8
To play ...Bg4, looking to win the fight for the open file.
18.e6
18.Bd5? Bg4³
582
18...Rxd1+ 19.Rxd1 Bxe6 20.Bxe6
20.Bxc7 Bxb3 21.cxb3 b5=
20...fxe6 21.Bxc7 Bc5ƒ
Position after: 21...Bc5ƒ
Although White’s pawn structure is better, Black’s pieces are very active so we have the initiative. The
plan is to bring the king to the middle of the board.
d) 9.Bg5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1 a6 8.a4 b6 9.Bg5
A natural square for the bishop. However, we can take advantage of this situation because we will play
...h6 and if the bishop retreats to h4, there will always be issues with ...g5 or ...Nxe4.
9...Bb7
583
It is best to attack the e4-pawn very quickly. Now, White has several alternatives but we are well-prepared
against all of them.
10.Ba2
The best square for the bishop.

A) 10.Qd2 is not the optimal square for the queen because the idea of ...Nxe4 is always in the air.
10...h6! A strong move that forces White to give up the bishop pair, as Bh4 would be met with the
unpleasant surprise ...Nxe4. 11.Bxf6 [11.dxe5 hxg5 12.exf6 Bxf6³ Black has a slight but comfortable
advantage, thanks to the bishop pair and control of the e5-square.] 11...Bxf6 12.Rad1 Re8=
Position after: 12...Re8=
584
with a balanced position, although in the long term, it is easier to play as Black due to the pair of
bishops.
B) 10.dxe5 Nxe5 To exchange pieces. 11.Nxe5 dxe5 12.Qf3 c6 13.Rad1 Qc7= as was played in Petrov,
M – Solomon, K Bad Wiessee 2010, with an equal position.
C) 10.Bxf6 does not look so dangerous. 10...Bxf6 11.Nd5 as tried in Schneider, I – Movsesian, S
Germany 2013. 11...exd4N
Position after: 11...exd4N
Gaining control of the e5-square so as to quickly pressure the central pawn through ...Re8. 12.Nxd4
[12.Nxf6+ Nxf6 13.Qxd4 c5 14.Qd3 b5=] 12...Re8 13.c3 g6= To hide the bishop on g7, so Black has no
problems.
D) 10.d5 a5! To close the queenside. The aim is to generate counterplay on the kingside.
585
D1) 11.Nd2 Ne8 12.Be3 Bg5 As we have seen previously, the dark-squared bishop is the worse of our
two bishops, so we should exchange it. 13.Nf1 g6 14.Bb5 Bxe3 15.Nxe3 Nc5 16.Rf1 Nf6 17.f3 Nh5„
Position after: 17...Nh5„
We have good counterplay on the kingside. Now, the idea is to play ...Qg5 and ...f5. In addition, we
have the f4-square for the knight.
D2) 11.Be3 Ng4 12.Bd2 Nc5 13.h3 Nf6 14.Qe2 Kh8= Vacating the g8-square for the knight.
We are ready to continue with ...Ng8, ...g6 and ...f5.
10...h6 11.Bh4
586
Following the game Mamedov, R – Movsesian, S Moscow 2010.
11...b5!N
Obtaining more space on the queenside. The idea is that if White decides to capture the pawn, the e4-pawn
will be left defenseless.
12.axb5
12.dxe5 is not problematic for us. 12...Nxe5 To exchange knights or to bring it to g6.
587
A) 13.axb5 Nxf3+ 14.Qxf3 axb5 15.b4 c5! In order to eliminate the b4-pawn and looking for ...b4.
16.bxc5 b4 17.cxd6 Qxd6 and we have a substantive attack against the central pawn. 18.Nd5 The best
choice. Now, there will be a series of piece exchanges that will favor Black.
18...Nxd5 19.Bxd5 Bxd5 20.Bxe7 Qxe7 21.exd5 Rfe8! This is an accurate move, exploiting the fact that
the rooks have to defend the first rank. 22.Kf1 Rxa1 23.Rxa1 Qc7= Black has no difficulties in this
endgame.
B) 13.Nxe5 dxe5 14.Qf3 c6 15.Nd1 [15.Bb3 Nd7 16.Bxe7 Qxe7=] 15...c5 Threatening ...c4 and
blocking the bishop on a2.
B1) 16.Nc3 c4! 17.axb5 axb5
588
B1.1) 18.Nxb5? A very poor choice. 18...Nxe4 19.Bxe7 Qxe7 20.Nc3 [20.Rxe4?? Bxe4 21.Qxe4
Qb4–+] 20...Qb4 21.Nxe4 Rxa2³ with an easier position to play for Black.
B1.2) 18.Bxf6 Bxf6 19.Nxb5 Qa5 We have ample counterplay in exchange for the pawn. 20.Na3
Qb4 21.Reb1 [21.c3 Qxb2 22.Nxc4 Qc2=] 21...Bc6 22.c3 Qb7=
with a balanced position. The pair of bishops and the greater activity of the pieces clearly compensate
for the sacrificed pawn – the position is easier to play as Black.
B2) 16.Bxf6 is a typical idea to ensure control of the d5-square but it does not trouble Black. 16...Bxf6
17.Ne3 c4 18.b3 Be7! 19.axb5 axb5 20.bxc4 b4
589
Ensuring the c5-square for our bishop and locking in the a2-bishop. 21.Red1 Qc7 22.Bb3 Rxa1
23.Rxa1 Bc5= with sufficient compensation for the pawn.
12...axb5 13.Nxb5 g5!
To take on e4.
14.dxe5
A) 14.Bg3 Nxe4 15.Qd3 exd4 Threatening ...Ndc5. 16.b4 Kh8! With the idea of ...f5, placing the g3-
bishop in trouble. 17.Rxe4 Bxe4 18.Qxe4 f5 19.Qe6 Rf6 20.Qe2 f4 21.Nfxd4 Ne5= with a balanced
position according to the engines, but it is easier to play with the pieces that are going to get an extra
exchange.
590
B) 14.Bxg5!? is an interesting alternative against which we have to be well-prepared. 14...hxg5 15.Nxg5

Nd5!
Position after: 15...Nd5!
B1) 16.Nxf7 is very spectacular but we are not afraid! 16...Rxf7 17.Bxd5 Bxd5 18.exd5 Rxa1 19.Qxa1
Bh4 Transferring our pieces to the kingside. 20.g3 Qf6! 21.Re2 Qf3 22.Qd1 Bd8‚
Position after: 22...Bd8‚
Although White has four pawns for the piece, they are still not very useful and Black has the attack.
Now, the idea is to bring the knight to g4.
591
B2) 16.Qg4 is best. 16...N7f6 17.Qg3 [17.Qh4 Nf4 18.Qh6 Qd7= To follow up with ...Qg4.] 17...Nh5
18.Nxf7+ Kxf7 19.Bxd5+ Bxd5 20.Qf3+ Nf4 21.exd5 Rxa1 22.Rxa1 Qd7 23.g3 Qh3‚
Position after: 23...Qh3‚
Black has decent chances of an attack and right now, our extra piece is more useful than the four pawns
that White has for it.
14...Nxe5 15.Nxe5 dxe5 16.Bg3 Nxe4
We have weakened our king but we are going to exchange queens, so it is not dangerous.
17.Bxe5 Qxd1 18.Rexd1 Rfd8
592
It favors us to exchange pieces.
19.Rxd8+ Rxd8
Position after: 19...Rxd8
20.Bxc7
A) 20.Kf1?! Bc5 21.Bxc7 Rd2 22.f3 Bc6³

B) 20.Nc3 Ra8=
C) 20.Bd4 Bc6 21.Na7 Be8=
20...Rd2
All of our pieces are very active, much more than our opponent’s.
21.Bb6 Rxc2 22.Bd4 Bc6
593
23.Bb3
A) 23.f3 Nd2 24.Nc3 Bxf3!= Recovering the pawn; we continue to maintain attacking options.
B) 23.Na7 Bd7 Hunting the knight. 24.Bb3 Rc7 25.Bd5 Bc5=
23...Re2
24.Nc3
A) 24.Na3 Nd2 25.Ba2 Re4! To follow up with ...Rg4. 26.Be3 Rg4 27.Bxd2 Rxg2+ 28.Kf1 Bf3
594
It’s White who has to find some mechanism to defend themselves against the threat ...Rxh2, followed by
...Rh1#.
B) 24.Na7 Bb7 25.Rd1 [25.h3 g4! 26.hxg4 Bh4‚] 25...Bc5!=
C) 24.Nc7 Bd6 25.Nd5 Bxd5 26.Bxd5 Rd2 27.Bxe4 Rxd4=
24...Rd2 25.Rd1
25.Nxe4 Rxd4 26.Ng3 Rb4=
25...Rxb2
The endgame looks very equal.
26.Nd5 Bxd5 27.Bxd5 Rd2 28.Rxd2 Nxd2=
595
Position after: 28...Nxd2=
The endgame is totally balanced. Although the knight seems trapped, that is not the case and we have the
maneuver ...Nb1-a3.
e) 9.Nd5
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1 a6 8.a4 b6 9.Nd5
White tries to take advantage of the fact that we have played 7...a6 and not 7...c6, thereby winning the
bishop pair. Still, this is not problematic since we are going to obtain good counterplay against the central
e4-pawn.
9...Bb7
596
Now, White has many options.
10.Nxe7+
The main move.

A) 10.c3 Defending the d4-pawn but now, we can take on d5 and leave the f6-square free for the bishop.
10...Nxd5 11.Bxd5 Bxd5 12.exd5 Bf6 13.Qd3 [13.a5 exd4 14.Nxd4 Bxd4 15.Qxd4 b5 16.Be3 Qf6=
and the position is balanced. The aim is to exchange queens and fight for the open file.] 13...Re8 14.Bd2
exd4 To exchange rooks. 15.cxd4 Rxe1+ 16.Rxe1 a5=
As was played in Sokolov, A – Marcelin, C Saint – Quentin 2014. We can continue with ...Qf8 followed
by ...Re8, with an equal position.
B) 10.dxe5 dxe5
597
B1) 11.Nxf6+ as tried in Godena, M – Inarkiev, E Rijeka 2010. 11...Nxf6N Putting the e4-pawn under
pressure. 12.Nxe5 [12.Qxd8 Raxd8 13.Nxe5 Nxe4
We can see that we have nothing to worry about in this position. 14.Bf4 Bc5 15.Nd3 Rxd3! 16.cxd3
Bxf2+ 17.Kf1 Bxe1 18.Rxe1 Nd6= with a totally equal endgame.] 12...Qxd1 13.Rxd1 Bd6 14.Bf4
Nxe4 15.Nd3 a5=
B2) 11.Nxe7+ Qxe7 12.Nd2 Nc5 13.f3 b5! Exploiting all the tactical resources in the position. 14.axb5
axb5 15.Rxa8 Rxa8 White can either take on b5 or retreat the bishop.
598
Position after: 15...Rxa8
B2.1) 16.Bxb5 is not worrisome because we have a great answer. 16...Ncxe4! The key is that we have
a check on c5. 17.Nxe4 Bxe4 18.Qe2 [18.Bf1 Bg6=] 18...Bd5 19.Be3 Qe6= To continue with ...e4.
B2.2) 16.Bf1 This position was reached in Kamsky, G – Hausrath, D Vlissingen 2019. 16...Ba6!N
Aiming to play ...b4 to exchange bishops.
Position after: 16...Ba6!N
17.Nb3 [17.c3 Ne6 18.Qe2 b4 19.Nc4 Nd7= with equal chances for both.] 17...Rd8 18.Qe2 b4
19.Qe3 Nxb3 20.Qxb3 Bxf1 21.Kxf1 Nh5= Threatening ...Qh4 with great activity for our pieces.
10...Qxe7
599
11.Bd3
A) 11.Bg5 h6 This is usually the automatic move when White places the bishop on g5. 12.Bh4 Rfe8
Clearing the f8-square in order to transfer the knight from d7 to g6. 13.Bd5
This was Sjugirov, S – Yudin, S Moscow 2007. 13...Bxd5!N The best. 14.exd5 Qf8 15.dxe5 dxe5
16.Bxf6 Nxf6 17.Nxe5 Qd6= with an equal position after taking on d5.
B) 11.d5 c6 Hitting the center. 12.Bg5 h6
600
B1) 13.Bxf6 Nxf6 14.dxc6 [14.Bb3?! cxd5 15.exd5 Rac8 16.c4 b5³ is a position that occurred in my
game Quirhuayo Chumbe, G – Trigo Urquijo, S La Roda 2017. The position is already favorable for
Black.] 14...Bxc6 15.Qd3 Rfd8! 16.Nd2 Qb7=
With considerable pressure on e4 as happened in the game Gallagher, J – Kurmann, O Switzerland

2012. The aim is to play ...d5.
B2) 13.Bh4 as was played between Grandmasters in the game Smirin, I – Eljanov, P Netanya 2009.
13...cxd5!N 14.Bxd5 Bxd5 15.exd5 Qd8= followed by ...Qc7 to unpin, with a balanced position.
601
However, I think the position is more comfortable for Black to play, thanks to the counterplay that we
can create on the c-file.
11...Rfe8
Position after: 11...Rfe8
12.c3
A) 12.b3? A mistake that took place in the game Ivanisevic, I – Popovic, D Belgrade 2014. 12...exd4!N
To place the queen on e5. 13.Nxd4 Qe5 14.c3 [14.Be3 Bxe4µ] 14...Nc5
602
Black has considerable pressure on the e4-pawn and White has no easy way to defend it. 15.f4 Qe7
16.e5 Nxd3 17.Qxd3 dxe5 18.fxe5 Qc5µ and White will not be able to hold the central pawn for long.
B) 12.Bg5?! as in Huschenbeth, N – Seeman, T Khanty-Mansiysk 2010. 12...exd4!N 13.Nxd4 Qe5
14.Bxf6 White was forced to exchange the bishop. 14...Qxf6 15.c3 Nc5³
Position after: 15...Nc5³
The position is more pleasant to play for us due to the strong pressure on the central pawn. Now, a
possible idea is ...Re5 to double up rooks.
C) 12.d5 Nc5!©
603
Position after: 12...Nc5!©
13.Bg5 [13.a5 b5 14.Bg5 as in Safarli, E – Al Sayed, M Khanty-Mansiysk 2013. 14...c6N Kicking the
center. 15.dxc6 Bxc6 16.b4 Nxd3 17.cxd3 h6= with equality. Now, the plan is to fight for the open file.]
13...h6 14.Bh4 c6 15.c4 a5! Avoiding White’s plan of b4, fixing the queenside structure and taking
control of the c5-square for our knight. 16.Bc2 as essayed in Mamedov, N – Mchedlishvili, M Konya
2011. 16...Bc8!N
Once we have fixed the center and accepted that the d5-pawn would not be eliminated, the bishop looks
for a new route – it aims to go to g4 to be exchanged for the knight.
C1) 17.dxc6 Bg4 18.h3 Bxf3 19.Qxf3 g5
604
Even though over the board, White has a bishop pair against our pair of knights, which seems to be
greatly advantageous for our opponent, if we look closely at the resulting pawn structure, we will
realize that their bishops do not have great diagonals. The dark-squared bishop collides with our pawns
and the light-squared bishop collides with their own pawns. On the other hand, our knights have strong
squares such as c5 and can potentially access d4 and f4. For these reasons, I would say that Black’s
position is easier to play. 20.Bg3 Rac8= with a balanced position, although Black’s position seems
more comfortable. After taking on c6, a possible plan is to improve the f6-knight. How can we do it?
By transferring it to e6, either via h7-f8 or via d7-f8.
C2) 17.h3 Bd7 18.Nd2 cxd5 We need to play in this way, to follow up with ...g5. 19.cxd5 [19.exd5 g5
20.Bg3 Nh7= followed by ...f5.] 19...g5 20.Bg3 Rec8 21.Re3 Kg7=
Position after: 21...Kg7=
605
It does not seem at all straightforward for White to take advantage of the weakening around our king;
on the contrary, we will be able to improve our pieces on that flank, such as the f6-knight, which we
can place on g6. Another possible plan is to play with ...b5.
12...exd4
13.Nxd4N
Possibly the best.

13.cxd4 as was played in Nabaty, T – Baratosi, D Plovdiv 2012 but here, we have a very strong reply.
13...Nxe4!N 14.Ng5 Ndf6
Position after: 14...Ndf6
606
A) 15.Nxe4 Bxe4 16.Bg5 [16.f3? Bxf3µ] 16...Qd7! We unpin and now, there will be some exchanges of
pieces, for which we are well-prepared. 17.Bxf6 Bxd3 18.Rxe8+ Rxe8 19.Qxd3 gxf6 20.Qxa6 Qg4
White has recovered the pawn and our king is weaker. However, our queen and rook are more active
than the opponent’s, so we have no difficulties in this position, which is totally equal. 21.Qd3 Re4
22.Rd1 Qe2=
B) 15.f3 is the most critical move. 15...Nc3! A great tactical resource. 16.Rxe7 Nxd1 17.Rxc7 Bd5
Our pieces are more active. 18.Kf1 [18.Bf1 Ne3 19.Bxe3 Rxe3=] 18...Ne3+ 19.Bxe3 Rxe3 20.Ra3 h6
21.Nh3 Ree8 The rook has already served its purpose, and it is time to return home. 22.Nf4 g5!
607
23.Ne2 [23.Nxd5 is not dangerous for us. 23...Nxd5 24.Rb7 Rac8=] 23...Rec8 24.Rac3 [24.Rxc8+ White
wins a pawn but their rook will be very passive. 24...Rxc8 25.Bxa6 Rc2 26.b3 Be6= To bring the knight
to d5, with a balanced endgame.] 24...Rcb8= We are ready to play ...b5, with a totally equal position.
13...Qf8
Removing the queen from the line of fire, in order to continue with ...d5.
14.f3 d5! 15.exd5 Ne5 16.Bf4
16.Bf1 Nxd5 17.Bg5 Ng6=
16...Nxd3 17.Qxd3 Rxe1+ 18.Rxe1 Nxd5
608
We have recovered the pawn and we can see that the position is completely balanced. The aim now is to
exchange rooks.
19.Bg3 Re8 20.Rxe8
20.Rd1 Qc5=
20...Qxe8 21.Nf5 g6 22.c4 gxf5 23.cxd5 f4
Exploiting the fact that they cannot capture due to the weakness of the first rank.
24.Bf2 Qxa4=
Position after: 24...Qxa4=
With a drawish endgame. We have an extra pawn but the weakness of our king, added to the fact that the
bishops are on opposite colors, leads us to conclude that White should not have any problems in this
position.
f) 9.h3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1 a6 8.a4 b6 9.h3
The second main move in this position. The idea is to wait for Black to place their bishop on b7 so as to
close the center with d5.
9...Bb7
609
10.d5
The main line.

A) 10.Bg5 h6 Forcing White to define the position of their bishop. 11.Bh4 is the most natural choice but
now we have a very strong answer. 11...Nxe4! is a great tactical resource. Now, several pieces will be
exchanged and a totally balanced endgame will be reached. 12.Bxe7 Nxc3 13.Bxd8 Nxd1 14.Bxc7
Rfc8! The key move for Black.
Position after: 14...Rfc8!
15.Raxd1 [15.Bxd6 Rxc4 16.Raxd1 Bxf3 17.gxf3 exd4= with a balanced position.] 15...Rxc7 16.Bb3
This was Atabayev, Y – Michiels, B chess.com 2020. 16...Bxf3N It is best to remove the knight. [In the
610
game, Black played 16...Kf8 first, and at that moment, White could have withdrawn the knight and have
a more comfortable position to play.] 17.gxf3 Kf8=
B) 10.Nd5 Now, this move does not seem to put the same pressure as 9.Nd5 seen previously as we can
take the knight. 10...Nxd5 11.Bxd5 [11.exd5 Re8 12.Ra3 Nf6= Exerting pressure on the d5-pawn.]
11...c6 12.Bb3 as in Martynyuk, E – Yudin, S Nizhny Tagil 2016. 12...Qc7N The ideal square for the
queen. The idea is to play ...c5-c4 to curtail the potential of the b3-bishop.
Position after: 12...Qc7N
13.c3 [13.Qe2 b5 14.c3 c5 15.d5 Nb6 16.a5 Nd7= Once the center is closed, an idea is to play ...c5 to
free the square for the knight. Then we can regroup our pieces on the kingside so that we can play ...g6
followed by ...f5.] 13...c5 14.d5 [14.dxe5 dxe5 15.Bd5 Bxd5 16.Qxd5 h6= Avoiding White’s Bg5. We
611
can continue with moving one rook to d8.] 14...b5 With the closed center, we can expand on the
queenside and later, on the kingside. 15.Bc2 Nb6 16.a5 Nc4 17.b4 Bc8 Once the queenside is closed, it
is time to create counterplay on the kingside. 18.Bd3 cxb4 19.cxb4 f5 20.Qc2 f4„
Position after: 20...f4„
Black’s position has much more potential. The aim is to create an attack on the kingside with ...g5 and
then transfer the queen to the f7-square.
C) 10.Ba2 b5 Destabilizing the c3-knight.
C1) 11.Bg5 is not problematic for us. 11...b4 12.Bxf6 Bxf6 13.Nd5 as tried in Petrik, T – Stocek, J
Czechia 2014. 13...exd4! Having control of the e5- and c5-squares. 14.Nxf6+ Qxf6 15.Qxd4 Qxd4
16.Nxd4 a5=
612
with equality. The plan can be either to play ...Nc5 followed by ...Rae8, or else ...Nb6 and ...d5.
C2) 11.axb5 axb5 12.b4 Now, we have a powerful move. 12...d5!
13.Bd2 [13.dxe5?? Bxb4 14.exf6 Bxc3 15.fxg7 following the game Abrahamyan, T – Milliet, S
Tromsoe 2014. 15...Re8!N is much better than 15...Kxg7 that was played in the aforementioned game.
16.Bg5 Qb8–+] 13...Bxb4 Provoking a lot of exchanges. 14.Bxd5 Bxc3 15.Rxa8 Bxa8 16.Bxa8 Bxd2
17.Qxd2 c5= with a fully balanced middlegame.
C3) 11.dxe5 dxe5 is the best way to take it – we now have control of the c5-square.
613
12.Bg5 [12.Qd3 b4 13.Nd5 Nxd5 14.Bxd5 Nc5 15.Qc4 c6! We should not be afraid of being captured
on f7. 16.Bxf7+ Rxf7 17.Nxe5 Qe8 18.Be3 Nd7 19.Nxf7 Qxf7= Although there is equality, the
position seems easier to play as Black, thanks to the bishop pair.] 12...Rb8 indirectly defending the b5-
pawn.
C3.1) 13.Qe2 b4 14.Bxf6 White is forced to surrender the bishop pair. 14...Nxf6 15.Nd5 Bd6
16.Rad1 a5 17.Bc4 g6 18.Qe3 Kg7= with a balanced position.
614
White has pressure along the open file but Black is well-placed with a good pawn structure and the
bishop pair.
C3.2) 13.axb5 axb5 14.Bxf6 Bxf6 15.Nxb5 [15.Nd5 Be7 16.Nxe7+ Qxe7=] 15...Bxe4 16.Rxe4 Rxb5
17.b4 c5! To exchange pawns and to leave White with a weak pawn. 18.c3 cxb4 19.cxb4 g6 20.Qe2
Rb6 21.Rd1 Qe7 with equality.
The plan is to play ...Rfb8 and press the b4-pawn.
10...a5
615
Preventing White from expanding on the queenside with b4. The aim is to create counterplay on the other
side.
11.Be3
11.b3 transposes to 9.b3 which we will discuss later.
11...Kh8
Clearing the g8-square for the knight, in order to counterattack with ...g6 and ...f5.
616
12.Nd2
12.Ra3 Ng8 13.Bb5 Nc5 14.Bxc5 bxc5 15.Rb3 g6
16.Bc6 [16.Qe2 f5 17.Qd3 Rb8 18.Bc4 Qc8„ To follow up by ...Nf6, with great counterplay.] 16...Bxc6
17.dxc6 Qe8 18.Rb7 Bd8 We are well-prepared to take the c6-pawn. 19.Nb5 Qxc6 20.Qd5 Qxd5 21.exd5
f5= with equal chances for both.
12...g6 13.Bb5
13.Bh6 Rg8 14.Nf3 Ne8„ To play ...f5.
13...Nh5
617
On this square the knight is very active.
14.Nc4
14.b4 axb4 15.Na2 Ng7 16.Nxb4 f5„
14...Nc5 15.Bxc5
15.Ra3 Na6 16.Bh6 Rg8 17.Bc6 Bxc6 18.dxc6 Nb4=
15...bxc5 16.Ra3 f5
We are ready to strike out on the kingside.
17.exf5 Nf4!
Activating all the pieces, which is a more important factor than the pawns.
18.fxg6 Rg8
In exchange for the pawn, we have powerful counterplay against the opponent’s king.
19.Ne3 Rxg6 20.Kh2 Bc8©
618
Position after: 20...Bc8©
With good compensation for the pawn since many of our pieces point to the enemy king. Now, the idea is
to transfer the queen to attack with ...Qf8 followed by ...Qh6.
g) 9.b3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1 a6 8.a4 b6 9.b3
The main move in this position and the one recommended by International Master Sam Collins in his book
“An Attacking Repertoire for White”. The idea is to develop the dark-squared bishop along a diagonal
other than c1-h6, which is a strong idea. However, this makes it difficult for the light-squared bishop, who
619
will no longer be able to retreat to a2. So, when it is expelled by our ...c6-b5, its power will be largely
diminished.
9...Bb7
Here, White has many alternatives.
10.Bb2
A) 10.Ba3 is not dangerous for us. 10...exd4
A1) 11.Qxd4 Csonka, A – Horvath, J Hungary 2009. 11...Re8N 12.Rad1 h6 13.Bb2 c6! Threatening
...b5. 14.e5 dxe5 15.Nxe5 Nxe5 16.Qxe5 Qb8= and Black has nothing to fear.
A2) 11.Nxd4 Re8 To press the e4-pawn very quickly. 12.Nf5 Bf8 13.f3 g6 14.Ne3 Bg7 15.Qd2 Nh5=
620
The position seems more straightforward to play as Black due to the weakness of the dark squares,
which we can exploit with ...Ne5 or ...Nf4, followed by ...Qh4.
B) 10.d5 As we have seen several times, once White decides to close the center, we have to focus on
creating counterplay on the kingside. 10...Kh8 Vacating the g8-square for the knight.
B1) 11.h3 as played in Pucher, S – Pelletier, Y Belfort 2012. 11...a5N 12.Be3 Nc5 13.Nd2 Ng8„
Followed by ...g6 and ...f5 with great counterplay.
B2) 11.Bf1 as was played in Alonso, S – Tokman, A Buenos Aires 2011. 11...a5!N
Position after: 11...a5!N
621
The best idea once again. 12.g3 [12.Nd2 Ng8 13.Nc4 Bg5! Taking the opportunity to exchange our
worse bishop. 14.Ba3 f5 15.exf5 Ne7= To take with the knight on f5, and later to place it on d4, with
equality.] 12...Nc5 13.Bg2 Ng8 14.Be3 [14.Nd2 Bg5 15.Ba3 Bc8„ To continue with ...f5.] 14...Bc8
15.Nd2 f5 16.exf5 Bxf5
Position after: 16...Bxf5
The plan is to transfer the queen to the kingside. 17.Nde4 [17.Bxc5 bxc5 18.Nde4 Bg5!= To put on h6
and then continue with ...Qd7.] 17...Nxe4 18.Nxe4 Qe8= Transferring to g6 with an equal position.
B3) 11.Bd3 This position was reached in Karjakin, S – Pelletier, Y Mainz 2010. 11...Nc5N
Position after: 11...Nc5N
B3.1) 12.b4 Nxd3 13.cxd3 Ng8 We are ready to play ...f5. 14.d4 f5! 15.dxe5 dxe5 16.exf5 [16.Nxe5
Bxb4ƒ] 16...Rxf5 17.Rxe5 Qf8ƒ and Black has the initiative due to their powerful bishop pair.
622
B3.2) 12.Ba3 a5 13.Bb5 Nfd7 14.Nd2 Bg5„ with the idea of playing ...g6 followed by ....f5, with
good counterplay on the kingside.
10...c6
With the idea of ...b5.
11.Bd3
The recommendation of Sam Collins in his aforementioned book. The idea is to defend the pawn in order
to move the knight from c3 to the kingside.
A) 11.Qd2 Re8! 12.Rad1 b5 13.Bd3 exd4 14.Nxd4 g6=
623
We have reached the same position that we obtained in 11.Bd3, but with the extra move ...b5 on the
board.
B) 11.d5 cxd5! 12.Nxd5 Nxd5 13.Bxd5 Bxd5 14.Qxd5 Qc7
We attack the pawn and have the plan of either occupying the c5-square with the knight or playing
...Nf6. 15.c4 [15.Ba3 Nf6 16.Qd3 b5!=] 15...Nc5 16.Re3 [16.b4 Ne6 17.g3 a5! is a key move to gain
control of c5. 18.b5 Rac8=] 16...Rab8 Preparing ...b5 and ...Qb7. 17.b4 [17.Ba3 Rfd8=] 17...Ne6 18.g3
Rfc8 19.Rc1 Qb7= with equality.
624
The idea is to double up rooks by ...Rc7-Rbc8, attacking the c4-pawn.
C) 11.Bf1 It is also possible to play in this way, by anticipating the expected attack on the bishop with
...b5. 11...Re8
12.g3 [12.Qd2 b5 13.axb5 axb5 14.Rxa8 Qxa8= as my opponent played against me in the game Albaina,
A – Trigo Urquijo, S Bergara 2016. The position is balanced.] 12...Bf8 13.Bg2 Qc7 14.Qd2 Rad8
15.Rad1 b5= as was played in the game Cabezas Ayala, I – Cifuentes Parada, R La Roda 2015.
Black has managed to stabilize their center and install their pieces on their optimal squares.
D) 11.Ne2!? An interesting idea: Black has to accept the challenge and take on e4. 11...Nxe4
625
D1) 12.dxe5 Nxe5 13.Nxe5 dxe5 14.Bxe5 as was played in Gurcan, S – Shaw, J Moscow 1994.
14...Qxd1N 15.Raxd1 Bb4 16.c3 Bc5= with equality. The aim is to fight for the open file with ...Rad8.
D2) 12.Bd3 Ng5 is best. 13.Ng3 g6 14.Nxg5 Bxg5 15.Ne4 Be7 Now, it is White who has to fight for
equality. 16.dxe5 Nxe5 17.Nxd6 Bxd6 18.Bxe5 Bxe5 19.Rxe5 Qf6 20.Qe2 a5= with a fully balanced
position.
We will continue with ...c5, activating our bishop.
11...g6!
A strong improvement over 11...Re8.
626
11...Re8 is the main move and the only one analyzed by Sam Collins. The idea is to have the f5-square
under control in order to take on d4.
12.Qd2
This position was reached in Miton, K – Khismatullin, D Moscow 2010.

A) 12.Ne2 The idea behind 11.Bd3. 12...exd4! is a good move to lure a white piece to d4 and thus be
able to play ...c5 gaining tempo. 13.Bxd4 c5 14.Bxf6 The only move. 14...Bxf6 15.Rb1 Ne5
The position is already more comfortable for us, thanks to Black’s control of the dark squares and the
bishop pair. 16.Nf4 Re8 17.Nd5 Bxd5 18.exd5 Qd7³ This is how it was played in the game Efimenko, Z
627
– Markowski, T Plovdiv 2008. Black has a more comfortable position and the plan is to expand on the
queenside with ...b5.
B) 12.Nb1 exd4
B1) 13.Nxd4 Re8 14.Nd2 Bf8 15.f4 Bg7 16.c3 b5µ with a clear advantage, as in Kosintseva, N –
Bocharov, D Moscow 2009.
B2) 13.Bxd4 Re8 14.Nbd2 Bf8 15.c4 Bg7 16.Qc2 as in Arakhamia Grant, K Berry, N England 2010.
16...c5N Tying the white pieces to the defense of the central pawn. 17.Bc3 Nh5 18.Rad1 Bxc3 19.Qxc3
Qf6=
We have great control of the dark squares. The aim is to install a knight on f4 and another on e5.
628
12...exd4N 13.Nxd4 Re8
14.Rad1
14.f4 Bf8 15.Nf3 Bg7 Improving the bishop. 16.Re2 [16.e5?! dxe5 17.fxe5 Ng4 White can’t hold the
central pawn. 18.e6 Rxe6 19.Rxe6 fxe6³] 16...b5 17.Rae1 Nc5 18.e5 dxe5 19.fxe5 Nfd7 20.Ne4 Nxe4
21.Bxe4 Nc5
We will eliminate White’s bishop pair so that our position will be easier to play. 22.Qf4 Nxe4 23.Qxe4
Qb6+=
629
14...Bf8 15.Nf3
15.Bf1 b5 16.f3 b4 17.Na2 Qb6 18.Kh1 Bg7= with the aim of ...d5.
15...b5
16.h3
A) 16.Bf1 Qb6 17.Qf4 Nh5=

B) 16.Ne2 Nxe4 17.Bxe4 Rxe4 18.Ng5 [18.Qc3? f6 19.Ng5 b4! is a key move to deflect the queen.
20.Qf3 Re8 21.Ne4 c5³ with insufficient compensation for White.] 18...Re7 19.Qc3 f6 20.Nf4 [20.Ng3
d5 21.Ne6 Qb8 22.Nxf8 Qxf8=] 20...Rxe1+ 21.Rxe1 Ne5
630
A great defensive piece. 22.Nfe6 Qe7 23.f4 b4! 24.Qxb4 fxg5 25.fxe5 d5 Forcing the exchange of
queens. 26.Qxe7 Bxe7=
16...Qc7
17.Ne2
A) 17.Bf1 b4 18.Nb1 d5! 19.Bd3 [19.exd5?! cxd5 20.Bd3 Rad8³ Our control of the e4-square makes our
position favorable.] 19...dxe4 20.Bxe4 Nxe4 21.Qxd7 Qxd7 22.Rxd7 Nc5 23.Rdd1 Rxe1+ 24.Rxe1
Ne6= with the idea of playing ...c5 and activating our bishop, resulting in an easier position to play for
Black.
631
B) 17.axb5 axb5 18.Ne2 Nxe4! 19.Bxe4 Rxe4 20.Ng5 Re7 21.Qc3 Ne5 22.f4 Bg7!
A key move. 23.fxe5 Bxe5 24.Nd4 c5 25.Rxe5 is the best try. 25...dxe5 26.Nxb5 Qc6 A very important
double attack. 27.Nf3 Qxb5 28.Nxe5 Qe2 29.Rd2 Qe1+ 30.Kh2 Qxe5+=
Position after: 30...Qxe5+=
After the exchange of pieces, we will reach a completely equal endgame.
17...Nxe4 18.Bxe4
18.Qf4 Nec5 19.Ng3 Nxd3 20.cxd3 c5= and the bishop pair ensures a balanced position for us.
632
18...Rxe4
Position after: 18...Rxe4
19.Ng5
The most dangerous option.

19.Ng3 Rxe1+ 20.Rxe1 c5 Bringing into play the b7-bishop. 21.Qf4 c4 Looking for ...c3. 22.Ng5 Ne5=
with a balanced position. White will eventually recover the pawn after taking the knight and Black will
gain the bishop pair in return.
19...Re7
633
20.Qc3
A) 20.Qd4?! f6 21.Nf4 Rxe1+ 22.Rxe1 c5! 23.Qe3 Ne5 24.Nge6 Qf7 25.Nxf8 Rxf8³ and White has
insufficient compensation for the pawn.
B) 20.Ng3 Rae8 21.Rxe7 Rxe7
Position after: 21...Rxe7
B1) 22.N5e4 d5! Forcing White to make a decision. 23.Qc3 Qe5 24.Qxe5 Nxe5 25.Nf6+ Kg7
Position after: 25...Kg7
After the exchange of queens, our king no longer has any worries. In fact, I suggest that White should
seek a repetition with 26.Nfh5+ Kg8=
634
B2) 22.N3e4 h6 23.Qc3 [23.Qxd6 Qxd6 24.Nxd6 hxg5 25.Nxb7 Reaching an equal endgame.
25...bxa4 26.bxa4 Nb6 27.Nc5 Re8=] 23...f6 After Nxf6+ We will gain an extra piece, so White will
have nothing better than to give perpetual check. 24.Nxf6+ Nxf6 25.Qxf6 hxg5 26.Qh8+ Kf7
27.Qf6+=
20...Ne5
21.Ne4
The best move.

21.f4?! Bg7! We have seen this defensive idea before. 22.fxe5 [22.Ba1? f6 23.Ne4 Ng4³] 22...Bxe5
23.Nd4 c5 24.Rxe5 dxe5 25.Ne2 c4!
635
An important move to open up the g1-a7 diagonal with the idea of giving check from b6. 26.axb5 cxb3
27.cxb3 Qb6+ 28.Kh2 Qf2³ and the white king is under attack.
21...Bg7!
The activity of our pieces is crucial, and more significant than our d6-pawn. Now, we threaten ...Nf3+.
22.Nxd6 Nf3+ 23.Qxf3 Bxb2 24.c3 Ba3
25.Nxb7
25.b4 c5! 26.Qf4 [26.Qg3?! Re6! 27.axb5 cxb4³] 26...cxb4 27.Nf5 [27.cxb4 Bb2=] 27...gxf5 28.Qg5+
Kh8=
25...Qxb7 26.Nd4 Rc8=
We have obtained a balanced position. The plan is to exchange rooks and then play with ...Qd7 and ...Bf8.
h) 9.Ba2
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.Re1 a6 8.a4 b6 9.Ba2
One of the main lines that is in fashion and the one that has generated more problems for me in recent
years. White’s idea is to hide the bishop and bring the f3-knight quickly into attack, using the standard
Nh4-f5 maneuver.
9...Bb7
636
10.Qd3
The move with the most independent lines, since 10.Qe2 c6 transposes to the 9.Qe2 line; 10.Bg5 h6
transposes to the 9.Bg5 line; and 10.h3 b5 transposes to the 9.h3 line, all of which have been analyzed
above within this chapter.
10.dxe5 is not dangerous for us. 10...dxe5 11.Nh4 Nxe4!
is critical. 12.Nf5 This was Chandra, A – Bortnyk, O lichess.org 2020. [12.Nxe4 Bxh4 13.Qg4 Nf6!
14.Qxh4 Bxe4= with a balanced position. We could place our bishop on g6 if necessary.] 12...Nd6!N
Exchanging the powerful f5-knight. 13.Nxe7+ Qxe7 14.Nd5 Qd8= with a balanced position, although it
is easier to play as Black, given our extra pawn.
637
10...c6
Here, White has many choices.
11.Nh4
This seems the most critical line and has a devastating statistic: 5 wins in 5 games for White. One of them
was Guseinov, G – Golod, V Tashkent 2012.
A) 11.Be3 b5 12.axb5 axb5 13.b4 Ng4= as seen in Mihalik, A – Brady, S Dublin 2019.
B) 11.dxe5 This was Borocz, I – Kiss, A Hungary 1997. 11...Nxe5!N 12.Nxe5 dxe5 13.Qg3 Qc7
14.Bh6 Nh5

638
We have everything under control. 15.Qg4 Qd6 16.Qxh5 Qxh6 17.Qxh6 gxh6 Although we have a bad
pawn structure, we have a pair of bishops in return and great control over the white knight. 18.Nd1 Rad8
19.Ne3 Bc5 20.Rad1 Kg7 21.Nf5+ Kg6= Black has no problems.
Now, a possible idea is to play ...Bc8 to eliminate the knight or to place it on e6.
C) 11.Bg5 as tried in Potkin, V – Vahidov, T Almaty 2016. 11...h6N 12.Bh4 b5 13.Bg3 [13.Rad1 Qa5=]
13...exd4 14.Qxd4 Re8
To play ...c5 and ...Bf8 putting considerable pressure on the e4-pawn; it is not problematic for us if
White captures on d6. 15.Bxd6 c5 16.Bxe7 cxd4 17.Bxd8 dxc3 18.Bxf6 Nxf6= with a fully equal
endgame.
639
11...c5!N
Position after: 11...c5!N
This move is vital.
12.d5
The best way to respond for White.

12.dxe5 Nxe5 13.Qd1 Nxe4! Utilizing our tactical resources. 14.Nxe4 Bxh4 15.Bd5 [15.Bf4 d5!=]
15...Bxd5 16.Qxd5 Ra7= with a balanced position.
640
The rook is very useful on the seventh rank – in the event that the knight captures the pawn, we can play
...Rd7.
12...g6!
Another important move.

12...Nxe4?! is a dubious move – White obtains a slight but very pleasant advantage. 13.Nxe4 Bxh4
14.Nxd6 Bxf2+ is the best try. 15.Kxf2 Qf6+ 16.Nf5 g6 17.Kg1! Black is forced to spoil their pawn
structure and their position will be inferior due to having the weaker king and White having the bishop
pair. [17.g4!?]
Position after: 17.Kg1!
17...Qxf5 [17...gxf5 18.Qh3! Bc8 19.Bh6 Re8 20.d6² with the initiative.] 18.Qxf5 gxf5 19.c4² Black has
an extra pawn but the pieces are very restricted, so it hardly matters.
Back to 12...g6.
641
13.g3
A) 13.Nf3 One option is to return the knight, considering that on h4 it is no longer useful. Now, the
threat is Bh6. 13...Kh8! To play ...Rg8. 14.Bh6 Rg8 15.Ng5 Qe8 16.Qe2 Bf8 17.Bxf8 Qxf8= with a
balanced position.
Position after: 17...Qxf8=
White does not have much potential to attack and with the center closed, it is Black who can generate
counterplay on the kingside with ...Nh5 and ...f5, after expelling the knight on g5 with ...h6.
B) 13.Bh6 The most critical move but this meets a fantastic response. 13...Ng4! A wonderful exchange
sacrifice. 14.Bxf8 Bxh4 15.g3 Kxf8 16.gxh4 Ngf6
642
Position after: 16...Ngf6
Instead of the exchange, we have managed to destroy White’s kingside pawn structure, making their king
very weak, and we have eliminated the dark-squared bishop. This means that the f4-square becomes very
accessible. Also, the fact that White has two rooks is not so significant because there are no open files as
the position is closed, and the minor pieces seem more useful here. 17.Qe3 Nh5 18.Qh6+ Kg8 19.Qg5
Ndf6
Position after: 19...Ndf6
Our idea is to attack, so we don’t want to exchange queens. We can expel the queen on g5 with ...Kg7,
followed by ...h6. 20.Bc4 Nf4 21.Bf1 Kg7© with the idea of ...h6 followed by ...N6h5, with good
compensation for the exchange.
13...Nh5
643
To transfer to g7 and support ...f5.
14.Ng2
14.Nf3 Ng7 15.Bc4 Bc8 Directing the bishop to the kingside, as it is no longer useful on b7. 16.Qd2 Nf6
17.Bf1 Ra7„
Position after: 17...Ra7„
A standard rook maneuver that will be very useful once we have performed ...f5. The plan is clear: play
...Nfh5 and ...f5, with great counterplay.
14...Ng7
644
Position after: 14...Ng7
15.Bc4
15.Ne3?! f5 16.exf5 Nxf5 17.Nxf5 gxf5 We have already achieved our goal, and now we have to move
our pieces to the kingside. A typical maneuver is ...Qe8-g6. 18.f4 Kh8³
Position after: 18...Kh8³
The position is easier for us to play as Black.
15...Bc8 16.Bh6 Bg5!
As we have reiterated several times, it favors us to exchange the dark-squared bishop.
17.Bxg5 Qxg5 18.Qe2 Ra7 19.Rad1 Qd8„

645
Position after: 19...Qd8„
In my opinion, the position is more comfortable to play as Black, who is going to obtain great counterplay
on the kingside. The idea is to transfer the knight from d7 to h5 and, once all the pieces are in the correct
places, we can play ...f5.
7.Re1 is White’s main line against the Philidor Defense and the one I’ve had to face for my whole chess
career. I’ve used different methods to respond throughout my career, but I finally settled on the one I like
best, which is to play ...a6 followed by ...b6, creating space on b7 for our light-squared bishop, and
allowing it to swiftly attack the e4-pawn.
Against this plan, White has different choices. However, many of these lines have a common theme,
which is to close the center with d5. Generally, every time this happens, our strategy will be to prevent
White’s expansion on the queenside with ...a5. Once this move is completed, our plan is to create
counterplay on the kingside with the standard maneuver ...Kh8, ...Ng8, ...g6 and ...f5.
As a distinct line, 9.b3 is important to remember because within the main line, after 11.Bd3, ...g6! is a
strong move which threatens to take on d4 followed by ...c5.
Finally, in the 9.Ba2 line, which has become fashionable, after 10.Qd3 and 11.Nh4, it is crucial to
remember the strong move 11...c5, a novelty which forces White to define the center.
646
Chapter 15
7.a4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.a4
Chapter Guide
Chapter 15 – 7.a4
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.a4 exd4
a) 8.Qxd4 with Various 12th Moves
b) 8.Qxd4 with 12.Re1
c) 8.Nxd4 with Various 10th Moves
d) 8.Nxd4 with 10.h3
a) 8.Qxd4 with Various 12th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.a4
647
This is a move that in recent years has become fashionable and is played at least as much as 7.Re1. Its rise
in popularity is due to the recommendation of Grandmaster Parimarjan Negi in his book “1.e4 vs The
French, Caro-Kann & Philidor”. The idea is to hold back the rook move for the moment and gain space
quickly on the queenside.
7...exd4
The fourth most played move so far, compared to the main one, which is 7...c6. However, I think it is a
good move that, surprisingly, is not discussed in the aforementioned book. The idea is to take control of
the e5- and c5-squares. Compared to other moves, Black already defines the center pawn structure before
making decisions on the queenside.
7...a6 is a move that is played often but is met with an unpleasant response. 8.a5!
648
Position after: 8.a5!
Here, we can perfectly observe the advantage of having held back Re1 for White. Now they have managed
to fix the pawn structure on the queenside and Black is going to have to weaken theirs. 8...b5 9.axb6 cxb6
10.Qe2± and White has a clear advantage due to the space advantage and, above all, Black’s poor pawn
structure.
8.Qxd4
Position after: 8.Qxd4
8.Nxd4 is the main line that we will discuss in the next subchapter.
8...Nc5
Threatening ...Bg4. The best White can do is prevent this with h3.
9.h3
9.Re1 Bg4 10.Qe3 as tried in Radulski, J – Rehn, R Helsingor 2011. 10...Re8N 11.Qf4 Be6 12.Bf1 d5!
649
In this way, we have managed to gain control of the e4-square. 13.e5 Nfe4= and we have a good position.
9...Nfd7
Position after: 9...Nfd7
We have two ideas: on the one hand, we clear the f6-square to activate the bishop and on the other, we aim
to transfer the knight to the queenside to attack the bishop and the a4-pawn.
10.Nd5
The most annoying move, to win the bishop pair. Otherwise, Black will play ...Bf6 and there is no
problem for us. In fact, that is how they played in the correspondence game Cvak, R – Cuccumini, V
650
ICCF email 2015.
A) 10.a5 Bf6 11.Qe3
11...Bxc3! Usually it is not a good idea to play in this way, but this serves to quickly attack the central
pawn and, additionally, spoil White’s pawn structure. 12.bxc3 Re8 and it’s not easy for White to defend
the pawn. 13.Ng5 is perhaps the best way to play. 13...Ne5 To play ...h6. 14.Bd5 h6 15.f4 There are no
more choices. 15...hxg5 16.fxe5 Be6 17.Qf3 Qe7= Black has nothing to fear; we have the better pawn
structure and a good knight on c5.
B) 10.Re1 White is ready to play e5. 10...Bf6 11.e5 Ne6! is a key move. 12.Bxe6 Nxe5 13.Bxf7+ Nxf7
14.Qc4 c6
651
Once the exchange of pieces has taken place, we see that Black has obtained the bishop pair. 15.Ne4 Bf5
16.Nxf6+ Qxf6 Our threat is to take on h3. 17.Qb3 d5 Removing activity from the white queen and
taking control of the e4-square, so as to enable us to place the bishop in readiness for attack. 18.Be3 Be4
19.Nd2 Bxg2! This is not truly a piece sacrifice because after ...d4 the white bishop is caught.
Position after: 19...Bxg2!
B1) 20.Bc5 Rfe8 21.Kxg2 b6= and it turns out that Black is going to recoup the piece back because the
knight on d2 is in the air – we can take it with a double attack from g5. If the bishop defends it from b4,
we can play ...c5.
B2) 20.Kxg2 d4 21.Bxd4 Qxd4 22.Rad1 [22.Ne4 Qb6=] 22...Qf4 23.Nf3 Kh8= with a balanced
position.
652
White has more active pieces but we have a better pawn structure and the opponent’s king is very
vulnerable.
10...Nb6N
Position after: 10...Nb6N
11.Nxe7+
A) 11.a5 is not a problem for us. 11...Nxd5
A1) 12.exd5 Bf6 13.Qd1 Bd7 with the idea of ...b5. 14.Re1 Re8 15.Ra3 This maneuver that we have
previously seen is the simplest way for White to bring their rook into play. 15...Rxe1+ 16.Qxe1 b5
653
17.Bf1 b4!
A strong move. If White decides to take the pawn, we have the option to play ...Rb8. 18.Re3 and White
threatens Qxb4. 18...Rb8 We are ready to play ...c6 activating our light-squared bishop. 19.Bd2 Bxb2
20.Bxb4 Bf6= with equality. The disappearance of the b-file pawns favors the black rook which is now
very active.
A2) 12.Bxd5 c6 13.Ba2 Be6 14.b4
The most critical option but here, we have a very strong riposte. 14...Bf6! 15.e5 dxe5 16.Qxc5 e4
17.Ng5 is best. 17...Bxa1 18.Bxe6 fxe6 19.Nxe6 Qd5 Forcing the exchange of queens and we reach a
fully balanced endgame. 20.Qxd5 cxd5 21.Nxf8 Rxf8 22.Rd1 Rd8
654
Position after: 22...Rd8
Now the plan is, as in all endgames, the activation of our most important piece, the king. 23.Be3 Bc3
24.Bd4 Bxd4 25.Rxd4 Kf7= and a draw is the most natural result.
B) 11.b4 is an interesting move to gain space on the queenside. 11...Ne6 12.Nxe7+ Qxe7 13.Bxe6 Bxe6
The advance of the white pawns has left weak squares such as c4. 14.Bf4 a5! To gain control of the c5-
square. 15.b5 Nd7
B1) 16.Qc3 Qf6 17.Qxf6 Nxf6 18.Rfe1 Nd7= with equality. The idea is to stop the advance of the e4-
pawn with ...f6 and then play ...b6. The intention is to place the pawns on dark squares so that the white
bishop does not have so much activity.
B2) 16.e5 dxe5 17.Nxe5 Nxe5 18.Qxe5 [18.Bxe5 f6 19.Bg3 c6=] 18...c6
655
The fact that there are opposite-colored bishops gives the appearance of equality. 19.bxc6 bxc6 20.Rfe1
Rfe8 21.Re3 [21.Qc3 Qh4=] 21...f6 22.Qc3 Qd7 23.Rg3 Kh8 24.Bh6 Rg8= White cannot increase the
pressure on our king so we have nothing to worry about. Now, a possible idea is to play ...Bd5 and
...Qf7.
11...Qxe7
White has taken out our bishop pair but we have achieved quick piece development. Additionally, we are
attacking three pieces, the pawns on e4 and a4 and the bishop on c4.
12.Bd5
656
12.Bd3 Ncxa4!
Position after: 12...Ncxa4!
The best choice. 13.b4 leaving the knight out of play. [13.e5 is not a problem for Black. 13...dxe5 14.Qe4
f5 15.Qxe5 Qxe5 16.Nxe5 Nc5= with equality.
White has compensation for the pawn thanks to their bishop pair and because we have the weaker king,
although nothing else.] 13...f6 14.c3 with the aim of playing Bc2, exerting pressure on the locked knight.
This means that we have to react quickly. 14...c5! 15.Qe3 Bd7 16.Re1 a6= with a balanced position.
657
We have an extra pawn in exchange for having the knight on a4 out of play, at present. Now, the plan is to
play ...Rac8 and ...Bb5.
12...Nxd5 13.exd5
Threatening b4.
13...a5
We secure the knight on c5 and now the idea is to play ...Qe4.
658
14.Re1 Qd7
The queen is misplaced on d7 so the plan is to play ...f6 and ...Qf7.
15.Ra3
15.Qh4 f6 16.Nd4 Qf7 17.Nb5 Bf5= We have managed to activate our pieces, and the next move is
...Rae8.
15...f6!
In order to play ...Re8 and ...Qf7. Here, White has several options.
16.Qd1
A) 16.Rae3 White gains control of the file but it is in exchange for a pawn. 16...Qxa4! 17.Re7 Qxd4
18.Nxd4 Bd7=
659
I think the position is easier to play for Black who is about to place a rook on e8 or f7. Meanwhile, we
keep an extra pawn.
B) 16.Qd2 Re8 17.Rae3 Rxe3 18.Rxe3 b6
We have managed to exchange a rook which benefits us, and now, we must seek to exchange the other.
To do this, we must play with ...Qf7 and ...Bd7. 19.Nd4 Qf7 20.Qe2 Bd7 We are ready to play ...Re8.
21.Ne6 Bxe6 22.dxe6 Qe7 The e6-pawn is weak. In fact, if we manage to place the rook on e8, we can
capture it. 23.c3 Threatening b4. 23...d5!
660
An important move, avoiding White’s idea. 24.f4 To play f5 defending the pawn. However, it has a flaw
for White in that it allows us to place a knight on e4. [24.b4 axb4 25.cxb4 d4! is the idea behind 23...d5.
26.Qf3 Rd8= Now, the d4-pawn is going to be very dangerous.] 24...g6 25.f5 gxf5 26.Qh5 Ne4! Taking
the e6-pawn. 27.Qxf5 Re8 28.Qxd5 Qxe6
We have obtained a strong knight on e4 and we have nothing to fear. 29.Qh5 Qe5 30.Qg4+ Kf7= The
strong knight compensates for the unstable situation of our king. Now, the plan is ...h5 and ...Kg6.
16...Re8
661
Exchanging one rook is favorable for us. We can continue with ...Qf7 and ...Bd7 or ...Bf5, whichever suits
us.
17.Nd4
A) 17.Be3 White intends to exchange the bishop for the knight and try to reach an endgame where the
knight is superior to our bishop, but that will not happen. 17...b6 18.Bxc5 Rxe1+ 19.Qxe1 dxc5
Position after: 19...dxc5
We can see that our bishop is going to have options to come into play and it is no worse than the white
knight. 20.Re3 Kf8! 21.c4 Ba6 22.b3 Re8= with a totally equal endgame.
B) 17.Rae3 Rxe3 18.Rxe3 Qf7 19.b3 Bd7 20.Ba3 Re8 21.Rxe8+ Bxe8=
662
17...Rxe1+ 18.Qxe1 Qf7
19.Nb5
A) 19.Rg3 Threatening Bh6. 19...Kf8! is a very safe square for the king. 20.Nb5 Bf5 21.Be3 Ne4 22.Rf3
Bg6= We have no concerns in this position as we have managed to place our minor pieces on good
squares. A possible continuation is ...b6, to move the rook to the middle of the board.
B) 19.Re3 Bd7 To play ...Re8. 20.Ne6 Bxe6 21.dxe6 Qg6= with equality, although the e6-pawn can
become a very targetable weakness.
19...Bf5
663
20.Be3
20.c4 b6 21.Be3 [21.Re3 Kf8=] 21...Na6= and after playing ...Re8, all our pieces are well-placed.
20...Bxc2 21.Bxc5 dxc5 22.Re3
22.Qc3 Be4 23.Qxc5 c6 24.dxc6 Bxc6=
22...Bg6
And White will not be able to stop ...Re8.
23.Re7 Re8! 24.Rxe8+ Qxe8 25.Qxa5 b6=
With a drawish endgame.
b) 8.Qxd4 with 12.Re1
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.a4 exd4 8.Qxd4 Nc5 9.h3 Nfd7 10.Nd5
Nb6N 11.Nxe7+ Qxe7 12.Re1
Maintaining the tension but now, we can eliminate the bishop pair.
12...Nxc4 13.Qxc4 Qe6
664
It is favorable for us to exchange queens.
14.Qc3
The best choice.

A) 14.Qxe6 Nxe6 15.b4 a5 16.b5 b6 17.Bb2 f6= with the aim of ...Bb7 and to bring the rooks to the
center.
B) 14.Qd4 Bd7 15.a5 [15.e5 Qg6! Bringing all the pieces into the attack. 16.b4 Nxa4 Capturing on h3
would have been a mistake due to Nh4. 17.Bf4 Rfe8 18.exd6 cxd6= with an equal position.] 15...Rfe8
665
Position after: 15...Rfe8
Exerting considerable pressure on the central pawn, pressure that can be intensified with ...Bc6. 16.e5
[16.b4 Nxe4! 17.Bb2 Qf6 The key move. 18.Rxe4 Rxe4 19.Qxe4 Qxb2 After the exchange of pieces,
we have achieved a position which is easier to play as Black. 20.Re1 Bc6=] 16...Qg6 Attacking the h3-
and c2-pawns and vacating the e6-square for the knight. 17.b4 Ne6 18.Qd1 Nf8 It is more important that
the bishop comes into play. 19.exd6 is the most critical move. [19.Ra3 Rad8=] 19...Bxh3 20.Ng5 Bxg2!
21.Kxg2 h6 22.Rxe8 Rxe8 23.dxc7 hxg5=
Position after: 23...hxg5=
This seems an easier position to play as Black due to the weakness of the white king.
14...Bd7
666
A crucial move to attack the a4-pawn and to make it possible to take on e4 because afterwards, we can
defend the knight with a rook from e8.
15.Be3
Is perhaps the best option for White.

A) 15.b4 Nxe4 16.Qxc7 Bc6 The white queen has space issues. 17.Nd4 Qf6 18.Be3 Rfc8 19.Qa5 d5=
with a good position for Black.
B) 15.a5 Nxe4 The right moment. 16.Qxc7 Bc6 We have everything under control. 17.a6 Rac8 18.Qa5
b6 19.Qb4 Qf5 20.Re2 Ba8„
667
Position after: 20...Ba8„
We have a worse pawn structure but we have good piece activity and our bishop gives excellent
counterplay. In fact, the position seems to me more pleasant to play as Black.
C) 15.e5 Qg6
16.Bf4 [16.exd6 cxd6 We have a poor pawn structure but we are going to put substantial pressure on the
c-file. 17.b3 Rfe8 18.Bb2 Rac8=] 16...Ne6 17.Bg3 Bc6
668
Our bishop is very powerful, so we don’t have to worry about sacrificing the d6-pawn.
C1) 18.exd6 cxd6 19.Bxd6 Ng5! An important move to take out the white king’s best defender.
20.Nxg5 Qxg5 21.Qg3 Qxg3 22.Bxg3 Rfe8 and because there are opposite-colored bishops, it is not
significant that we are a pawn down – the endgame is equal.
C2) 18.Nh4 Qg5 19.exd6 cxd6
20.b4 Intending b5. [20.Kh2 Rfe8 Our idea is to play ...f5. 21.Rad1 Rad8 22.b3 h6 23.Nf3 Qc5 24.Qd3
Qh5= We don’t have any difficulties in this position. A possible idea would be to move the knight to
e4.] 20...a6 Avoiding b5. 21.Qb2 Rfe8 We need to defend the knight in order to play ...f5. 22.c4 f5
23.b5 Be4ƒ
669
Position after: 23...Be4ƒ
It is clear that our pieces are much more active. Now, the plan is to place the knight on c5 and then
continue with ...f4.
15...b6
To take with the b-pawn if White decides to exchange the bishop.
16.e5
The most aggressive way to play.

16.a5 Qg6
670
Once we have our minor pieces well-established, it is time to create counterplay on the kingside.
A) 17.Bxc5 bxc5 18.Re3 [18.e5 Bc6 19.exd6 cxd6= with great activity for our bishop.] 18...Rfe8
19.Rae1 Rab8 20.e5 Re6 21.exd6 cxd6 22.Rd3 Bc6= We have very active pieces, so the position is
balanced.
B) 17.Kh2 Rac8
B1) 18.e5 is aggressive but it also allows our bishop to activate. 18...Rfe8 19.Rad1 Bc6 20.exd6 cxd6
21.axb6 axb6 We have two weak pawns but in return, White has problems because we have a powerful
bishop. 22.Bf4 Bxf3 23.Qxf3 Qxc2 24.Rxe8+ Rxe8 25.Qc6 Qa4 26.Qxd6 Ne4= with a good position
for Black.
671
B2) 18.Bxc5 is possibly the best option for White, trying to obtain an advantage. 18...bxc5 19.b4
Seeking to quickly reach Black’s weaknesses on the queenside. 19...Rfe8! 20.bxc5 Rxe4 21.c6 Be6
22.Qb2 White aims to go to b7. 22...Rf4!
Position after: 22...Rf4!
Another very important move that helps us to put pressure on the opponent’s king, threatening ...Bxh3.
B2.1) 23.Qb7 Attacking the pawns but neglecting their king. 23...Rf8 24.Ra3 is pure necessity.
24...Qxc2 25.Qxc7 Qc5 Attacking f2 and defending our pawns. 26.Rae3 [26.Rd3 Bd5=] 26...h6=
672
The position is equal. Our aim is to continue with ...Bd5.

B2.2) 23.Ra3 Rf8 Prophylaxis against Qb7. 24.a6 Bd5 and we have great counterplay. 25.Qb7 Qxc2
26.Qxa7 Qxc6 27.Re7 Ra4!
Position after: 27...Ra4!
Removing a key support from the pawn on its way to promotion. 28.Rxc7 [28.Rxa4 Qxa4 29.Rxc7
h6=] 28...Rxa3! is the best, capturing the two rooks in exchange for a queen and obtaining great
control over the a6-pawn. 29.Rxc6 Bxc6 30.Nd4 Ra8 31.Qc7 Be8 32.Nf5 The best try. 32...R3xa6
33.Ne7+ Kf8 34.Nc8 Rxc8 35.Qxc8 Rc6= with a totally equal endgame.
673
16...Qg6 17.exd6 cxd6
Now, we exploit the fact that c-file has been opened to create counterplay.
18.a5
18.Bxc5 bxc5 19.Rad1 Rae8 20.Ne5 Rxe5! 21.Rxe5 Bxh3 22.Qxh3 dxe5=
18...Rac8
674
The best. Taking on h3 would be a serious mistake because after Nh4, we lose material.
19.axb6
19.Nh4 Qh5 20.Qd4 h6! 21.axb6 axb6 22.Ra7 Rfe8 Activating our pieces and controlling the e4-square.
23.Bd2 Threatening b4. 23...d5 24.f3 Controlling the e4-square. 24...Bb5 25.Rxe8+ Rxe8 26.Qg4 Qxg4
27.hxg4 d4 28.b4 Na6=
Position after: 28...Na6=
With a balanced position. Our rook has decent access into the enemy’s territory from e2.
19...axb6
675
Position after: 19...axb6
20.Nh4
20.Kh2 Ba4! 21.Rac1 Bc6=
20...Qh5
The knight is poorly placed on h4.
21.Qd4 Rfe8!
Position after: 21...Rfe8!
It is more important to activate our pieces than to preserve our d6-pawn.
676
22.Qxd6
22.Bd2 Ne6 23.Qxd6 [23.Qb4 Bb5! Threatening ...Rc4. 24.Nf3 Bc6=] 23...Qxh4 24.Qxd7 Red8
Position after: 24...Red8
We are a pawn down but our pieces are much more active than the opponent’s. In fact, it is White who has
to force the exchange of pieces to reach an equal endgame. 25.Qb7 Rc7 26.Qe4 Qxe4 27.Rxe4 Rxd2
28.Ra8+ Nf8 29.Ree8 g6= with a drawish endgame.
22...Bxh3 23.Nf3 Re6
Transferring the rook to the kingside.
677
24.Qh2!
The best defense.
24...Rg6 25.Ng5 Bg4 26.Qxh5 Bxh5 27.Nh3 Bg4 28.Nf4 Rd6 29.c4 h6
30.f3
30.Nd5 Kh7 31.f3 Be6=
30...Be6 31.b4
31.Nxe6 Rxe6=
31...Nd3=
With equal chances for both in this position.

The c4-pawn is going to be captured.
c) 8.Nxd4 with Various 10th Moves
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.a4 exd4 8.Nxd4
678
Position after: 8.Nxd4
We have reached the main line. Unlike the 8.Qxd4 line, Black’s idea here is to use the e5-square as a
springboard to attack the light-squared bishop with the knight and to eliminate the opponent’s pair of
bishops.
8...Ne5
We are going to analyze the two retreats that the bishop has on the a2-g8 diagonal, the only active
diagonal it has. Otherwise, we could calmly play ...Re8 and ...Bf8 to attack the center.
9.Ba2
The main move.

9.Bb3 is not the best square because we can expand on the queenside and try to place a pawn on c4
blocking this bishop. 9...c5!
679
10.Nde2 The only viable retreat of the knight, as played in Baklan, V – Morozov, N Sovata 2018.
[10.Nf5?! Bxf5 11.exf5 c4 12.Ba2 d5= with a great position for us.] 10...a6 It would be ideal to place the
pawn on c4 but later, that pawn will need a lot of support because the e5-knight can be expelled. That is
precisely why 10... a6 is a good move, with the idea of following up with ...b5 and ...c4.
A) 11.Ba2 avoids ...b5 due to the tactical resource Bxf7. However, the fact that it has moved first to b3
and then to a2 suggests that this cannot cause us much difficulty. 11...Rb8 12.Nf4 b5 We are ready to
play ...c4. 13.axb5 axb5 14.Nfd5 Threatening Nxe7+ followed by Bg5. 14...h6 15.Nxe7+ Qxe7 16.Nd5
Qd8=
680
and we have no concerns as Black. The plan is to play ...Bb7 and ...Re8, activating our pieces.
B) 11.f4 Nc6 White has dislodged our knight from e5 but in exchange, our light-squared bishop can
come into action more freely.
B1) 12.h3 Be6 Neutralizing the force of the bishop on b3. 13.Bxe6 fxe6 14.f5 exf5 15.exf5 Qd7= with
a balanced position. White has control of the d5-square and we have control of e5. The plan is to play
...d5 and place the a8-rook in the center.
B2) 12.Ng3 Bg4 The idea is to place it on e6 but first, we should displace the white queen. 13.Qd2 Be6
681
In these situations, it is always convenient for us to trade on e6, and to bring our pawn closer to the
center so as to have control of the d5-square.
B2.1) 14.Nd5 Nd4 We also have strong squares which we must utilize. 15.Nxf6+ Bxf6 16.Bxe6 fxe6
We have managed to make our pieces active and at the moment, White cannot dislodge our strong
knight. 17.Qd1 to play c3. 17...Qb6= Intending ...d5 with a good position for us.
B2.2) 14.Bd5 Nb4 A strong square for the knight, taking advantage of the weakness generated by the
move a4. This involves the sacrifice of a pawn but in return, we will activate our pieces which is more
important. 15.Bxb7 Rb8 In exchange for the pawn, we have activated the knight and the rook: what
more can we ask for? 16.Bd5 h5!
682
Gaining space on the kingside and helping us to misplace the g3-knight. 17.Re1 [17.f5 Bxd5 18.exd5
Re8„ with good counterplay.] 17...h4 18.Nf1 Nfxd5 19.exd5 Bf5 In exchange for the pawn, we have
the bishop pair, better piece coordination and a better pawn structure. 20.Ne3 Bh7©
9...Nc6
The aim is to go to b4, exploiting the fact that 7.a4 has left that square weak, and then continue with ...c5.
10.Re1
A) 10.Nxc6 is not a problem for us since it brings our pawn to the center, with which we will control the
d5-square; at the same time, we also open up the b-file to give activity to our rook. 10...bxc6 11.Re1
Threatening e5. 11...Nd7
683
12.f4 [12.Be3 a5 13.Qd2 Re8= to continue with ...Bf6, ...Nb6 or ...Ne5 and ...Be6.] 12...Bh4 to provoke
g3 thus weakening the white king further. 13.g3 Bf6 14.Qf3 Rb8= as was played in Schippers, M –
Kuipers, S Groningen 2016.
Position after: 14...Rb8=
Black has achieved good activity for their pieces, reaching a balanced position.
B) 10.Bf4 Nb4 11.Bb3 as in Cobic, V – Zivkovic, L Belgrade 2014. 11...a6!N
Position after: 11...a6!N
An important improvement. As in the previous line, the idea is to play ...c5 but first, we must ensure that
the white knight cannot jump to b5, attacking our d6-pawn. 12.Qe2 [12.Re1 c5 13.Nf3 Be6 is a standard
684
maneuver. 14.Bxe6 fxe6 15.Ng5 e5! 16.Bg3 Qd7= The position seems easier to play as Black.] 12...Bg4
Provoking f3 and removing that square from the knight. 13.f3 c5!
The position will become very concrete and double-edged. 14.fxg4 cxd4 15.Na2 Nc6 16.g5 Nd7 We
have a great square on e5 for our knight. 17.Qd2 [17.h4 Kh8!„ followed by ...f6.] 17...Nde5 18.Nb4
[18.Nc1 Kh8„] 18...Nxb4 19.Qxb4 d3 20.Rad1 dxc2 21.Bxc2 b5 22.axb5 Rb8!„
Position after: 22...Rb8!„
Bringing all the pieces into play. Our plan is to follow up with ...Rxb5.
10...Nb4
685
11.Bb3
11.Bc4 Bg4!
A) 12.f3 c5 13.Ndb5 The most active square but most likely, we can expel it by ...a6 and the knight will
have problems. 13...Be6 14.Na3 d5! A good move to free ourselves.
15.Nxd5 Nfxd5 16.exd5 Nxd5 17.f4 Threatening f5. 17...Bf6!= with a pleasant position for Black. Now,
f5 is not a worry due to ...Bd4+.
B) 12.Be2 c5 13.Ndb5 Bxe2 14.Qxe2 [14.Rxe2 is not dangerous for us. 14...a6 15.Na3 Re8 and we are
ready to play ...d5. 16.Nc4 d5! 17.exd5 Nbxd5 18.Nxd5 Qxd5 19.Qxd5 Nxd5= with a fully balanced
686
position where it is Black who has more development.] 14...Re8 15.Bf4 a6 16.Na3 Bf8
Now, ...d5 is unstoppable. 17.Qd2 d5! 18.exd5 Rxe1+ 19.Rxe1 Nfxd5= with a totally equal position.
11...c5
To continue with ...Be6.
12.Nde2
12.Nf3 Be6
687
A) 13.Bxe6 fxe6 14.e5
The critical move but we are well-prepared. In exchange for weakening our pawn structure, we will
acquire strong squares for our knights. 14...dxe5 15.Qe2 Nc6 Transferring to the d4-square. 16.Nxe5
Nd4 17.Qd1 Bd6 Our pieces are more active and we can create counterplay against the white king.
18.Nc4 Bb8 A good square for the bishop. We can continue with ...Qc7. 19.Bg5 Qc7 20.Ne5 Intending
Nb5. 20...a6 21.Bh4 Nf5ƒ
Position after: 21...Nf5ƒ
The position seems more comfortable to play as Black, who has a strong initiative. Once White has
placed a knight on e5, it is time to activate our bishop with ...c4 and ...Ba7.
B) 13.Nd5 seems the best. 13...Nfxd5 14.exd5 Bf5 Devising ...Rc8 and ...c4.
688
Furthermore, the d5-pawn curtails any activity from its own bishop. 15.Nd2 Bh4! attacking f2 but, above
all, enabling our queen to transfer to the kingside. 16.g3 Qf6!!
Position after: 16...Qf6!!
Adding the queen to the attack, including a brilliant piece sacrifice. 17.gxh4 [17.Nc4 Qg6 18.Ne3 Be4ƒ
with a strong initiative.] 17...Rae8 Adding one more piece. The key point is that the white pieces are so
far away from their king. 18.Rf1 [18.Rxe8 Qg6+ 19.Kh1 Rxe8© with excellent compensation. It is
difficult for White to mobilize their pieces.] 18...Bh3 19.Kh1 Bxf1 20.Qxf1 Qf5ƒ
689
Position after: 20...Qf5ƒ
Black has a great initiative and a much more comfortable position to play.
12...Be6
13.Nf4
13.Bxe6 fxe6 14.Nf4 Qd7 15.Nd3 Rad8= with a balanced position, as played in the game Bilguun, S –
Cornette, M Caleta 2019.
13...Bxb3 14.cxb3 Qd7!N
690
Deviating from the game Van Delft, M – Kunin, V Schwaebisch Gmuend 2019, which went 14...Re8.
Black wants to continue with ...Rad8 and ...d5.
15.Be3 Rad8 16.Qd2 d5!
The right moment.
17.Nfxd5
17.exd5?! Winning a pawn but we gain great counterplay. 17...Qf5 18.Rad1 b6 19.f3 h5³ It turns out that
Black’s position is favorable.
Position after: 19...h5³
691
It is not noticeable that we have one pawn less and, in fact, if White wants to hold on to it, their pieces will
have to be kept very tied up.
17...Nxe4 18.Nxe7+ Qxe7=
Position after: 18...Qxe7=
With equal chances for both.
d) 8.Nxd4 with 10.h3
1.e4 d6 2.d4 Nf6 3.Nc3 e5 4.Nf3 Nbd7 5.Bc4 Be7 6.0-0 0-0 7.a4 exd4 8.Nxd4 Ne5 9.Ba2 Nc6 10.h3
The main move and probably the best.
10...Nb4!
692
As in the other lines that we have seen before, Black’s idea is to play ...c5 and ...Be6.
11.Bb3
The main move.

11.Bc4 c5 12.Ndb5 [12.Nde2 Be6 13.Bxe6 fxe6 14.Nf4 Qd7= This was Boelhouwer, C – Kuipers, S
Vlissingen 2017. We have good control of the central squares and our pieces are more harmoniously
placed.] 12...Be6 13.Na3 Bxc4 14.Nxc4 d5! 15.exd5 Nfxd5 16.Nxd5 Qxd5 17.Qxd5 Nxd5= with an
equal middlegame.
11...c5

693
12.Nf3
A) 12.Nf5? is worse. We can simply take it and advance our central pawn. 12...Bxf5 13.exf5 d5³ with a
slight advantage for Black.
B) 12.Nde2 Be6
B1) 13.Nd5 Nfxd5 14.exd5 Bf5 Our light-squared bishop is much more active than the opponent’s and
we are threatening ...c4. 15.g4 c4! 16.gxf5 cxb3 17.cxb3 Bf6=
In exchange for the pawn, we have more active pieces, a better pawn structure and the white king is
weak.
694
B2) 13.Nf4 If White had taken on e6 followed by Nf4, it would have transposed to the 11.Bc4 and
12.Nde2 line. 13...Bxb3 14.cxb3 Re8= This position was reached in Bok, B – Van Foreest, J
Amsterdam 2016.
C) 12.Ndb5 as tried in Beukema, S – Cornette, M Belgium 2019. 12...Be6!N Applying our idea without
caring that White can place their bishop on f4 to press heavily on our pawn.
C1) 13.Nd5 is an interesting pawn sacrifice, a challenge we must accept. 13...Nxe4 14.Re1 Nxd5
15.Bxd5 a6! 16.Rxe4 axb5 17.Bxe6 fxe6 18.Rxe6 bxa4
Position after: 18...bxa4
Although our king is slightly weaker, we still have an extra pawn and we are ahead in development.
The plan is to exchange bishops on g5. 19.Qd5 Kh8 20.Qxb7 Bg5= with an equal endgame.
695
C2) 13.Bf4 c4 Blocking the bishop so as to continue with ...d5. 14.Ba2 d5!
C2.1) 15.exd5 Nfxd5 16.Nxd5 Qxd5 17.Qxd5 Nxd5 18.Bd6 Bxd6 19.Nxd6 Rad8! Provoking the
knight to take one of the two pawns. 20.Nxb7 [20.Nxc4 Nb4 21.Bb3 Nxc2 22.Bxc2 Bxc4= with a
drawish endgame.] 20...Rb8 21.Nc5 Rxb2 22.Nxe6 fxe6 23.Bxc4 Rxc2=
Position after: 23...Rxc2=
We have a weak e6-pawn but in return, we have a strong knight and more active rooks.
C2.2) 15.Nc7 Rc8 16.N3xd5 Nfxd5 17.exd5 Bxd5 18.Nxd5 Nxd5
696
Black’s position seems more pleasant to play, our pieces are more active and the bishop on a2 has a
hard life. 19.Be5 Bf6 20.Bxf6 Nxf6 21.Qxd8 Rfxd8 22.Rad1 c3 23.bxc3 Ne4= Thanks to our
superior pawn structure, the endgame is easier to play with the black pieces.
12...Be6
13.Bxe6
13.Nd5 is an attempt to gain an advantage but it doesn’t work for them. 13...Nxe4 14.Re1 Bxd5 15.Bxd5
Nf6 16.Bxb7 Rb8 17.Be4 Nxe4 18.Rxe4 d5=
697
With equality, although the black pieces are more active, so it seems easier for us to play.
13...fxe6 14.e5
The only attempt, as 14.Qe2 d5! 15.exd5 exd5= brings White nothing.
14...dxe5 15.Qe2
White cannot afford the exchange of queens because the c2-pawn would remain in the air.
15...Nc6
Bringing it to d4.
16.Nxe5 Nd4
698
17.Qd3
17.Qc4 Bd6
A) 18.Re1 Nxc2 19.Nb5! Threatening to take on e6 and then the bishop. 19...Bxe5 20.Qxc2 Nd7= Even
though we have a worse structure, we have an extra pawn, active pieces and now, we can transfer the
queen to the kingside to attack.
B) 18.Nd3 and here, it is essential to play accurately.
699
B1) 18...Nxc2?! That’s how Black played in the only game we have with this position: a normal move
but not the best. 19.Nb5! Nxa1 20.Qxe6+ Kh8 21.Nxd6 Ne4! Exploiting White’s undefended d3-
knight.
22.Qxe4 Qxd6 23.Bf4 Qc6 24.Qxc6!N The best option by far. [24.Qc4?? is a blunder: after 24...Nb3!
µ Black had a clear advantage in the game Morozov, N – Van Foreest, J Batumi 2018.] 24...bxc6
25.Rxa1 c4 26.Bd6!
700
Position after: 26.Bd6!
Taking advantage of the fact that in the event that the rook attacks the bishop, they can play Ne5
preventing capture due to the check on f7. 26...cxd3 27.Bxf8 Rxf8 28.Rd1² Although Black should
draw the endgame with correct play, it is easier to play as White.
B2) 18...Nd5!N is a critical move. 19.Nxd5 [19.Be3 Nxc3 20.bxc3 Nxc2 21.Rad1 Nxe3 22.Qxe6+
Kh8 23.fxe3 Qc7= with an equal position.] 19...exd5 20.Qxd5+ Kh8
The key to the sacrifice of the d5-pawn is that we now attack the pawn on c2 (in addition to threatening
the check on h2) and it cannot be defended. 21.Kh1 is best. [21.Qc4?? Ne2+ 22.Kh1 Ng3+!µ is a
tremendous blow that wins material.] 21...Nxc2 22.Rb1 b6= Although there is equality, Black’s
position is easier to play due to the better pawn structure.
701
17...Nd5
18.Be3
This position was reached in Grigoryan, K – Vassallo Barroche, M Vila Nova de Famalicao 2019.
18.Qe4 Guo, A – Ngo, B Orlando 2019. 18...Nb4N To take on c2. 19.Qxb7 [19.Bf4 Nbxc2 20.Rac1
Bd6=] 19...Nbxc2 20.Rb1 Rb8 21.Qe4 Bd6= and we have powerful activity.
18...Nb4!N
The best move, aiming to take on c2.
19.Qe4 Nbxc2
702
Position after: 19...Nbxc2
20.Rac1
20.Rad1 Rf5 As the open file is well-plugged, the best we can do is to activate our rooks through the f-file.
21.Nf3 Qb6 To play ...Raf8. 22.Nxd4 cxd4 23.Bxd4 Nxd4 24.Rxd4 Raf8= with strong pressure on the f2-
pawn.
20...Qd6 21.Rfd1
21.Bf4 Rxf4! 22.Qxf4 Bf6 23.Nd3 Qxf4 24.Nxf4 Bg5! The key move. 25.g3 e5= and I would find it
easier to play with the black pieces.
21...Rf5 22.Rxc2
The best move. Worse is 22.Nc4?! Qc6 23.Qxc6 bxc6³ with advantage to us as Black, thanks to the more
active pieces and an extra pawn.
22...Qxe5
23.Qxb7
23.Bxd4 Qxe4 24.Nxe4 Rd8! 25.Rd3 Bf8 26.Rcd2 cxd4=
23...Nxc2 24.Qxa8+ Rf8
With the idea of taking on e3, so White must seek the exchange of queens.
25.Qe4 Qxe4 26.Nxe4 Nxe3 27.fxe3 Rb8 28.Rd7 Kf8=
703
We have reached a completely equal endgame.
7.a4 has become a worthy alternative to the main line 7.Re1 and nowadays, it is more common.
Even though the main options for Black are 7...c6 and 7...a5, my recommendation is to play 7...exd4. I
think it’s a great choice and has been used very little instead of the two aforementioned moves.
If White decides to continue with 8.Qxd4, the idea is to occupy the c5-square with the knight and to leave
free the diagonal for our c8-bishop; then, we will transfer the knight from f6 to b6. In this way we can
attack White’s c4-bishop and vacate the f6-square to install our dark-squared bishop there. This will lead
to quick pressure on the e4-pawn.
Alternatively, if our opponent decides to take on d4 with the knight, 8.Nxd4, we will occupy the e5-
square. If the bishop decides to retreat to b3, we can continue with ...c5, trying to block the a2-g8 diagonal
with ...c4. To do so, we will have to prepare with ...a6 and ...b5. If, on the other hand, the bishop decides
to retreat to a2, we can try to occupy the weak b4-square with our knight by ...Nc6 and ...Nb4. Once we
have the knight there, we will play ...c5, aiming to exchange the bishop with ...Be6.
704
Table of Contents
Title page 2
Key to Symbols 3
Bibliography 4
Preface 5
Introduction 7
Chapter 1 – Rare 2nd Moves 12
Chapter 2 – 2.Nc3 51
Chapter 3 – 3.Nd2 and 3.Bd3 84
Chapter 4 – 3.f3 124
Chapter 5 – Rare 4th Moves 158
Chapter 6 – 4.f4 185
Chapter 7 – 4.Nge2 204
Chapter 8 – 4.dxe5 236
Chapter 10 – 5.g4 422
Chapter 12 – Sacrifices on f7 477
Chapter 13 – Various 7th Moves 503
Chapter 14 – 7.Re1 555
Chapter 15 – 7.a4 647
705

The Modernized Philidor Defense - Sergio Trigo Urquijo

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Modernized Philidor Defense - Sergio Trigo Urquijo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 – Rare 2nd Moves

Thinkers Publishing 2021

First edition 2021 by Thinkers Publishing

Managing Editor: Romain Edouard

Winning with the Philidor, Tony Kosten, Batsford 1992

Correspondence Database, ChessBase

Sergio Trigo Urquijo

Structure after taking on d4

Doubled and isolated pawns

Position after: 5...e5

Position after: 3...Qxd5

Already puts the opponent in trouble.

Position after: 4...Bg4

Position after: 6...Qa6+

Position after: 9...e6

Position after: 12...Nge7=

Position after: 5...Nc6

Position after: 9.Qxe2

Position after: 12...0-0-0=

Position after: 9...0-0-0!

Position after: 13...Nf6

Position after: 12...Nge7

7...Qd7 8.d4 e6 9.Bf4

As tried in Munoz Pantoja, M – Mateus, A Badalona 2019.

Position after: 9...0-0-0N

It’s best to put a lot of pressure on the center.

Position after: 13...Nd5=

Position after: 11...Nxd4

12...Qxd4 13.Qe2 Nf6 14.0-0 Bd6 15.Rfd1 Qa4 16.Be3 Be7=

Position after: 16...Be7=

Position after: 2.Nf3

Position after: 3...e5

Position after: 8...d5!N

Position after: 11...Bf6=

4...g6 5.Bg2 Bg7 6.0-0 0-0

Position after: 6...0-0

As we can see, it’s a totally symmetrical position.

Position after: 10...a6

Position after: 15...a5!!N

Position after: 7...c5

Position after: 8...Nc6

9...h6 10.a3 Be6 11.b4 b5!

Position after: 11...b5!

Gaining space on the queenside and preventing White’s b5.

Putting considerable pressure on this side.

13.a4 axb4 14.axb5 bxc3 15.Bxc3

Here, we have reached the game Amin, B – Debashis, D Doha 2016.

16.Bxd4 cxd4 17.Nc4 Qc7 18.Nfd2 Nd7=

Position after: 18...Nd7=

The idea is to continue with d3.

Position after: 4...Nxe4!

Position after: 4...c5

Here, our opponent has two interesting choices:

Position after: 9...Nc6

Position after: 18...e5

4.Nf3 d5 5.exd5 exd5 6.Bb3 Be7 7.0-0 0-0=

Position after: 5...b5!N

So as to continue with ...c4.

Position after: 6...Bb7

7.e5 Nfd7 8.exd6 Bxd6 9.Nc3 a6 10.a4 b4 11.Ne4 Be7=

8.Qe2 c4 9.dxc4 bxc4 10.Bxc4 Nxe4=

8...c4! 9.dxc4 b4 10.Ba4+

Position after: 14...Bxb2